HP StoreEver Interface Manager and Command View for Tape Libraries

Version 3.7.00 User Guide

Abstract
This guide provides information about installing the Command View for Tape Libraries (Command View TL) software, and using the Command View TL graphical user interface (GUI) and Interface Manager command line interface (CLI). This book is intended for system administrators and IT personnel responsible for operating and maintaining an Enterprise Storage Library (ESL) or Enterprise Modular Library (EML).

HP Part Number: 344841-026 Published: December 2013 Edition: 24

 Copyright 2003, 2013 Hewlett-Packard Development Company, L.P. Confidential computer software. Valid license from HP required for possession, use or copying. Consistent with FAR 12.21 1 and 12.212, Commercial Computer Software, Computer Software Documentation, and Technical Data for Commercial Items are licensed to the U.S. Government under vendor's standard commercial license. The information contained herein is subject to change without notice. The only warranties for HP products and services are set forth in the express warranty statements accompanying such products and services. Nothing herein should be construed as constituting an additional warranty. HP shall not be liable for technical or editorial errors or omissions contained herein. Acknowledgements Intel, Itanium, Pentium, Intel Inside, and the Intel Inside logo are trademarks or registered trademarks of Intel Corporation or its subsidiaries in the United States and other countries. Microsoft, Microsoft Excel, Windows, Windows XP, and Windows NT are U.S. registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation. Adobe is trademark of Adobe Systems Incorporated in the United States and/or other countries. Java is a US trademark of Sun Microsystems, Inc. UNIX is a registered trademark of The Open Group.

Contents
1 Introduction.............................................................................................10
New features in Command View TL 3.7.00................................................................................10 SNIA compliance...................................................................................................................10 User interfaces.......................................................................................................................11 Network configuration overview...............................................................................................11 External features overview........................................................................................................14

2 Command View TL GUI.............................................................................15

Primary management station....................................................................................................15 Prerequisites...........................................................................................................................15 Installing Command View TL....................................................................................................18 Starting Command View TL......................................................................................................21 Testing the Insight Remote Support............................................................................................23 Managing libraries.................................................................................................................24 Navigating Command View TL.................................................................................................25 Device numbering conventions.................................................................................................26 Initial configuration steps.........................................................................................................26 Adding and removing libraries.................................................................................................27 Adding libraries manually...................................................................................................27 Editing a library name........................................................................................................27 Removing libraries.............................................................................................................27 Changing the e-mail settings....................................................................................................28 Configuring e-mail alerts.........................................................................................................29 Managing license keys............................................................................................................31 Adding a license key..........................................................................................................32 Viewing the Management Station.............................................................................................33 Changing the network settings of the management station............................................................33 Changing management station passwords.................................................................................34 Recovering a password...........................................................................................................35 Changing the library settings...................................................................................................35 Changing the network settings of the Interface Manager card......................................................36 RDC Configuration..................................................................................................................37 Verifying connectivity..............................................................................................................37 Getting information about an EML or ESL E-Series library.............................................................38 Viewing the health summary....................................................................................................38 Viewing the physical connections..............................................................................................38 Viewing the status of components.............................................................................................39 Viewing the alert log...............................................................................................................39 Changing the Interface Manager mode.....................................................................................41 Changing the connection properties of the interface controllers.....................................................41 Managing the interface controllers............................................................................................42 Replacing an interface controller..........................................................................................42 Clearing a WWN mismatch...............................................................................................43 Using TapeAssure...................................................................................................................44 Configuring standalone drives for TapeAssure........................................................................45 Configuring MSL libraries for TapeAssure..............................................................................45 Viewing TapeAssure information..........................................................................................45 Viewing the dashboard..................................................................................................46 Viewing the Health tab..............................................................................................46 Viewing the Library tab.............................................................................................48 Library TapeAssure views...............................................................................................51 Usage tabular view.......................................................................................................53
Contents 3

Empty slots per library...................................................................................................53 Moves per library..........................................................................................................56 Sorting and filtering.......................................................................................................59 Action menu drop down list............................................................................................59 Application bar............................................................................................................59 Viewing drive health......................................................................................................59 Viewing Drive Health and Life.........................................................................................61 Write Health tab......................................................................................................61 Life tab....................................................................................................................62 Viewing drive performance.............................................................................................63 Viewing drive utilization.................................................................................................65 Choosing a sample time................................................................................................66 Viewing drive performance and utilization history..............................................................67 Drive Performance tab...............................................................................................68 Drive Utilization tab..................................................................................................69 Utilization Analysis tab..............................................................................................71 Viewing the Performance Advisor graph...........................................................................74 Viewing the Collection Status..........................................................................................75 Viewing drive performance and utilization graph...............................................................76 Viewing detailed LTO drive information............................................................................77 Using the Tapes Content panel........................................................................................87 Viewing tape health......................................................................................................97 Viewing Tape Health and Life.........................................................................................98 Write Health tab......................................................................................................98 Life tab....................................................................................................................99 Viewing tape utilization................................................................................................100 Viewing the tape utilization and performance history.......................................................101 Tape Capacity tab..................................................................................................101 Tape Unloads tab...................................................................................................102 Tape Performance tab.............................................................................................103 Launching the Newly Added Tapes graph......................................................................105 Searching for a specific tape........................................................................................107 Viewing information about the Cleaning Tapes................................................................107 Exporting Library Data to CSV via TapeAssure................................................................108 Exporting TapeAssure panels as PDF files.......................................................................109 Scheduling a Library Data Export via TapeAssure............................................................112 Analyzing TapeAssure data from CSV files using the TapeAssure Analysis Template.............112 Backing up the TapeAssure database.................................................................................113 Restoring a TapeAssure database file.................................................................................114 Saving or copying a database backup file..........................................................................115 Using data verification..........................................................................................................115 Configuring the libraries to use data verification...................................................................116 Creating the data verification partition................................................................................116 Deleting the data verification partition............................................................................118 Viewing the Data Verification Control Panel.........................................................................118 Starting and stopping the data verification service...........................................................119 Setting the default verification type................................................................................119 Deleting the data verification test logs............................................................................119 Viewing the detailed data verification information for each library..........................................119 Viewing tapes that are present in the data verification partition.........................................121 Viewing tapes that are currently under data verification....................................................122 Viewing tapes that are queued for data verification.........................................................122 Viewing drives that are present in the data verification partition.........................................123 Adding, removing, and changing tapes from the queue...................................................125 Configuring the data verification policy...............................................................................125
4 Contents

Selecting the tapes for verification......................................................................................125 Setting up data verification email notifications.....................................................................126 Disabling data verification email notification...................................................................127 Viewing the test results for Data Verification.........................................................................127 Viewing the drive assessment results...................................................................................129 Working LTO4 and later tape drives........................................................................................130 Adding an LTO4 and later tape drive to a library.................................................................130 Replacing an LTO2 or LTO3 tape drive with an LTO4 or later tape drive..................................131 Changing the connection properties of LTO4 and later tape drives.........................................131 Using SNMP alerts...............................................................................................................132 Adding an SNMP trap......................................................................................................132 Editing an SNMP trap......................................................................................................133 Removing an SNMP trap...................................................................................................133 Saving the configuration of the library.....................................................................................134 Saving the current configuration.........................................................................................134 Restoring a configuration..................................................................................................134 Viewing a saved configuration...........................................................................................135 Rebooting components..........................................................................................................136 Rebooting a single component...........................................................................................136 Rebooting the Interface Manager and all controllers.............................................................136 Rebooting all components that require a reboot...................................................................136 Moving tape cartridges.........................................................................................................136 Updating the firmware with the Firmware Update wizard...........................................................137 Updating the firmware from version I1xx to version I2xx........................................................140 Restoring factory defaults.......................................................................................................141 Restoring factory defaults for one component.......................................................................141 Restoring factory defaults for all components.......................................................................141 Using factory overrides..........................................................................................................142 Disabling factory overrides....................................................................................................143

3 Advanced features in the GUI..................................................................144

Using license keys.................................................................................................................144 Configuring host HBA access with HP Secure Manager.............................................................144 About Access Control Groups (ACG)..................................................................................145 Creating an Access Control Group.....................................................................................145 Editing an Access Control Group.......................................................................................149 Removing an Access Control Group...................................................................................152 Synchronizing host access settings......................................................................................152 Viewing the device map....................................................................................................152 Partitioning a library.............................................................................................................153 Adding a partition...........................................................................................................153 Removing a partition........................................................................................................154 Removing all partitions.....................................................................................................155 Extending a partition........................................................................................................155 Upgrading capacity..............................................................................................................156 Capacity upgrades for ESL E-Series libraries........................................................................156 Capacity upgrades for EML E-Series libraries.......................................................................157 Enabling capacity upgrades..............................................................................................157 Encrypting data with the HP StorageWorks Secure Key Manager (SKM) or HP Enterprise Secure Key Manager (ESKM)..................................................................................................................158 Enrolling libraries with the SKM or ESKM............................................................................160 Selecting the SKM or ESKM as the key manager..................................................................160 Un-enrolling SKM or ESKM and reverting to the backup application as the key manager...........162 Changing the login on an SKM or ESKM............................................................................164 Changing the tier information for an SKM or ESKM..............................................................166
Contents 5

Adding or deleting addresses or hostnames for SKM or ESKM appliances..........................166 Adding a tier to the Key Manager Configuration.............................................................168 Deleting a tier from the Key Manager Configuration........................................................168 Updating certificates or the certificate authority for an SKM or ESKM.....................................168 Changing library partitions after initial SKM or ESKM setup..................................................169 Verifying connectivity from the library to SKM or ESKM.........................................................169 Transferring current HP StorageWorks Secure Key Manager (SKM) enrollment settings to an HP Enterprise Secure Key Manager (ESKM)..............................................................................170 Using support tickets.............................................................................................................172 Generating a support ticket...............................................................................................172 Viewing a support ticket....................................................................................................175 Saving a management station log......................................................................................176 Saving a support ticket.....................................................................................................177 Sending a support ticket by e-mail.....................................................................................177 Removing a support ticket.................................................................................................179

4 Command View TL CLI............................................................................180

Accessing the CLI.................................................................................................................180 Starting a serial session....................................................................................................180 Starting a Telnet session....................................................................................................181 Telnetting through the LAN...........................................................................................181 Telnetting through the cascade port...............................................................................181 Command syntax structure.....................................................................................................182 Using command sequences...............................................................................................182 Abbreviating commands...................................................................................................183 Device numbering conventions...........................................................................................183 Navigating the CLI...........................................................................................................184 Interface Manager mode.......................................................................................................184 Common CLI functions...........................................................................................................185 Configuring a library........................................................................................................185 Configuring the FC interface controllers..............................................................................185 Monitoring device status...................................................................................................186 Updating the firmware with the CLI.....................................................................................186 Generating support tickets with the CLI...............................................................................187 Using HP Secure Manager functions...................................................................................188 Accessing Basic Secure Manager through the CLI............................................................188

5 CLI Command Reference.........................................................................190

clear station.........................................................................................................................191 create host...........................................................................................................................191 download drive....................................................................................................................192 download interface...............................................................................................................193 download library..................................................................................................................194 download mgmt...................................................................................................................194 map host.............................................................................................................................195 move media.........................................................................................................................196 reboot interface....................................................................................................................196 reboot library.......................................................................................................................197 reboot mgmt........................................................................................................................197 remove host.........................................................................................................................197 replace interface..................................................................................................................198 restore interface defaults........................................................................................................199 restore system config.............................................................................................................200 restore system defaults...........................................................................................................201 save drive lttsupportticket.......................................................................................................202 save interface lttsupportticket..................................................................................................202
6 Contents

save library lttsupportticket.....................................................................................................202 save ltt................................................................................................................................203 save mgmt lttsupportticket......................................................................................................203 save system config................................................................................................................204 set drive hostport mode.........................................................................................................204 set drive hostport speed.........................................................................................................205 set host name.......................................................................................................................205 set inet ftp...........................................................................................................................206 set inet telnet........................................................................................................................206 set interface beacon..............................................................................................................206 set interface clearwwnmismatch..............................................................................................207 set interface hostport alpa......................................................................................................207 set interface hostport connection.............................................................................................208 set interface hostport mode....................................................................................................208 set interface hostport speed....................................................................................................208 set mgmt clock.....................................................................................................................209 set mgmt ntp........................................................................................................................210 set mgmt password...............................................................................................................210 set mgmt timezone................................................................................................................210 set mgmt wwnstate...............................................................................................................211 set mode.............................................................................................................................212 set net v6 dhcpv6.................................................................................................................212 set net v6 ipaddress..............................................................................................................212 set net v6 ipversion...............................................................................................................213 set net v6 manual.................................................................................................................214 set net v6 stateless................................................................................................................214 set network config ................................................................................................................215 set network dhcp..................................................................................................................216 set network ipaddress............................................................................................................216 set network snmpcommunity...................................................................................................216 set network snmptrap............................................................................................................217 set ssh hostkeys....................................................................................................................218 set supportticket disable.........................................................................................................218 set supportticket enable.........................................................................................................218 set system contact assetnumber...............................................................................................219 set system contact email.........................................................................................................219 set system contact location.....................................................................................................219 set system contact name........................................................................................................219 set system contact pager........................................................................................................220 set system contact phone.......................................................................................................220 set system name...................................................................................................................220 show drive access.................................................................................................................221 show drive hostport...............................................................................................................221 show drive info.....................................................................................................................222 show drive interface..............................................................................................................222 show drive productid.............................................................................................................223 show drive revision...............................................................................................................223 show drive serialnumber........................................................................................................224 show drive status..................................................................................................................224 show drive type....................................................................................................................225 show firmware available........................................................................................................225 show firmware revisions.........................................................................................................226 show host access..................................................................................................................226 show host info......................................................................................................................227 show host name...................................................................................................................227
Contents 7

show show show show show show show show show show show show show show show show show show show show show show show show show show show show show show show show show show show show show show show show show show show show show show show show show show show show show show show
8

host sparselunmap........................................................................................................227 inet.............................................................................................................................227 interface access...........................................................................................................228 interface beacon..........................................................................................................228 interface hostport alpa..................................................................................................229 interface hostport connection.........................................................................................229 interface hostport mode.................................................................................................229 interface hostport sid....................................................................................................230 interface hostport speed................................................................................................230 interface info...............................................................................................................231 interface name.............................................................................................................233 interface revision..........................................................................................................233 interface status.............................................................................................................233 interface wwninfo.........................................................................................................234 library access..............................................................................................................234 library info..................................................................................................................234 library interface...........................................................................................................235 library name................................................................................................................235 library productid..........................................................................................................235 library revision.............................................................................................................236 library sensors.............................................................................................................236 library serialnumber......................................................................................................237 library status................................................................................................................237 library topology...........................................................................................................237 license........................................................................................................................238 media.........................................................................................................................238 mgmt clock..................................................................................................................239 mgmt info....................................................................................................................239 mgmt log detail............................................................................................................239 mgmt log event............................................................................................................240 mgmt revision..............................................................................................................240 mgmt status.................................................................................................................240 mgmt timezone............................................................................................................240 mgmt wwnstate............................................................................................................241 mode..........................................................................................................................241 network info................................................................................................................241 network dhcp...............................................................................................................242 network ipaddress........................................................................................................242 network snmpcommunity...............................................................................................242 partition......................................................................................................................243 robotics status..............................................................................................................243 ssh hostkeys.................................................................................................................243 station.........................................................................................................................244 supportticket cache.......................................................................................................244 supportticket policy.......................................................................................................244 supportticket statistics....................................................................................................245 system contact assetnumber...........................................................................................245 system contact email.....................................................................................................245 system contact location..................................................................................................245 system contact name.....................................................................................................246 system contact pager....................................................................................................246 system contact phone....................................................................................................246 system info..................................................................................................................246 system name................................................................................................................247 system status................................................................................................................247

Contents

synch secmgr.......................................................................................................................247 unmap host..........................................................................................................................247

6 Troubleshooting......................................................................................249
LED diagnostic codes............................................................................................................249 Common issues....................................................................................................................249 ESL9000 Series issues......................................................................................................250 ESL E-Series issues............................................................................................................252 EML E-Series issues...........................................................................................................254 ESL G3 issues..................................................................................................................256 MSL issues......................................................................................................................256 ESKM enrollment issues....................................................................................................256

7 Support and other resources....................................................................259

Contacting HP......................................................................................................................259 Related information...............................................................................................................259 Related documentation.....................................................................................................259 HP websites....................................................................................................................259 HP tape cartridges......................................................................................................260 Product warranties.......................................................................................................260 Subscription services....................................................................................................260 Typographic conventions.......................................................................................................260 Updated regulatory compliance and recycling notices...............................................................261

A ALPA matrix...........................................................................................262 B New features in previous versions of Command View TL..............................263

New New New New New New New New New New New New New New features in Command View TL 3.6.00..............................................................................263 features in Command View TL 3.5.00..............................................................................263 features in Command View TL 3.1.00 and Interface Manager firmware version I274..............264 features in Command View TL 3.0.1 and Interface Manager firmware version I273................264 features in Command View TL 3.0 and Interface Manager firmware version I272..................264 features in Command View TL 2.8...................................................................................265 features in Command View TL 2.7...................................................................................265 features in Command View TL 2.6...................................................................................265 features in Command View TL 2.5...................................................................................265 features in Command View TL 2.4...................................................................................266 features in Command View TL 2.3.0.1 and 2.3.02.............................................................266 features in Command View TL 2.3...................................................................................266 features in Command View TL 2.2...................................................................................266 features in Command View TL 2.0...................................................................................267

Index.......................................................................................................269

Contents

1 Introduction
The HP StorageWorks Interface Manager for tape libraries is a management card designed to consolidate and simplify the management of HP StorageWorks ESL9000 Series,1 ESL E-Series, and EML E-Series tape libraries. The Interface Manager card provides the following features: Simple, unified, graphical setup and configuration of Fibre Channel (FC) interface controllers. Remote management of FC interface controllers via a Web-based GUI or command line interface. SAN-related diagnostics for key library components, such as interface controllers, drives, and robotics. Additional advanced SAN security and management features are available via licensing. These features improve security, performance, reliability, and ease of control.

New features in Command View TL 3.7.00

Administrator can manually select tapes in a separate media verification partition without interfering with host applications. Configurable policies permit periodic scans based on a user-chosen time interval. Support for Data verification and Drive Assessment in ESL G3 libraries for LTO5 and LTO6 drives and corresponding supported tapes. Manage media verification, configuration, and usage though CVTL while ensuring data is secure. Licensing enforcement and management for data verification license for ESL G3 libraries. MSL6480 license management via CVTL. User notifications of degraded tapes. Reports of data verification and drive assessment results. Library TapeAssure enhancements including the Library Dashboard with Library TapeAssure graphs. Support Remote Data Collection (RDC) for ESL G3, MSL6480, and MSL G3 libraries. SMI-S will implement the TapeAssure profile which can be collected by IRS RDC, and you can configure collection days for the RDC from the CVTL interface.

SNIA compliance
The Storage Management Initiative (SMI) was created by the Storage Networking Industry Association (SNIA) to develop and standardize interoperable storage management technologies and aggressively promote them to the storage, networking, and end user communities. For more information about SNIA and the SMI, see the following website: http://www.snia.org/ smi/home. The HP StoreEver Command View TL Provider follows the Storage Management Initiative Specification (SMI-S) and provides an interface for SMI-S compliant applications to manage HP StoreEver tape libraries. See the HP StoreEver Command View for Tape Libraries Software SMI-S Provider installation instructions at http://www.hp.com/support/cvtl for installation instructions.

1. ESL9000 libraries can be added, selected, and managed from the Command View TL 2.0 Launcher, but new features in versions 2.0 and newer are not available on ESL9000.

10

Introduction

NOTE: If installing Command View TL on the same management station as Command View EVA v10.2, special steps must be taken. For full instructions, see the HP StoreEver Command View for Tape Libraries Software SMI-S Provider installation instructions at http://www.hp.com/support/ cvtl.

User interfaces
Four different user interfaces (UIs) can be used to control the Interface Manager card. These UIs are provided by the Interface Manager card or by Command View TL. This chapter explains the purpose and use of each UI. The UIs are as follows: NOTE: The Interface Manager card is only used with EML and ESL E-Series tape libraries.

SerialUses a command line interface (CLI) and connects directly to the Interface Manager card through an RS232 serial interface rather than through the LAN. TelnetUses the same CLI as the serial interface, but requires the IP address of the Interface Manager card to initiate the session. This IP address can be set through the Interface Manager card serial interface or cascade port or, on ESL E-Series libraries, through the library Operator Control Panel (OCP). The advantage of using Telnet over the serial interface is that users can Telnet from any client machine that is on the LAN; a separate serial connection is not needed. You can disable Telnet (see set inet telnet (page 206)). NOTE: If you use Telnet to change the IP address of the Interface Manager card or library, you must log in to a new Telnet session with the new IP address.

SSHThis protocol uses the same CLI as the Telnet and serial interfaces, but over a more secure channel. Different SSH client applications are available for various operating systems. When connected via SSH, use it in the exact way you would use Telnet. Command View TLIs a browser-based graphical user interface (GUI). This is the preferred UI for controlling the Interface Manager card because it provides the most functionality and should be used in most circumstances. From any client on the LAN, you can use a browser to access Command View TL, which is hosted on a management station. For more information on using Command View TL, see Command View TL GUI (page 15).

You can have multiple sessions open at the same time (serial, Telnet, SSH, or Command View TL). If a write operation is in progress in one session, subsequent write operations for that library from other sessions will be denied.

Network configuration overview

With the EML E-Series tape library, the external LAN communicates directly to the Interface Manager card using the card's network IP address. The Interface Manager card processes requests and relays information to the FC interface controllers. ESL E-Series libraries contain a private LAN internal to the library. The library cabinet controller provides a bridge between the external LAN and the library internal LAN and Interface Manager card. ESL E-Series and EML E-Series tape libraries with LTO4 or later tape drives also contain an internal network switch to connect the LTO4 and later tape drives to the Interface Manager or library internal LAN. (page 12) and (page 13) show how the different UIs communicate with the Interface Manager card in the various libraries.

User interfaces

1 1

Figure 1 Network configuration for ESL E-Series tape libraries

1. SDLT, LTO1, LTO2, or LTO3 tape drives 3. FC interface controllers 5. Internal network 7. Management station with Command View TL 9. Telnet connection 1 1. Serial CLI via RS-232 connection 13. LTO4 or later tape drives

2. Robot 4. Interface Manager card 6. External network 8. Remote web browser connected to management station via HTTP 10. Library Cabinet Controller 12. Library boundary 14. Internal network switch (LTO4 or later libraries only)

12

Introduction

Figure 2 Network configuration for EML E-Series tape libraries

1. Hosts 3. FC interface controllers (up to four) 5. LTO2 and LTO3 tape drives 7. Robot 9. Serial connection 1 1. Management station 13. LTO4 and later tape drives

2. FC switch 4. Interface Manager card 6. Library robotics controller 8. Operator control panel 10. Telnet connection 12. Library boundary 14. Internal network switch (LTO4 and LTO5 libraries only)

Network configuration overview

13

External features overview

You can have either of the following Interface Manager cards. The two cards are functionally equivalent if the 342213-001 or 393531-001 has a 256 MByte RAM. If a 128 MByte RAM is installed the TapeAssure features will be disabled. NOTE: Interface Manager firmware version I272 and later requires 256MB RAM on the Interface Manager board to maintain a consistent connection with Command View TL. Figure 3 Interface Manager card faceplate342213001 or 393531001

1. Cascade in back-end Ethernet port 3. Front-end Ethernet port (to LAN) 5. Auxiliary RJ-1 1 serial connector or USB port (not used) 7. Reset button 9. Green link activity LED

2. Private Ethernet ports to FC interface controllers 4. Serial port 6. Board status LEDs 8. Green link speed LED

Figure 4 Interface Manager card faceplate480240-001

1. Cascade in back-end Ethernet port 3. Front-end Ethernet port (to LAN) 5. Auxiliary RJ-1 1 serial connector or USB port (not used) 7. Reset button 9. Green link activity LED

2. Private Ethernet ports to FC interface controllers 4. Serial port 6. Board status LEDs 8. Green link speed LED

NOTE:

For an explanation of the various LED states, see Troubleshooting (page 249).

14

Introduction

2 Command View TL GUI

HP StoreEver Command View TL software provides a browser-based GUI for remote management and monitoring of your Interface Manager card through a LAN. Command View TL is the preferred user interface for controlling the Interface Manager card because it provides the most functionality. In conjunction with the Interface Manager card, Command View TL provides the following: Configuration and management of the Interface Manager card and FC interface controllers Management of the entire library system Hardware inventory and identity information Status information for connected hardware Error reporting and comprehensive error logs Firmware management License management Access to TapeAssure.

IMPORTANT: While Command View TL is not required to manage ESL G3 and MSL6480 libraries, it is required for TapeAssure functionality. Command View TL can list ESL G3 and MSL6480 in the launcher panel, show the status of the library, and launch the ESL G3 and MSL6480 GUI to a separate browser. Other ESL G3 and MSL6480 features are managed directly through the library GUI. For more information on ESL G3 tape libraries, see HP Enterprise Systems Libraries (ESL) G3 Tape Library User Guide available from http://www.hp.com/support/eslg3. Command View TL is installed on the management station and communicates with the Interface Manager card through the LAN. The management station processes information from the Interface Manager card and hosts the Command View TL GUI. You can access Command View TL, either from the management station directly or through any client on the LAN, by using a browser-based GUI interface. Multiple Command View TL GUI clients can be open simultaneously across the LAN, and multiple libraries can be managed through the Command View TL software. NOTE: Prior to version 1.5, Command View for Tape Libraries software was called Command View ESL.

Primary management station

The primary management station is the first management station to manage a library. The primary management station is the only management station that collects and stores TapeAssure data. For best performance, the primary management station should be in the same physical location and on the same IP subnet as the libraries it manages.

Prerequisites
Management station minimum system For environments with fewer than 10 tape libraries, Command View TL requires a management station (server) with a minimum of: 1.6-GHz CPU, 2-GB RAM 2 GB of free disk space for installation 10/100 Base-T network card (static IP address recommended) Command View TL 3.7.00 installation support matrix:

Primary management station

15

NOTE: Command View TL software is only fully compatible with English-language versions of Windows.
Command View TL Operating System Microsoft Windows Server 2003 SP2 (32/64 bit) Microsoft Windows Server 2008 SP2 (32/64 bit) Microsoft Windows Server 2008 R2 SP1 (64 bit) Microsoft Windows Server 2012 Datacenter (64 bit) 3.7.00 Yes Yes Yes Yes

NOTE: On the above listed Microsoft Windows Operating Systems (64bit), Command View TL will run as a 32bit application. Compatible with VMWare ESX 3.5.00 and 5.1

Management station recommended system For environments with up to 20 tape libraries: 3.0-GHz CPU or greater, Dual Core, 4-GB RAM For environments with 20 to 70 tape libraries: 3.0-GHz CPU or greater, Dual Core, 16-GB RAM For environments with more than 70 tape libraries, or more than 900 tape drives (total), multiple management stations will be required. Browser minimum requirements Microsoft Internet Explorer v8, v9, and v10 Mozilla Firefox v15.0.1 or higher Google Chrome v24 or higher Adobe Flash Player 10.3 or greater NOTE: On Windows Server 2012 Internet Explorer 10 has an embedded version of Adobe Flash Player. Ensure that the most recent Windows updates are installed using the Windows update feature in the Control Panel. Windows Server 2012 configuration to use Adobe Flash applications: 1. Ensure that the most recent Windows updates are installed using the Windows update feature in the Control Panel. 2. Configuring Windows Server 2012: a. Click Server Manager in the bottom left corner of the screen. b. In the Server Manager dialog box, click Add Roles and Features Wizard. c. Continue with Next with the default options selected and provide specific options in the wizard. d. In the Features dialog box choose User Interfaces and Infrastructure (installed). This feature has three sub-features. Select the Desktop Experience check box. e. Click Next and the Install.

16

Command View TL GUI

3.

Configure Internet Explorer: a. Select ToolsCompatibility View Settings. b. Enter the website address, then click Add. c. Verify the Include updated websites lists from Microsoft and Display intranet sites in Compatibility View check boxes are selected. d. Click Close. NOTE: Clearing the Internet Explorer cache will remove the added websites in Compatibility View Settings. If the cache is cleared, the websites must be added back to the Compatibility View Settings list.

For ESL G3 Tape Libraries (only), Java Runtime Environment (JRE) version 1.6.0 Update 24 is also required. Enable Java support for browsers: 1. Close all open browser windows. 2. From the Windows Control Panel, select Java. 3. Select the Advanced tab. 4. Expand the Default Java for browsers node and select the item for your browser if it is not already selected. 5. Click OK.

An internet connection is recommended for Command View TL to connect to the HP Support website.

Recommended minimum screen resolution: 1 152 x 864 Library hardware requirements EML and ESL E-Series tape libraries shipped before November 2007 may require a RAM upgrade to be TapeAssure capable. This upgrade is customer installable and can be ordered as HP part number 464581-001 from the HP Parts Store (http://www.hp.com/buy/parts) or PartSurfer (http:// partsurfer.hp.com). After replacing the part using the included instructions, remove and re-add the library on the Command View TL Launcher window. Other requirements Command View TL version 2.8 includes support for the ESL G3 tape drives and library. Command View TL version 2.6 and later includes TapeAssure support for MSL G3 and 1/8 G2 tape drives (LTO Utrium 1840 and later) and Standalone SCSI and SAS tape drives (LTO Ultrium 960 and later). MSL G3 and 1/8 G2 support is enabled through that library's remote management interface. The Standalone TapeAssure Service requires a Windows agent downloadable from http://www.hp.com/go/tapeassure. Additional documentation can be found at that website. To install and run this software on Windows Server 2008, you must either login as Administrator, or perform the following steps: 1. Become a member of the Administrators group using the Server Manager (StartAll ProgramsAdministrative ToolsServer Manager). 2. If prompted by Internet Explorer, add the hostname of the management station to your Trusted Sites Zone. 3. Launch the Command View TL installer by right-clicking on the executable and selecting Run as Administrator. The Windows Management Instrumentation service must be started before installation or uninstallation of Command View TL.

Prerequisites

17

Installing Command View TL

NOTE: Upgrading to Command View TL 3.7.00 is only supported from versions 3.6.00 and 3.6 Patch 01. If your current Command View TL software is older than 3.6.00, upgrade to version 3.6.00 before you upgrade to 3.7.00. Before upgrading Command View TL to the latest version, backup the TapeAssure database. To perform the backup, refer to Backing up the TapeAssure database (page 113) and Saving or copying a database backup file (page 115). If you are upgrading from a previous version of Command View TL (Command View ESL prior to version 1.5), follow the procedure below to install the new version over the old version. All previous settings (device list, support tickets, proxy settings and so forth) are migrated during the upgrade. During the upgrade, the Command View TL installation path (destination folder) will point to the existing installation path where an earlier version of Command View TL is installed. Do not change the Command View TL installation path to a new location. Do not click cancel or close the installation dialog while the Command View TL installation/upgrade is in progress. Table 1 Command View TL upgrade support matrix for Windows Operating System variants
Command View TL Version Operating System 3.0.00 Microsoft Windows Server 2003 SP2 (32/64 bit) Microsoft Windows Server 2008 SP1(32/64 bit) No

3.0.1 No

3.1.00 No

3.5.00 No

3.6.00/3.6.01 Yes

No

No

No

No

Yes

Microsoft No Windows Server 2008 R2 (64 bit) Microsoft No Windows XP (32 bit) Microsoft Windows Vista (64 bit) Microsoft Windows 7 (64 bit) No

No

No

No

Yes

No

No

No

No

No

No

No

Yes

No

No

No

No

Yes

18

Command View TL GUI

IMPORTANT: To install and run this software on Windows Server 2008, you must either login as Administrator, or perform the following steps: 1. Become a member of the Administrators group using the Server Manager (StartAll ProgramsAdministrative ToolsServer Manager). 2. If prompted by Internet Explorer, add the hostname of the management station to your Trusted Sites Zone. 3. Launch the Command View TL installer by right-clicking on the executable and selecting Run as Administrator. No changes are required to remotely browse to a library or management station. 1. If the management station is running firewall software, configure the firewall to enable communication on the ports used by the management station; see Table 2. If the management station is running anti-virus software, ensure the ports that are used by CVTL are not blocked by the anti-virus software. The following network ports are used by the management station to communicate with the web browser (Command View TL): Table 2 Management station to web browser network ports
Port number 7 80 (TCP) 161 162-169 443 2715 4093 - 4095 5450 5696 7755 Purpose TCP (added in 2.4) bidirectional, HTTP library is a webserver for administration purposes UDP bidirectional, required to communicate SNMP with library UDP inbound, one port in the range required to receive the SNMP traps TCP inbound, HTTPS Secure Webserver TCP and UDP outbound In Command View TL 2.8.00 or lower TCP bidirectional TCP bidirectional TCP outbound, KMIP (future feature) communication port on the server. Library uses a non privileged port TCP (added in 2.4)

By configuring the firewall to enable communication through these ports, the web browser used to run Command View TL can be on the other side of the firewall from the management station. The following network ports are used by the management station to communicate with the Interface Manager card:

Installing Command View TL

19

Table 3 Management station to Interface Manager card network ports

Port number 8099 18098 8098 Purpose TCP inbound TCP SSL outbound TCP bidirectional in Command View TL 2.8.00 or lower

By configuring the firewall to enable communication through these ports, the management station can be on the other side of the firewall from the Interface manager. See your firewall documentation for instructions on configuring network access. Table 4 Interface Manger uses this port for SNMP
Port number 161 Purpose UDP SNMP from SKM bidirectional

Servers intending to receive SNMP traps will need to have this port open. Table 5 Interface Manger uses this port for Network Time Protocol (NTP)
Port number 123 Purpose TCP and UDP bidirectional

Servers intending to use NTP will need to have this port open. HP recommends that an Secure Key Manager (SKM) or Enterprise Secure Key Manager (ESKM) appliance (node) use the following network ports to communicate with the SKM or ESKM management user interface, or for SKM or ESKM communication to other devices. All ports are TCP and SSL capable. Table 6 SKM or ESKM network ports
Port number 22 161 9000 9081 9001 9443 Purpose SSH login to SKM bidirectional SNMP from SKM bidirectional Interface Manager login to SKM) bidirectional FIPS status server from SKM bidirectional SKM networking bidirectional Web login to SKM bidirectional

Table 7 SMTP port

Port number 25 Purpose SMTP to send e-mails bidirectional

Table 8 LTT service ports

Port number 7999-8099 701 1-7027 7000-7010 Purpose LTT Service requests from clients Used for SSH tunneling Used for LTT Notification server

20

Command View TL GUI

NOTE: The ESL G3 and MSL6480 notifies CVTL of status changes by connecting to CVTL on one port in the range of 162-169. Please ensure your firewall allows connections to each port in this range. 2. 3. 4. Download the Command View TL software from http://www.hp.com/support/cvtl. Save the EXE file to your management station and double-click to execute the Command View TL setup. Follow the instructions in the window to complete the installation. Command View TL is a web server that hosts a GUI interface to web clients. Command View TL runs on the management station as a service. By default, this service starts automatically whenever the management station is booted, and runs invisibly in the background. In most cases, the default installation settings are adequate. IMPORTANT: The typical installation does not include SMIS Tape Provider. In order to install SMIS Tape provider, choose the custom installation and select SMIS Tape provider from the features list. After complete installation of Command View TL , restart Command View TL service to receive Test Alerts when set from CVTL GUI Administrator+Send Insight Remote Support Test Alert. If you need to stop Command View TL from running on the management station, use the Services applet that is included with Windows. To access the Services applet, select Start+SettingsControl PanelAdministrative ToolsServices and locate the Command View TL service in the list. Use the Services applet to start and stop services, and to set whether the service is started automatically when the computer is booted. See the online help that comes with the Services applet for more information. 5. The product documentation is located in the docs directory on the Installation CD.

Starting Command View TL

Command View TL requires Adobe Flash Player 10.3 plug-in. If the Adobe Flash Player 10.3 plug-in is not already installed on your computer and you are using a Windows operating system, Command View TL attempts to download and install it for you. If prompted to install the Adobe Flash Player 10.3, click OK and follow the instructions in the window. Otherwise, manually download and install Adobe Flash Player 10.3 on the management station or remote client. To start Command View TL, open your browser, either on the management station or on a client machine on the LAN, and enter the following URL in the address field: http://hostname:4095/ (where hostname is the IP address or network name of the management station. If you are starting Command View TL on the management station itself, you can substitute localhost for the hostname). On the management station, you can also start Command View TL from the Windows Start button: Start+All ProgramsHP Command View TLCommand View TL Enter your user name and password The following table lists the user names that are available and the default passwords. For more information about the tasks each user can perform or to change one of these passwords, see Changing library passwords (page 34).

Starting Command View TL

21

Table 9 User names and default passwords

User name security admin Default password security admin

NOTE: Multiple users can log in at the same time. If one user is modifying the settings for a library, other modify operations for that library will be denied. Using Command View TL The Launcher window has the following menu tabs in the lower left corner: DevicesDisplays a list of libraries and virtual tape libraries that can be managed by Command View TL. You can add or delete libraries from this list, or select a library to manage. TapeAssureDisplays a consolidated summary of drive and tape utilization, advanced health, and performance, for every drive and tape on every library using this management station as its primary management station. It also includes data on the number of uses remaining on the cleaning tapes in these libraries. AdministrationDisplays the network settings of the management station. You can configure these settings. LicensingProvides a convenient way to track and safely store any additional license keys you have purchased for use with tape libraries.

Figure 5 The Launcher window

NOTE: For each library, the status column displays messages such as Firmware update in progress or Cannot communicate with library. It there are no messages to display, the status column displays the name of the management station that is managing the library or if the library is not currently managed, Ready to manage. Licensing Notes On initial installation of the Command View TL, you have a 60day instant-on license period and a subsequent 30day grace period to install the TapeAssure Advanced license.

22

Command View TL GUI

Instant-on license behavior for devices: During instant-on period, all the supported libraries can be added to the CVTL management station regardless of the license that they have. Double clicking the library from the devices page will allow the library to be managed. During the instant-on and grace periods, if all the libraries are licensed then no messages are visible on the devices page. During the instant-on period, the library is available to be managed. After 90 days, the license expires and a message indicates that you can no longer manage the library. If you have a permanent license, you can manage the library. During the instant-on period, the library is available to be managed for the first 90 days. (Prior to version 3.0 the license was only available for 60 days.) After 90 days, the license expires. A nagging message indicates that the license has expired in the device management screen. However, you can still manage and perform all the operations that were available during the instant-on period. If you have a permanent license, you can manage the library.

For ESL G3/MS6480 libraries:

For EML/ESL libraries:

Testing the Insight Remote Support

The Send Insight Remote Support Test Alert feature allows library administrators to verify the Insight Remote Support installation on the server. The Send Insight Remote Support Test Alert sends a test alert to Insight Remote Support; if Insight Remote Support receives the test alert you can consider the Insight Remote Support installation successful. CVTL provides an action to trigger an SMI-S Tape Provider event to the Insight Remote Support client/back end. This makes testing of Insight Remote Support installations easy. To test the Insight Remote Support installation, navigate to AdministratorActionsSend Insight Remote Support Test Alert.

You will receive a message that indicates whether or not the Insight Remote Support alert was sent successfully.

Testing the Insight Remote Support

23

Managing libraries
NOTE: The Launcher window contains all of the HP libraries that you have added. Different versions of Command View will open depending on the type of library that you want to manage. For instructions on using Command View versions earlier than Command View TL 2.0, see the documentation provided with your library. Table 10 Command View versions that open for different types of libraries
Type of library ESL E-Series, EML E-Series tape library MSL tape library (MSL2024, MSL4048, MSL8048, MSL8096) ESL G3 MSL6480 Version of Command View used to manage library Command View TL Command View MSL

ESL G3 Library Management Console MSL6480 Library Management Console

To manage a library, do one of the following: In the Launcher window, double-click the library. In the Launcher window, select the library, and then select ActionsManage Library.

When you select an EML or ESL-E library to manage, a new window opens with the following four tabs: StatusDisplays details about the library and a hierarchical view of the library and its components in the left panel. The right panel displays status information about the selected item. On the Status tab, you can also view a health summary of the entire library, view an alert log, or view the inventory of the library. ConfigurationLets you configure library settings, interface settings, network settings, management station passwords, and licensed capacity (for those libraries that support it). You can partition the physical library into multiple logical libraries (using Secure Manager), and configure HP StorageWorks Secure Manager or HP Enterprise Secure Key Manager (assuming the appropriate licenses have been purchased for those features). You can also save and restore a library configuration. OperationsProvides a convenient way to move media and to reboot the library or individual components of the library. SupportProvides useful resources for finding support. On the Support tab, you can also update firmware, generate support tickets, start a hardware replacement wizard, and restore factory defaults for the Interface Manager card and selected interface controllers.

The upper-left corner of the window contains an icon that indicates the library status. The upper-right corner contains a summary of the component status and recent alerts. The following table lists the status icons used. Table 1 1 Status icons
Icon Description CriticalMay prevent normal operations of the library and must be addressed immediately WarningDoes not require immediate attention but should be addressed as soon as possible InformationPresents information the user should be aware of but does not require immediate attention

24

Command View TL GUI

The name of the current library appears in the lower-right corner of the screen. To change the currently selected library, click Close in the upper-right corner of the screen to go to the Launcher window. While managing the MSL, ESL G3, and MSL6480 libraries, if prompted by Microsoft Internet Explorer, add the library address to your Trust Sites Zone.

Navigating Command View TL

Many windows are divided vertically into two panels. The left panel contains a list showing a hierarchical structure. The right panel displays additional information about items selected in the left panel. Figure 6 A two-panel window

Some windows show data in columns. To show text that is truncated, you can drag the vertical lines between the column titles to adjust the width of the columns or you can pause your mouse over some truncated text to show the complete text as a tool tip. Depending on the data being displayed, you can find more detailed information by: Double-clicking an item in the list. Selecting one or more items in the list, and then selecting an item in the Actions menu.

Most windows have an Actions menu that displays a list of actions that you can perform from that window or on the selected item. Menu items in bold type show the default action for that window or selected item. Double-click the item to perform the action. CAUTION: Use the various tabs, menus, and buttons throughout the program to navigate. Do not use the browser navigation buttons. Doing so may cause loss of configuration data entered on a window. Command View TL uses toolbar buttons to perform tasks. These buttons may or may not be available depending on the window. (page 26) lists these buttons and a description of the action performed.

Navigating Command View TL

25

Table 12 Toolbar buttons

Button Description ActionsDisplays a menu of available actions for the current window or selected items. RefreshRefreshes the data on the current window. PrintOpens the Print dialog box to print the data on the current window to the selected printer. ExportExports the data or report on the current window to a PDF file that you can save and print. HelpOpens a help topic associated with the current window.

Device numbering conventions

In some instances, Command View TL numbers devices differently from how they are numbered on the library front panel. (page 26) shows the device numbering conventions used by Command View TL and by the library front panel (when applicable). Table 13 Device numbering conventions, GUI
Device Drives Drive clusters Slots FC interface controllers FC host port numbers SCSI bus numbers
1

Command View TL One-based n/a One-based One-based Zero-based2 Zero-based2

ESL E-Series front panel One-based Zero-based1 n/a n/a n/a n/a

EML E-Series front panel One-based n/a One-based One-based n/a n/a

Drive clusters in the ESL E-Series libraries are zero-based, although they are not referred to from the front panel of the library. The zero-based numbering of the FC host ports and SCSI busses corresponds to the numbers that are printed on the actual hardware.

Initial configuration steps

After you have successfully installed the Interface Manager card and started Command View TL: 1. Verify that the proxy settings for the management station are correct. See Changing the network settings of the management station (page 33). 2. Add all libraries that will be monitored to Command View TL. See Adding and removing libraries (page 27). 3. Add the license key for Command View TL and any additional features that you have purchased. See Managing license keys (page 31). 4. Change the management station passwords. See Changing library passwords (page 34). 5. Configure the library name, system date and time, and contact information for each library. See Changing the library settings (page 35). 6. Edit the network settings of the Interface Manager card. See Changing the network settings of the Interface Manager card (page 36). 7. (Optional) Configure library partitions. Use Secure Manager (license required) to configure library partitions. Partitioning the library erases all host access configuration settings. See Partitioning a library (page 153).
26 Command View TL GUI

Adding and removing libraries

You must add any library that you want to manage to each management station or client that you want to launch or manage it from. NOTE: The primary management station collects and stores data from the library. For best performance, the primary management station should be in the same physical location and on the same IP subnet as the libraries it will manage. NOTE: If you wish to change the primary management station for a library, first remove the library from the current management station. If the library is not removed from the current management station first, the new management station will not be able to collect TapeAssure data until an Interface Manager clear station command is issued through the CLI (for EML and ESL E-series libraries. For more information on the TapeAssure status for a library, click the TapeAssure tab on the Launcher window.

Adding libraries manually

To manually add a single or multiple libraries: 1. In the Launcher window, click the Devices tab. A list of the libraries that you can currently manage appears. 2. Click ActionsAdd Library(ies). This launches the Add Multiple Library wizard. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. Click Next. Enter the management IP address or FQDN of the library. If you are adding multiple libraries, separate them with commas. Click Next. The Summary page shows the libraries that have been entered; select the libraries to add. At this point no validation has been done to determine if the library is invalid, down, etc. Click Next. The Progress page displays the libraries and the current progress of adding the library. Once all libraries are added, click Finish. The wizard closes and the newly added libraries are shown in the panel.

Editing a library name

NOTE: This feature is only available for the ESL G3 and MSL6480 libraries. To edit the library name: 1. In the Launcher window, click the Devices tab. A list of the libraries that you can currently manage appears. 2. To edit the library name, click ActionEdit Library name. The Library name dialog box appears. 3. 4. Edit the library name. Click OK.

Removing libraries
Removing a library removes it only from the management station that you are using when you remove it. When the library is removed from the primary management station, TapeAssure data is no longer collected. TapeAssure data previously collected on the primary management station is retained after the library removal and can be exported, if needed. See Using TapeAssure
Adding and removing libraries 27

(page 44), Exporting Library Data to CSV via TapeAssure (page 108), and Scheduling a Library Data Export via TapeAssure (page 112). NOTE: If the management station will not be managing this library in the future (for example, when temporarily managing a library from a management station on a laptop computer), remove the library from the management station before removing the management station from the network. To remove a library from the management station: 1. In the Launcher window, click the Devices tab. A list of the libraries that you can currently manage appears. 2. Select the library to be removed. 3. Select ActionsRemove Library. 4. Confirm that you want to remove the libraries. The confirmation window will indicate if deleting any of the selected libraries is of particular concern: 5. A library that is the primary collector of TapeAssure events and data An MSL library An ESL/EML library

If you get an additional confirmation list, select the libraries to remove then click Remove libraries.

Changing the e-mail settings

During troubleshooting, you can e-mail support tickets to HP Support. The e-mail settings menu enables you to specify the SMTP server and the maximum e-mail size. To edit the e-mail settings 1. In the Launcher window, click the Administration tab. The current e-mail settings appear. 2. Select ActionsEdit E-mail Settings to display the E-mail Settings dialog box. 3. Enter the SMTP address in the SMTP Server text box. 4. Specify the maximum e-mail size. E-mail larger than the maximum size are broken up into smaller e-mail. 5. Click OK to close the dialog box.

28

Command View TL GUI

Configuring e-mail alerts

Command View TL has the ability to e-mail users when it receives certain events. You can configure Command View TL to notify you when it receives any Warning or Critical event, as well as any network changes. To enable e-mail notification, you first need to have an SMTP server configured. If you do not already have SMTP configured, go to Changing the e-mail settings. Once you have your SMTP settings configured, you can enable e-mail notification. 1. In the Launcher window, click the Administration tab. The current settings appear. 2. Click ActionsEnable E-mail Notification. 3. Click Next to begin the Wizard.

4.

Check the libraries you wish to receive notifications about.

Configuring e-mail alerts

29

5. 6. 7. 8.

Enter the e-mail address that will receive the notifications. You may also enter additional e-mail addresses in the Alternative To E-mail Address field. Enter the e-mail address the notifications will be sent from. Click Next. Choose the notifications you wish to receive. Click Next. Click Finish to complete the wizard.

To disable the e-mail notification: 1. In the Launcher window, click the Administration tab. The current settings appear. 2. Click ActionsDisable E-mail Notification. A confirmation dialog to disable the e-mail notifications appears.
30 Command View TL GUI

3.

Click Yes to disable e-mail notifications.

NOTE: For ESL G3 libraries, e-mail notifications are sent only for TapeAssure events. To receive real-time library and drive health notifications from the libraries, open the library's own GUI from the Command View TL launcher panel and complete the appropriate Notifications / Alerts configuration steps.

Managing license keys

The License Key Summary window (on the Licensing tab) shows a summary of all the license keys pertaining to the tape libraries that are installed on the system. You can add and delete license key information from this window. The Interface Manager card, ESL G3, MSL G3, MSL 6480, and Command View TL software use this information to enable any licensable features that have been purchased. The License Key Summary window tracks license keys for the following features: Command View TL (separate licenses for ESL, EML, ESL G3, and MSL6480 tape libraries) Secure Manager TL (separate licenses for ESL, EML, and ESL G3 tape libraries) Licensed Capacity Panel Upgrade for ESL E-Series Capacity upgrade for EML 71e HP 6000, 9000, or 12000 Virtual Library System capacity ESL G3 Automated Media Pool License ESL G3 Partitioning License ESL G3 E-SKM Encryption Key License ESL G3 100-slot capacity upgrade license ESL G3 Secure Manager License ESL G3 Control Path Failover License ESL G3 Data Path Failover License HP ESL G3 KMIP Key Manager Client license TapeAssure Advanced license 8uExtension LTFS MSL G3 series HP Data Verification License for ESL G3 HP StoreEver MSL6480 Data Path Failover License HP StoreEver MSL6480 Encryption Key License ESKM HP StoreEver MSL6480 Control Path Failover License

To manage your license keys, in the Launcher window, click the Licensing tab. A list of your current license keys appears. The first two columns of the License Key Summary window lists the library name and license name, for each installed license.

Managing license keys

31

The remaining columns display the following information for each installed license key: License TypeCan be one of the following:

Permanent licenseHas no expiration date. Instant-on licenseAllows you to use the feature free of charge up to the expiration date. You must obtain a permanent license to continue using the feature after the expiration date without experiencing a reminder window.

Quantity (LTU)Displays the quantity purchased of the specified license. IdentifierDisplays the unique device identifier (library serial number) for that license key. Expiration DateDisplays the expiration date, if any, of the license key. License KeyDisplays the actual license key. License keys are generally too long to fit in this column. To see the entire license key, do one of the following to display the License Key Properties dialog box:

Double-click the license key. Select ActionsProperties.

Adding a license key

To add a new license key: 1. Obtain the license key from HP. See Using license keys (page 144) for instructions. 2. In the Launcher window, click the Licensing tab. A list of your current license keys appears. 3. To add a license key for EML, ESL-E, ESL G3, MSL G3, or MSL6480 library(s), select ActionsAdd New License Key from the License Key Summary page.

32

Command View TL GUI

4.

Click Browse to locate license keys in your file system or enter the license key in the provided text box, and then click OK. The new license key is added to the License Key Summary window. If EML or ESL E-Series is selected then the Library Identifier will be disabled as it is not required. The license information will be added to the license summary page.

Viewing the Management Station

The Management Station is the default screen displayed when you click the Administration tab.

The screen displays the following information: Network settingshostname, active IP address, Command View TL URL, proxy server, and WebServer port E-mail settingsSMTP server and e-mail size limit Factory Overridesyes or no for whether they are enabled Email Notificationyes or no for whether they are enabled DV E-mail Notificationyes or no for whether they are enabled RDC Configurationthe collection time period

Changing the network settings of the management station

To edit the network settings of the management station: 1. In the Launcher window, click the Administration tab. The current settings appear. 2. Select ActionsEdit Network Settings to display the Network Settings dialog box. 3. Set the required proxy settings. If you choose to use proxy settings, enter the web proxy hostname and web proxy port. If necessary, consult your network administrator for this information. NOTE: Command View TL uses proxy settings to retrieve software and firmware information through the Web. Command View TL attempts to detect the management station proxy settings at startup, but it does not use these proxy settings until instructed to do so. 4. Set the web server port. The default setting is 4095, which should not need to be changed. If you do change this value, the new value does not take effect until the next time a GUI is
Viewing the Management Station 33

5.

started; the current GUI is unaffected. This value can be viewed in the content pane of the Management Station tab. Set the host name or active IP address for the management station. The active IP address is the one used by the management station to communicate with clients and libraries. NOTE: It is important to verify that the correct host name or IP address is set. On dual networked servers, the installation process may have chosen the wrong IP address.

6.

Click OK to save your changes. NOTE: Changing the host name or active IP address terminates the current GUI session. To restart the GUI session, enter the new active IP address in the address field of the browser.

Changing management station passwords

IMPORTANT: Each user has a password (see (page 22)). Default passwords are set at the factory. For security reasons, you should always change these passwords. To change the password for the Command View TL management station: 1. In the Launcher window, click the Administration tab. 2. Select ActionsChange password. The Change Password dialog box appears.

3.

Enter the current password, new password, and confirm the new password. Also enter a security question and answer that can be used to recover the password if you forget it in the future.

34

Command View TL GUI

4. 5.

Click OK. If you want to change the password for additional users, close Command View TL, restart it, and log into the library as a different user (see (page 22)).

Recovering a password
To recover an existing password for the Command View TL management station: 1. In the Command View TL log-in window, click I've forgotten the password. 2. In the Recover Password dialog, answer the security question. Click OK. This will generate a new password for the user to login.

Changing the library settings

Library settings include the following items: Library name (editable) System date (editable) System time (editable) Synchronizing with NTP (editable) Time zone (editable) System contact name (editable) System contact phone number (editable) System contact pager number (editable) System contact e-mail address (editable) System location (editable) System asset number (editable)

To edit the library settings: 1. Double-click the EML or ESL E-Series library you want to manage. In the new Library window, click the Configuration tab. 2. In the left panel, select Library Settings. The current settings appear in the right panel.
Recovering a password 35

3.

Do one of the following: To edit the library name, select ActionsEdit Library Name. To edit the system date and time, select ActionsEdit Library Date/Time. Select either Set Clock Manually or Synchronize Clock with NTP Server. When synchronizing with NTP servers, enter the IP addresses of up to three NTP servers. Click Check to verify connectivity. To edit the contact information, select ActionsEdit Contact Information.

4.

Make the required changes, and then click OK. The library settings are stored in the memory of the Interface Manager card.

Changing the network settings of the Interface Manager card

Following are the network settings that pertain to the Interface Manager card of an EML or ESL E-Series library. IPv4 network settings

Hostname (editable) Address configuration (editable) IP address (editable) Subnet mask (editable) Gateway (editable) DNS domain name (editable) DNS addresses (editable)

IPv6 network settings

Hostname (editable) Domain name (editable) DNS servers (primary, secondary, and tertiary) Stateless addressing DHCP addressing Static addressing

MAC Settings

MAC address (not editable) Link selections (not editable)

Only the network settings can be edited. To edit the network settings: 1. If necessary, obtain the required network settings from your network administrator. 2. In the Library window, click the Configuration tab. 3. Under Network Settings, choose the IP version for which you'll configure your network settings. IPv4 addresses are the shorter, traditional addresses. IPv6 addresses are the second generation, 128bit addresses. 4.
36

Select ActionsEdit Network Settings to display the Network Settings dialog box.

Command View TL GUI

5.

Make the changes as required, and then click OK.

RDC Configuration
The RDC Configuration panel of the Administration page allows you to configure the collection time period for SMI-S. The default time period is seven days. To change the time period: 1. In the navigation panel select Administration.

2. 3.

Under RDC Configuration, click Configure Days. This opens a separate window. Enter a number. The maximum number of days is 999999999.

4.

Click OK. The screen refreshes to display the new time period.

Verifying connectivity
The Connectivity Check feature performs a quick check to verify that the management station can communicate with the selected library. NOTE: The Connectivity Check feature is available for ESL E-Series, EML, ESL G3, and MSL6480 libraries only. To use the Connectivity Check feature: 1. In the Launcher window, select a library, and then select ActionsConnectivity Check. The Please wait dialog box appears.

The Connectivity Check feature performs the test and displays the results. If a problem was encountered, the dialog box provides information to help you troubleshoot and resolve the problem. 2. When you are finished, click OK to close the dialog box. If a problem was encountered, perform the troubleshooting steps as indicated, and then run the Connectivity Check feature again.
RDC Configuration 37

Getting information about an EML or ESL E-Series library

The Identity screen displays summary information and a photo of the currently selected library. This screen is useful when you need to quickly find information pertaining to a library, such as the number of drives or interface controllers it contains. Another use for the Identity screen is finding the library serial number, which is required when ordering any of the optional, licensable features of a library (see Advanced features in the GUI (page 144) for more information about additional licensable features). In the Library window, click the Identity menu.

Viewing the health summary

The health summary shows the status of every component in the library. 1. In the Library window, click the Status tab. 2. In the left panel, select Health Summary. A list of the health of each component appears in the right panel. The first column of the Health Summary displays each component of the library in a hierarchical structure. Each component is shown with a green, yellow, or red status symbol that enables you to see if any components need attention. The second column describes the health of the component. The third column provides additional information that may be useful if there is a problem with the component. The fourth column lists recent alerts.

NOTE: The Health Summary window is automatically updated whenever the status of the library changes. 3. To display the properties of a component, do one of the following: In the right panel, double click a component. In the right panel, select a component then select ActionsProperties.

Viewing the physical connections

The Cabling View window shows the physical connection between devices. 1. In the Library window, click the Status tab. 2. In the left panel, click Cabling View. A list of the physical connections appears in the right panel. TIP: Verify that the list does not contain an Unconnected Devices node which would indicate that the Interface manager card is unable to establish connectivity with any of the library components. The first column shows the components in tree view. The second column shows the health of the component with an icon. The third column shows the serial number for the Interface Manager card, the World Wide Node Name (WWNN) for the interface controllers, the World Wide Port Name (WWPN) for the host ports, or a generic name for SCSI device ports.

38

Command View TL GUI

Viewing the status of components

The Component Status function displays the current status of the following library components individually: 1. 2. Library Library sensors (temperature, voltage, and fan speed readings) Robotics Drives Advanced LTO Drives Interface Controllers Interface Manager In the Library window, click the Status tab. In the left panel, select the component that you want to see the status of, either Library, Library Sensors, Robotics, Drives, Interface Controllers, or Interface Manager. Relevant information for that component shows in the right panel. The information displayed varies depending on the component selected. To display the properties of a component, do one of the following: In the right panel, double-click a component. In the right panel, select a component, and then select ActionsProperties.

3.

The information displayed varies depending on the component selected.

Viewing the alert log

To view the alert log: 1. In the Library window, click the Status tab. 2. In the left panel, select Alert Log. A list of alerts appears in the right panel. The following information shows for each alert.

Viewing the status of components

39

TIP: Click a column title to sort by that column. Click the column title again to sort in the reverse order. TimestampTime that the alert was recorded. Alert DescriptionBrief description of the alert. SourceDevice that triggered the alert. SeverityDisplays one of the following icons indicating the type of the alert:

3.

CriticalMay prevent normal operations of the library and must be addressed immediately WarningDoes not require immediate attention but should be addressed as soon as possible InformationPresents information the user should be aware of but does not require immediate attention

If the message is truncated, double-click an alert.

NOTE: Alerts may be triggered for certain drive and tape conditions when a support ticket is requested by the user, or if proactive log retrieval is enabled. The drives are checked for these conditions and associated alerts whenever a drive unloads a tape. The following list describes these alert conditions: Warnings or errors generated from device analysis, which will show drive or tape problems identified by looking at the drive logs. Temperature problems identified for either the drive or tape. Excessive drive usage, including load/unload life, head life, and reposition life. Write quality problems. Read quality problems. Excessive media usage, including read/write life and load/unload life.

For write/read quality and usage issues, the severity of the alert triggered will depend on the level of the issue. The alert description will include any recommended service actions.

40

Command View TL GUI

Changing the Interface Manager mode

In EML and ESL E-series libraries, the Interface Manager mode setting specifies how the FC interface controllers are configured. In Automatic mode, the host port connection settings will be configured the same across all FC interface controllers in the library. In Manual mode, the host port connection settings for each FC interface controller can be configured differently. For example, one host port can be configured for Fabric Attach and another can be configured for Direct Attach. CAUTION: HP strongly recommends that you leave the Interface Manager mode set to the default setting of Automatic. If the Interface Manager mode has been changed to Manual and you want to change it back to Automatic, the connection and speed properties must be the same on all the Interface controllers.. To change the Interface Manager mode: 1. In the Library window, click the Configuration tab. 2. In the left panel, click Interface Manager Mode. The current setting for the Interface Manager Mode appears in the right panel. 3. Select ActionsEdit Interface Manager Mode to display the Interface Manager Mode dialog box. 4. Change the mode as required, and then click OK. 5. If you are changing from Manual to Automatic mode, confirm that you want to reboot in the Reboot Warning dialog box.

Changing the connection properties of the interface controllers

The connection properties for the FC interface controllers include the following. World Wide Name (not editable) Connection Type (editable) Port Mode (editable only if Interface Manager mode is set to manual) Hard AL-PA (editable only if Interface Manager mode is set to manual) Speed (Gbps) (editable)

Only the connection type and speed of the ports can be set manually. The remaining items are configured automatically by the Interface Manager card. IMPORTANT: When the Interface Manager mode is Automatic, if you make changes to one FC host port, those changes are applied to all the FC host ports on all the FC interface controllers in the library. When the Interface Manager mode is Manual, changes apply only to the selected FC host port (see Changing the Interface Manager mode (page 41)). To edit the FC host port settings: 1. In the Library window, click the Configuration tab. 2. In the left panel, select Interface SettingsConnection Properties. A list of connections appears in the right panel. 3. In the right panel, select an FC host port, and then select ActionsEdit Port Connection Settings. TIP: When the library's Interface Manager mode is Automatic, it does not matter which FC host port is selected because the changes you make apply to all FC host ports. The Port Connection Settings dialog box appears.

Changing the Interface Manager mode

41

4.

Set the Port Connection Type to one of the following: Fabric (SAN) AttachUse this connection type when connecting all FC host ports to an FC switch (default setting). Direct AttachUse this connection type when connecting all FC host ports directly to a Host Bus Adapter (HBA) on a backup server. NOTE: It is a good idea to disconnect the FC port if they are set to fabric and connected to a HBA directly until the configuration can be made.

5. 6. 7. 8.

Set the Port Speed. Click OK to save the changes. Confirm that you want to reboot in the Reboot Warning dialog box. Save a new configuration.

Managing the interface controllers

The Interface Manager card retains the World Wide Names (WWN) of installed interface controllers. The Interface Manager card makes sure that your interface controllers maintain the same WWN, along with the host mapping configuration and partitioning configuration, in the event that they require replacement. This enables your backup configuration to continue unchanged, despite the replacement. Replacing an interface controller is done with the Hardware Replacement wizard.

Replacing an interface controller

After replacing an interface controller in a library with the Hardware Replacement wizard, all of the following should happen: 1. If version 5.7.xx or 5.6.xx of the firmware is detected in the replacement interface controller, the Interface Manager card will immediately update the firmware in the interface controller. 2. The Interface Manager card sets the WWN of the replacement interface controller to match the WWN of the controller that was replaced. 3. The Interface Manager card transfers the retained host mapping and partitioning configuration data to the replacement interface controller. TIP: With the Hardware Replacement wizard, you can replace more than one interface controller at the same time.
42 Command View TL GUI

To replace an interface controller: CAUTION: If you need to replace an interface controller, refer to the appropriate library and interface controller documentation for information on how to replace the hardware. Some interface controllers are hot-pluggable. Refer to the interface controller documentation to see if your interface controller is hot-pluggable. 1. Follow the instructions in the interface controller's replacement poster to remove and replace the card. CAUTION: You must connect the cables to the new interface controller exactly as they were connected to the original interface controller. If you don't, the Interface Manager card will not be able to reapply the settings. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. In the Library window, click the Support tab. In the left panel, select Hardware Replacement. Select ActionsLaunch Interface Controller Replacement Wizard. Follow the instructions in the wizard. Verify that the firmware revision in the Interface Controller does not need to be upgraded.

Clearing a WWN mismatch

Beginning with version 1.7, the Interface Manager card claims ownership of the interface controllers installed in a library. The MAC address of the Interface Manager card is stored in the memory of each interface controller, creating an association between the Interface Manager card and the interface controllers. If an interface controller that was owned by an Interface Manager card is transferred from one library to another, then the Interface Manager card in the new library will detect a WWN mismatch. To clear this situation, and to associate the interface controller with the current Interface Manager card: 1. In the Library window, click the Support tab. 2. In the left panel, select Hardware Replacement.

3.

Select ActionsClear WWN Mismatches. The following warning message appears:

Managing the interface controllers

43

TIP: Moving a configured interface controller from one library to a previously empty slot in another library may enable a duplicate WWN to exist in the SAN. The Interface Manager card and Command View TL will highlight this possibility, but you will need to take additional action as noted in the next step. 4. Verify that there are no other interface controllers with the same WWN in the SAN. To view the WWN of your interface controllers, cancel out of the Clear WWN Mismatches dialog, and then click the Configuration tab, and then select Connection Properties in the left panel. See Changing the connection properties of the interface controllers (page 41) for more information. After verifying that there are no duplicate WWNs in your SAN, repeat Step 1 to Step 3 to return to the Clear WWN Mismatches dialog. NOTE: 5. 6. If you find a duplicate WWN, contact HP support.

Click OK. The dialog closes, and the interface controller is now owned by the Interface Manager card. Save a new configuration by selecting the Configuration tab, then the ActionsSave Current Configuration option and following prompts.

Using TapeAssure
For EML, ESL E-series, ESL G3, and MSL6480 libraries that contain LTO tape drives, TapeAssure data is collected by the primary management station for the library. The primary management station is the first Command View TL management station to register the library. To make a particular Command View TL management station the primary management station for an EML, ESL E-series, ESL G3, and MSL6480 library, simply be the first Command View TL management station to register that library. To change the primary management station for a library: 1. Unregister the library from the current primary management station. 2. Register the library with the appropriate primary management station. The new management station is the TapeAssure collector for that library. After this change, all new TapeAssure data generated by the library will be sent to its new primary management station. To see the libraries for which your management station is the primary management station (and TapeAssure data collector), go to the Launcher screen in Command View TL. The Status column reports the primary management station for each library.

44

Command View TL GUI

Configuring standalone drives for TapeAssure

To configure a backup server with standalone HP drives to send TapeAssure data to a Command View TL management station, install and configure an application called the HP StoreEver TapeAssure Service on the backup server. This application can be downloaded from http:// www.hp.com/go/tapeassure using the following steps: 1. Navigate to the correct download for the required operating system. 2. Download and install the software on your backup server. 3. Re-boot the server. This is a necessary step to ensure the service has access to the tape drive, but only needs to be done once at install time. The service starts automatically once the reboot is complete. 4. Configure the service by modifying the sta_service.cfg file. a. Identify the server that will be running Command View TL. b. Set up any specifics such as the rate at which tickets will be pulled. Most changes to the configuration will be picked up automatically within five minutes though the service can always be restarted to pick up all the configurations. NOTE: If the Command View TL service is not active on the management station you have specified, support tickets generated by the standalone drives will be stored on the backup server and will be sent to Command View TL when the service becomes active.

Configuring MSL libraries for TapeAssure

To configure a MSL library to send TapeAssure data to a Command View TL management station: 1. Open the Remote Management Interface (RMI), web based management console for MSL libraries. 2. Verify that the firmware on your library is at minimum firmware revision: 3. 80969.90 40487.20 20244.90 1/8 G23.00

From the Configuration: Network Management display of the RMI, in the Command View TL configuration section: a. Enter the IPv4 address of the Command View TL management station you wish to use as TapeAssure collector. NOTE: The minimum firmware revisions listed above only support IPv4 management stations. A future firmware release will enable support for IPv6 management stations. b. c. Enter 8099 for the port number. Submit the new network configuration.

The first TapeAssure data will not be sent to this newly registered Command View TL management station until a tape has been written to or read from the library and then unloaded from its drive. NOTE: MSL libraries only generate TapeAssure data for LTO tape drives of generation LTO4 and later.

Viewing TapeAssure information

For Command View TL versions 2.5 and later, the TapeAssure tab provides a centralized view of health, performance, and utilization data for both tape drives and tape cartridges. Summary data
Using TapeAssure 45

for all tape drives and tape cartridges in every library managed by this management station can be viewed on the various Drives and Tapes pages accessible from this tab. NOTE: EML and ESL E-Series tape libraries shipped before November 2007 may require a RAM upgrade to be TapeAssure capable. This upgrade is customer-installable and can be ordered as HP part number 464581-001 from the HP Parts Store (http://www.hp.com/buy/parts) or PartSurfer (http://partsurfer.hp.com). After replacing the part using the included instructions, remove and re-add the library from the Command View TL Launcher window. NOTE: Command View TL version 2.6 and later includes TapeAssure support for MSL G3 and 1/8 G2 tape drives (LTO Utrium 1840 and later) and Standalone SCSI and SAS tape drives (LTO Ultrium 960 and later). MSL G3 and 1/8 G2 support is enabled through the remote management interface of the library. The Standalone TapeAssure Service requires a Windows agent downloadable from http://www.hp.com/go/tapeassure. Additional documentation can be found at that website. To access TapeAssure and the associated information: 1. In the Launcher window, click the TapeAssure tab. 2. In the left panel, under Drives, select Health, Performance, or Utilization. A list of the tape drives in the libraries managed by this management station appears. TIP: To change the order of the columns, drag the column header and drop it in the new location.

To find a specific tape drive or set of tape drives, enter the serial number or name of a tape drive in the Filter field and click the filter icon to the right of the text box. For example, to search for the serial number HU172404BF, enter h to find tape drives with serial numbers that contain h (matching serial numbers such as HU172404BF, HU171801UB, and HU272404BB. Continuing with the same query, when you enter u17, the list will narrow to drive names containing hu17 (matching serial numbers such as HU172404BF and HU171801UB). When you enter the 2 and click the filter icon (to the right of the text box), the list in this example will only contain HU172404BF. To clear the filter, click the Clear filter string icon.

Viewing the dashboard

The dashboard is the default screen when you select TapeAssure in the Navigation panel and contains two tabs. The Health tab is open by default and displays the current state of the libraries being managed by this CVTL management station and of the drives and tapes that are present in those libraries; see Viewing the Health tab (page 46). The Libraries tab displays the allocation details of the library capacity; see Viewing the Library tab (page 48). The Actions menu at the top of the screen provides these options: Export Report to export the TapeAssure dashboard graphs and tabular data to a PDF file that can be saved and printed Refresh to refresh the page with the most recent data

The toolbar at the top of the screen allows you to Refresh, Print, or Export to PDF. Viewing the Health tab The Health tab of the dashboard has four main parts: A pie chart containing the state of the licensed libraries, drives, and tapes. A red sector indicates the number of libraries, drives, and tapes that are in the critical state, yellow indicates the number that are in the warning state, and green indicates the number that are in the ready state. If there is no health information available, that message is displayed instead of a pie chart. The library health pie chart has an additional unknown state that means the data is in the database but the library is not added to the management station. Beneath the pie charts

46

Command View TL GUI

is a button that takes you to a summary of any specific libraries, drives, and tapes that need attention (in critical or warning states). This information is only available for libraries with the Advanced TapeAssure license. A table to the right of the pie charts lists the drives being polled by the hosts and the number of hosts polling them. Clicking the linked number lists the hosts that are polling that drive. A table beneath the drives being polled table lists the hosts and the number of drives that each one is polling. Clicking the linked number lists the drives being polled by each host. (This is the same information as the table above it from the perspective of the hosts instead of drives.) The table across the bottom lists the most recent 100 alerts that have been received by the management station.

Each of the tables contains a filter box to filter the rows based on the entered search criteria.

Using TapeAssure

47

NOTE: The TapeAssure dashboard information can be viewed only for the libraries having a TapeAssure Advanced license. If there are no libraries with the Advanced License, the following message is displayed: Insufficient data available to plot the graph or Command View TL TapeAssure Advanced license is not available. Please install the Command View TL TapeAssure Advanced license for the appropriate tape libraries. To install a license, click 'Licensing' tab on the left pane and add the Command View TL TapeAssure Advanced license. NOTE: On initial installation of the Command View TL, you have a 60day instant-on license period and a subsequent 30day grace period to install the TapeAssure Advanced license. For both time periods, the reminder messages providing the time period expiration date are shown on the dashboard. If you install TapeAssure Advanced licenses on all of the libraries, no reminder messages are shown. TapeAssure Advanced licenses are only available for MSL6480, ESL G3, Autoloader, and MSL libraries. Therefore, on EML/ESL libraries, links to access details from the TapeAssure panels will always be disabled.
Viewing libraries, drives, and tapes needing attention

This page, launched from the button on the Health tab of the TapeAssure dashboard, provides lists of the libraries, drives, and tapes that need attention, meaning that they are in either the warning or critical state.

Viewing the Library tab The Libraries tab of the TapeAssure Dashboard shows the allocation details of each librarys slots and drives capacity. It does not matter if the slots and drives are allocated to a partition or not or if there are tapes present in the slots. The tab also lists all of the tapes and drives grouped by type for all libraries with the Advanced TapeAssure license.

48

Command View TL GUI

The Libraries tab of the dashboard has four main parts: Slots Allocation: A pie chart displaying the number of allocated (already assigned to a partition) and unallocated (not assigned to a partition) slots for all of the libraries. Hovering over the allocated portion of the chart displays the numbers of total slots, full slots (loaded with a tape cartridge), empty slots (no tape cartridges loaded), and the percentage of slots allocated. For a single library, the full or empty slots are for all the partitions of the selected library. When you click the allocated portion of the pie chart, a window displays the number of allocated slots for each library as both a bar graph and table. The details include the number of full slots and empty slots. Click the linked library serial number to view the partition level details for that library. Clicking the unallocated portion of the dashboard pie chart displays the number of unallocated slots for each library; there is no partition level details.

Using TapeAssure

49

Drives Allocation: A pie chart displaying the number of allocated (already assigned to a partition) and unallocated (not assigned to a partition) drives for all of the libraries. Hovering over the allocated portion of the chart displays the numbers of total drives and the percentage of drives allocated. When you click the allocated portion of the pie chart, a window displays the number of allocated drives for each library as both a bar graph and table. Click the linked library serial number to view the partition level details for that library. Clicking the unallocated portion of the dashboard pie chart displays the number of unallocated drives for each library; there is no partition level details.

Drives by type: A bar chart showing the type of drives on each library (LTO4, LTO5, LTO6, older LTOs, and unknown), and the number of each type of drive. Tapes by type: A bar chart showing the type of tapes on each library (LTO4, LTO5, LTO6, older LTOs, and unknown), and the number of each type of tape.

NOTE: The TapeAssure dashboard information can be viewed only for the libraries having a TapeAssure Advanced license. If there are no libraries with the Advanced License, the following message is displayed: Insufficient data available to plot the graph or Command View TL TapeAssure Advanced license is not available. If the data is not available for a specific chart, the following message is displayed: TapeAssure Data Not Available to plot [chart name]. For ESL G3 libraries, the drives and tapes must be in the partition to view the library TapeAssure information.

50

Command View TL GUI

Library TapeAssure views

Library TapeAssure offers three different tabular views. Overview tabular view displays information for all the libraries for which the Library TapeAssure information is available in the CVTL MS database. Partition tabular view displays information for a selected library for which the Library TapeAssure information is available in the CVTL MS database. Usage tabular view displays information for all the libraries for which the Library TapeAssure information is available in the CVTL MS database.

NOTE: Library TapeAssure features are supported for the MSL G3, ESL G3, and MSL 6480 libraries only.

Overview tabular view

The Library TapeAssure Overview tabular view displays information for all the libraries for which the Library TapeAssure information is available in the CVTL MS database. To launch the Overview Tabular Data, go to TapeAssureLibrariesOverview and click on the Overview node. If there is no data, then a message is displayed stating: Library Overview is not available or libraries are using an older firmware. Please upgrade to an appropriate firmware for the tape libraries.

Table 14 (page 51) shows the tool tips for the Overview tabular view dialog box. Table 14 Overview tabular view tool tips for column headers
Column Header Library SN Library Description IP Address Library Hostname Library Firmware Revision Storage Slots Library Drives Mail slots Tool Tip The HP serial number of the library (for support use) Description of the library IP address Hostname of the library Firmware revision of the library Number of storage slots Number of drives Number of mail slots Using TapeAssure 51

Table 14 Overview tabular view tool tips for column headers (continued)
Column Header Frames/Modules Library Partitions Last Sample Time Tool Tip Number of frames (modules) Number of partitions The time at which the last sample was taken

Partition tabular view

By default when the Overview tabular view is displayed the first library is highlighted and the partition tabular view for the corresponding library is display below. By clicking on particular row of the Overview table, the corresponding partition for the selected library gets displayed in the partition table. NOTE: If there is no partition available for the selected library, a message is displayed stating:

Partition data is not available for the selected library.

Table 15 (page 52) shows the tool tips for the Overview tabular view dialog box. Table 15 Partition tabular view tool tips for column headers
Column Header Partition Serial Number Library Partition Number Encryption Config Tool Tip Serial number of the partition Partition number of the library Encryption configuration: Library managed (off) PLK Midrange Encryption Control Token Library managed ESKM (HP Enterprise Secure Manager) Library managed KMIP (Key Management Interoperability Protocol) Application managed Control Path Failover Control path failover configuration: Basic (off) The MSL tape libraries provide a basic control path failover capability Advanced The HP ESL G3 tape libraries provide an advanced library control path failover Number of Drives Number of drives in the partition

52

Command View TL GUI

Table 15 Partition tabular view tool tips for column headers (continued)
Column Header Number of Slots Number of Mail Slots Tool Tip Number of slots in the partition Number of mail slots in the partition

Usage tabular view

The Library TapeAssure Usage tabular view displays information for all the libraries for which the Library TapeAssure information is available in the CVTL MS database. To launch the Usage Tabular Data, go to TapeAssureLibrariesUsage and click on the Usage node. If there is no data, then a message is displayed stating: Library Usage data is not available or libraries are using an older firmware. Please upgrade firmware for the appropriate tape libraries.

Table 16 (page 53) shows the tool tips for the Usage tabular view dialog box. Table 16 Usage tabular view tool tips for column headers
Column Header Library SN Library Description Library Hostname Moves Library Power Cycles Library Total Power on Time Library Current Power on Time Last Sample Time Tool Tip The HP serial number of the library (for support use) Description of the library Hostname of the library Total number of moves over the lifetime of the library Total number of power cycles in the library Total time the library was powered on Power on time since the last power cycle The time at which the last sample was taken

NOTE: Library TapeAssure features are supported for the MSL G3, ESL G3, and MSL 6480 libraries only.

Empty slots per library

The library empty slots data chart is displayed under the Libraries link in the TapeAssure tab. The Library empty slots information is displayed in both a tabular and graphical view. The graphical
Using TapeAssure 53

view will be shown as a bar chart for a particular tape library over a particular time period. The Empty Slots graph shows the number of empty slots available per library.

Launching empty slots chart

A TapeAssure Advanced license is required to display the empty slots chart. If no TapeAssure Advanced license is found, the following error message will be displayed: Insufficient data available to plot the graph or Command View TL TapeAssure Advanced license is not available.Please install the Command View TL TapeAssure Advanced license for the appropriate tape libraries. To install a license, click 'Licensing' tab on the left pane and add the Command View TL TapeAssure Advanced license. If there is no data available for a particular library or the library is using an older firmware version the following message will be displayed: The chart is not available for one of the following reasons: There is not enough data for the selected time period. The library is using an older firmware. Please upgrade firmware for the appropriate tape libraries. To launch empty slots chart: 1. From the left navigation tree, select TapeAssureLibrariesEmpty Slots. The Empty Slots dialog box is displayed. 2. Specify the library serial number and time period. a. Select a library from the drop down list. b. Select a Sample Time from the list provided. By default Last Month is selected.

3.

Click Plot Chart. The Empty Slots chart is displayed.

54

Command View TL GUI

Empty slot chart view

The empty slots information is displayed in both a tabular and graphical view. By default, data is displayed in the graphical view. To see the data in the tabular view, click Go to Tabular View. The graphical view displays the data where the Y-axis is the number of empty slots and the X-axis is the Date/Time. The value of the Y-axis is dependant on the number of empty slots. The X-axis display the date and time of the support ticket.

NOTE:

Hovering over the data points data tip will show the empty slots and the date.

The date format is presented as mm/dd/yyyy and the time format is displayed as HH:MM AM/PM. Slider and Zoom effect A replica of the original chart is displayed as a miniature chart at the top of the dialog. Sliders can be used to zoom in and out on a specific data range.

Empty slots tabular view

Tabular view data is displayed for all the days in which support ticket data is available.

Using TapeAssure

55

NOTE:

Data filtered in the tabular view will also filter data in the graphic view.

Select Sample Time Select a sample time from the list provided or select a custom range by entering the start and end dates; see Choosing a sample time (page 66). NOTE: Library TapeAssure features are supported for the MSL G3, ESL G3, and MSL 6480 libraries only.

Moves per library

The moves per library data chart is displayed under the Libraries link in the TapeAssure tab. The Library Moves information is displayed in both a tabular and graphical view. The data is shown as a line chart for a particular tape library over a particular time period. The Moves graph shows the number of moves (tapes moved from slot to drive or vice versa and slot to slot) performed per library.

Launching moves chart

To launch the moves chart: 1. From the navigation tree, select TapeAssureLibrariesMoves. The Media Moves dialog box is displayed.

56

Command View TL GUI

2.

Specify the library serial number and time period. a. Select a library from the drop down menu. b. Select a Sample Time from the list provided. By default Last Month is selected.

NOTE: A TapeAssure Advanced license is required to display the chart. If no TapeAssure Advanced license is found, the following error message will be displayed: Insufficient data available to plot the graph or Command View TL TapeAssure Advanced license is not available. Please install the Command View TL TapeAssure Advanced license for the appropriate tape libraries. To install a license, click 'Licensing' on the left pane and add the Command View TL TapeAssure Advanced license. If there is no data available for a particular library or the library is using an older firmware version the following message will be displayed: The chart is not available for one of the following reasons: There is not enough data for the selected time period. The library is using an older firmware. Please upgrade firmware for the appropriate tape libraries. 3. Click Plot Chart. The Moves chart is displayed.

Moves chart
The moves chart information is displayed in both a tabular and graphical view. By default, data is displayed in the graphical view. To see the data in the tabular view, click Go to Tabular View. The graphical view displays the data where the Y-axis is the number of moves and the X-axis is the Date. The X-axis displays the date according to the zoom in and zoom out range. The date is displayed as mm/dd/yy. When grouped by months the date is displayed as mm/yy and when grouped by year the date is displayed as yyyy. Grouping is dependant on the amount of data available. If no support tickets are available for a particular day, the data point will not be plotted in the graph.

Using TapeAssure

57

NOTE: Hovering over the data points data tip will show the moves count and the date. The date is displayed as mm/dd/yyyy. Slider and Zoom effect A replica of the original chart is displayed as a miniature chart at the top of the dialog. The slider can be used to zoom in and out on yearly, monthly, weekly, and daily level. The minimum time period is one day. The end of the slider displays the dates relevant for the period as they are changed.

Moves tabular view

Tabular view data is displayed for all the days in which support ticket data is available. Grouping is not allowed in the tabular view. To view the data in the graphical view, click Back to Graphical View.

58

Command View TL GUI

Select Sample Time Select a sample time from the list provided or select a custom range by entering the start and end dates; see Choosing a sample time (page 66). NOTE: Library TapeAssure features are supported for the MSL G3, ESL G3, and MSL 6480 libraries only.

Sorting and filtering

Sorting is string based or number based depending on the data type. Filter is string based, similar to other TapeAssure tabular data viz: Drive Health, Media Health, etc. While filtering on the Overview table, for a successful filter the first row from the filtered row is automatically selected and the corresponding partition information is displayed below in the partition table. If the Export to PDF icon is clicked or the Export Report menu is selected after filtering, the report would show only the filtered data. If there is no data to be shown after a filter then the Export to PDF icon remains disabled.

Action menu drop down list

The Action menu bar is located at the top of the Overview dialog box. The Action drop down the following options: Export Report generates a report Refresh refreshes table data

Application bar
The Application bar is located at the top of the Overview dialog box. The Application bar has the following options: Table 17 Application bar icons
Click the Refresh icon to refresh the data.

Click on the Print icon to export data to a PDF.

Click the PDF icon to export data to PDF. NOTE: When exporting to a PDF from the Overview dialog, the librarys overview data for each library is exported and the partition data is displayed below it. Click the Help icon to navigate to the Help page.

Viewing drive health

To access health information for a specific drive: 1. In the Launcher window, click the TapeAssure tab. 2. In the Navigation panel under Drives, select Health. A list of the tape drives in the libraries managed by this management station appears. 3. Click on the drive, then select ActionsProperties, or double click the row, to launch the drive properties. 4. Click the Overall Health link to open the drive health graphs.

Using TapeAssure

59

The TapeAssure drive health tab lists: Serial NumberThe serial number of the drive. This is a static value and will change if a drive has been replaced. Use the serial number when contacting HP support. Overall Health An Overall Health icon and a details link allow you to view the Drive Health and Life graphs and tabular data. Drive TypeThe drive type including generation and interface type. Library Serial NumberThe HP serial number that uniquely identifies the library. Defined at manufacture, this is the number to quote when contacting HP support. Write QualityA measure of the amount of tape used to write high quality data to the last loaded tape followed by the amount of data written to the tape since it was last loaded. Even if the warning is reported, the data will still have been written at high quality (unless the drive reported an error) though more tape was used than recommended by HP. Note that a warning will normally trigger an alert. If appropriate, maintenance recommendations are made, such as to clean the drive and/or replace the tape. Read QualityA measure of the ease with which data was read back from the most recently loaded tape followed by the amount of data read from the tape since it was last loaded. Even if the warning is given, the data will have been read back correctly (unless the drive reported an error) though more error correction was required than recommended. Note that a warning will normally trigger an alert If appropriate, maintenance recommendations are made, such as to clean the drive and/or replace the tape. Head Life (% Life Remaining)The percentage of remaining head life based on the amount of tape passed over the head compared with worst case life expectancy testing in a clean environment. If a life warning is shown, the drive should be replaced at the next maintenance period. Reposition Life (% Life Remaining)The percentage of remaining reposition life based on the number of changes in direction of the tape over the life of the drive compared with the worst case life expectancy in a clean environment. If a life warning is shown, the drive should be replaced at the next maintenance period.

60

Command View TL GUI

Load/Unload LifeThe percentage of remaining drive load/unload life based on the number of load/unload cycles over the life of the drive compared with worst case life expectancy testing in a clean environment. If a life warning is shown, the drive should be replaced at the next maintenance period. Service ActionA recommendation for service based on the health criteria. More than one service action may apply; hover over the entry with the mouse to see a tool tip containing all recommended service actions for the drive.

Viewing Drive Health and Life

The Drive Health and Life shows the recent health history of a particular drive. Library administrator can view health related information including a graph showing what the drive health has been across the last several backups. In addition, you can drill down into the recent health history of any tapes used by that drive. This helps determine if there is a problem with the drive or with a particular tape being used by that drive. To view the Drive Health and Life: 1. In the Launcher window, click the TapeAssure tab. 2. In the Navigation panel under Drives, select Health. A list of all of the drives appears. Alternatively, in the Navigation panel under Dashboard, select Drives and Tapes Needing Attention. A list of all drives that need attention (in a critical or warning state) appears. 3. Click on the drive, then select ActionsProperties, or double click the row, to launch the drive properties. NOTE: 4. Details links are only enabled for drives that belong to licensed libraries.

Click the Overall Health link to open the drive health graphs. Drive Serial Number Library Serial Number Overall Health calculated based on the recent worst status of the drive health parameters HeadLifeQual, LoadLifeQual, RepoLifeQual and WriteHealth Write Health/Read Health based on the latest support ticket

The Drive Health/Life window displays the following:

Write Health tab The Write Health tab shows the write health history of the drives for different tapes as both a graph and a table.

Using TapeAssure

61

On the graph, the red, yellow, and green bands represent the critical, warning, and healthy status, respectively, of the drive write health. The X-axis represents the barcode/cartridge serial number and the Y-axis represents the write health of drive. The table displays the barcode/cartridge serial number, the date/time, and the write health of the drives of the tapes. Use the Sample Time to filter the write health history for all the tapes loaded onto a drive between the specified time intervals. In addition, each barcode/cartridge serial number is a link to the tape write health history. To export the report as a PDF, click Export Report at the bottom of the graph. This will allow you to save the graph locally or email it. You can also export only the graphs or the complete report. Life tab A set of parameters decide the life of a drive and they deteriorate over time due to wear and tear. Each backup leads to the generation of a Support Ticket that contains information about the quality of the backup. These life parameters keep reducing with each backup. The Life tab shows the trend of deterioration of the life parameters and recommends the action to be taken before the drive becomes unusable. The following are the life parameters of a drive and are compared to the HP recommended specification: DriveHeadLife the remaining headlife of the drive DriveLoadLife the remaining load/unload life of the drive DriveRepositionLife the remaining reposition life of the drive

A simple regression is done on the historical data that the management station has collected over a period of time for these life parameters. As a result, there is a trend line for each parameter. The trend line with a greater slope value indicates that the parameter is deteriorating at a faster pace than the others and determines the life of the drive (this parameter leads to the drive being unusable faster than the other parameters). The screen displays the trend line of the parameter that is degrading at the fastest pace. The trend line is then extrapolated to know when this parameter

62

Command View TL GUI

would become 0 in time; based on this date, a set of recommendations are made for this drive. There are three kinds of messages for the life of a drive: Drive is at the end of its recommended life if any of the drives life parameters are already less than or equal to 0 based on last sample date Drive is nearing the end of its recommended service life when drive life trend data for <drive serial number> indicates the drive will reach the end of its serviceable life within the next six months Drive is within the recommended serviceable life when drive life trend data for <drive serial number> indicates the drive will not reach the end of its serviceable life within the next six months

NOTE: All the analysis and recommendations are based on the date when the last support ticket was received by the management station for a particular tape/drive.

Viewing drive performance

To access performance information for a specific drive: 1. In the Launcher window, click the TapeAssure tab. 2. In the Navigation panel under Drives, select Performance. A list of the tape drives in the libraries managed by this management station appears. 3. Click on the drive, then select ActionsProperties. 4. To view the drive performance and utilization history of a particular drive, click the linked serial number. See Viewing drive performance and utilization history (page 67).

Using TapeAssure

63

The TapeAssure drive performance tab lists: Serial NumberThe serial number of the drive. This is a static value and will change if a drive has been replaced. Use the serial number when contacting HP support. Drive TypeThe drive type including generation and interface type. Library SN (or Hostname)The HP serial number that uniquely identifies the library. Defined at manufacture, this is the number to quote when contacting HP support. Media Transfer RateThe transfer rate of the data, after compression, transferred to/from the tape since the last load. Estimated Host Transfer RateThe estimated transfer rate of the host averaged over the data transferred to/from the tape since the last load. Write Compression Ratio The average write compression ratio of the data written to tape since the last load. Read Compression RatioThe average read compression ratio of the data read from tape since the last load. Last Sample TimeThe local time when the key data was written to the database.

64

Command View TL GUI

Viewing drive utilization

To access utilization information for a specific drive: 1. In the Launcher window, click the TapeAssure tab. 2. In the Navigation panel under Drives, select Utilization. A list of the tape drives in the libraries managed by this management station appears. 3. Click on the drive, then select ActionsProperties. 4. To view the drive performance and utilization history of a particular drive, click the linked serial number. See Viewing drive performance and utilization history (page 67).

The TapeAssure drive utilization tab lists: Library SN (or Hostname)For drives in libraries, this column displays the serial number of that library. For standalone drives, this column shows the hostname of the server to which the drive is attached. Such hostname entries are highlighted with an asterisk (*). Drive TypeThe drive type including generation and interface type. Library Serial NumberThe HP serial number that uniquely identifies the library. Defined at manufacture, this is the number to quote when contacting HP support. Sample SizeThe Interface Manager samples data from the drive by retrieving key statistics from the drive. This occurs after a tape unload, or whenever a user generates a support ticket. A sample refers to one instance of pulling the key statistics from the drive. The sample size is the number of times the TapeAssure feature has retrieved these key statistics within the user selected sample time. Utilization (%)Measure of the time that the tape drive has been pulling tape divided by the amount of time that the tape drive has been powered on. Use this for measuring utilization from the hardware standpoint. Last Sample TimeThe local time when the key data was written to the database.

When a management station is reconnected to the network after more than 24 hours offline, the utilization panel display can be inaccurate. The TapeAssure data queued up on active drives and libraries arrives in bulk. To display a more accurate utilization, select ActionsChoose Sample Time, and choose the next longest time frame (7 days or more).

Using TapeAssure

65

Choosing a sample time

To choose the time frame for the data samples: 1. Open the Select Sample Time window. This window can be opened from several places within CVTL. The sample times available depend on which feature the window was opened from. You will see one of the following windows:

66

Command View TL GUI

2.

Select the sample time for the data to be retrieved from the current date and time range. Last 24 Hours (not available for some features) Last 7 Days and Week (not available for some features) Last Month Last Three Months Last Six Months Last Year Custom Range: Provide a start date and end date; the start date and end date are pre-populated with the previous month date and current date, respectively. The data will be retrieved from 12:00 a.m. on the start date to 1 1:59 p.m. on the end date. The custom range should be at least one month long.

3.

Click OK.

Viewing drive performance and utilization history

The drive performance and utilization history panel displays the drive serial number, drive type, library serial number, and sample time. The default sample time is one month. To view the drive performance and utilization history of a drive, use one of the following procedures: 1. Navigate to the Drive Utilization or the Drive Performance tab. 2. Click the linked serial number. The Drive Performance and Utilization History page opens and contains three tabs: Drive Performance, Drive Utilization, and Utilization Analysis. Or: 1. Navigate to the Tape Utilization tab. 2. Click the linked serial number. The Tape Performance and Utilization History page opens and contains three tabs: Tape Capacity, Tape Unloads, and Tape Performance. 3. On the Tape Capacity or the Tape Performance tab, click the drive serial number link. The Drive Performance and Utilization History page opens and contains three tabs: Drive Performance, Drive Utilization, and Utilization Analysis. If the drive has not been utilized over the selected time period, no data is shown in the graphical view.

Using TapeAssure

67

Drive Performance tab In the Drive Performance tab, information about drive performance over the last several backups is shown. There are two bar graphs for each day representing the native transfer rate and the host transfer rate. The X-Axis displays the tape's serial number and date. The serial number is a link that launches the Tape Performance and Utilization Dialog that defaults to the Tape Performance tab. The Y-Axis displays the transfer rate in MB/s with values ranging from 0 to 400.

Hovering over or clicking a host transfer rate data point on the graph displays a tool tip that shows the tape serial number, barcode, and the date and time. On the Host transfer rate graph it also shows the estimated host rate in MB/sec and the compression ratio. On the Native transfer rate graph it also shows the native transfer rate in MB/sec.

68

Command View TL GUI

Beneath the graph, the following utilization data is shown in a table: Barcode/serial number Date/time Estimated host transfer rate Write compression ratio Read compression ratio Native transfer rate

Drive Utilization tab In the Drive Utilization tab, the default time scale is Daily Average. The Daily Average scale shows a bar graph of drive utilization per day over the selected period of time. On the bar graph, the X-axis shows the days the drive is utilized and the Y-axis shows the drive utilization percentage.

Using TapeAssure

69

Hovering over a data point displays a tool tip with the date and percentage of time the drive was accessing the tape.

Beneath the graph, the following utilization data is shown in a table: Date when the drive is utilized Percentage Utilized how much time is been spent by the drive to pull a tape

70

Command View TL GUI

You can choose a new time frame for the data samples. See Choosing a sample time (page 66) for details. To choose the time scale, click the Time Scale drop-down list on the Utilization tab and select Per Support Ticket; information about how the drive is being utilized between two support tickets is displayed in a line graph.

You can zoom into this graph to see yearly, monthly, weekly, and daily information. The X-axis displays the time period; it shows the date accordingly as you zoom in and zoom out. The Y-axis, the utilization percentage, starts from 0 to 100, with the interval of 20. Hovering over a data point displays a tool tip with the utilization percentage (time spent pulling a tape) and the date. The date is in MM/DD/YYYY HH:MM AM/PM format.

At the top of the main graph, a preview-graph is shown to help you visualize which part of the total graph you are viewing by zooming. The slider will be placed below the preview-graph, which can be used to zoom the graph yearly, monthly, weekly and daily. The date will change on the X-axis accordingly. The minimum time period that can be zoomed in is one day. The end of the slider displays the dates relevant for the period as they are being changed. The sliders will not cross over. Utilization Analysis tab On the Utilization Analysis tab, you can select up to three drives to compare their utilization. To generate the graph:
Using TapeAssure 71

1.

The Drive Selection section, the Select Drives table shows each library; click a library to see the drives listed for it. Select the drives of interest and use the >> button to move them to the Selected Drives table. You can remove a drive from the Selected Drives table using the << button.

2.

In the Time Scale section, you select the filter criteria (known as the computational argument) for use in the comparison. When you choose one of the following, additional selection criteria are provided: Day of Week select a start and end date, select the days of the week of interest, then select the time period for each day.

72

Command View TL GUI

 3.

Daily Average this is the default. You can select the start and end dates. Monthly Average select the start and end month and the years. Quarterly Average select the start and end quarters and the years.

Click Plot Chart. The utilization trends are shown for the selected drives in a line graph. Beneath the line graph, the information is displayed in a table. You can change the computational argument by clicking Change Selection above the graph.

Using TapeAssure

73

4.

To export the report as a PDF, click Export Report at the bottom of the graph. This will allow you to save the graph locally or email it. NOTE: Exporting the graph to a PDF converts the 3D bar graph to a 2D line graph.

Viewing the Performance Advisor graph

The Performance Advisor graph is a single view to get the entire picture of drive in terms of performance and utilization for the given library and within the time frame. This helps to visualize the status of drives regarding how they are performing and how they have been utilized for the given time period. You can also get details for each drive and analyze details of performance and utilization for each day for the given time interval. To plot the Performance Advisor graph: 1. In the Launcher window, click the TapeAssure tab. 2. In the Navigation panel, select Performance Advisor. 3. Select the serial number of the library from the drop down box. Select the sample time from the options provided, or create a custom range. NOTE: The serial number of a library only appears in the drop down list if the TapeAssure Advance License is available in the management station for that library. 4. Click Plot Chart. The Performance Advisor graph for the selected library appears. The Performance Advisor graph appears if there is TapeAssure data available for the particular library for the time interval selected.

The Performance Advisor graph measures performance along the X-axis and utilization along the Y-axis. The graph is divided into four different zones: High Utilization High Performance: the drives that are at 70% and above of utilization and performance High Utilization Low Performance: drives that are highly utilized but their performance is low (less than 50% of the maximum speed of writing)

74

Command View TL GUI

Low Utilization High performance: drives that have high performance but low utilization (less than 50%) Low Utilization Low Performance: drives that are neither utilized to their potential nor able to perform to their maximum stipulated capacity

All drives which have utilization and performance values will be plotted as data points and listed as the legend to the right of the graph. Hovering over each data point brings up a tool tip showing how each drive performed in terms of utilization and performance in the give time interval; the tool tip lists: Drive serial Number the serial number of the drive. This is a static value and will change if a drive has been replaced. Use this serial number when contacting HP support. Drive Type the drive type including generation and interface type. Performance (%) the performance of the drive over the time period calculated as a percentage value. Host Transfer Rate transfer rate of the host averaged over the data transferred to/from the tape since the last load. Max Transfer Rate the maximum specified native transfer rate of the drive. Utilization (%) utilization of the drive over the time period calculate as a percentage value. Change the sample time click the Sample Time link; see Choosing a sample time (page 66) for details on changing the sample time. You can also get there from ActionsChange sample time or ActionsChange library and sample time. Return to the Performance Advisor selection page by clicking the Back to selection page link. Change the library by selecting a new library from the Library name drop down list, by ActionsChange library, or by ActionsChange library and sample time.

From the graph you can do several things:

NOTE: The performance advisor graph can be viewed only for the libraries having a TapeAssure Advanced license. If there are no libraries with the Advanced License, the following message is displayed: Insufficient data available to plot the graph or Command View TL TapeAssure Advanced license is not available. Please install the Command View TL TapeAssure Advanced license for the appropriate tape libraries. To install a license, click 'Licensing' tab on the left pane and add the Command View TL TapeAssure Advanced license. NOTE: For a chosen library in given time interval, two or more drives might have exactly same utilization and performance values. In these cases, the data points will overlap. Click these points to launch the top-most drive detailed graph, or click the library in the legend to launch the individual drive detailed graph.

Viewing the Collection Status

The TapeAssure Collection Status displays the libraries that are registered with the Management Station listed by library type. It also lists those libraries managed by other management stations. To view the Collection Status: 1. In the Launcher window, click the TapeAssure tab. 2. In the Navigation panel, select Collection Status.

Using TapeAssure

75

The Collection Status provides three help links for: Configuring ESL, EML, ESL G3, or MSL6480 libraries to send TapeAssure data to this Management Station Configuring MSL libraries to send TapeAssure data to this Management Station Configuring Standalone Drives for TapeAssure

Viewing drive performance and utilization graph

The drive performance and utilization graph shows performance and utilization information for a particular drive for each day during the time interval selected. The bar graph shows three bars for each day: native transfer rate and host transfer rate (for performance), and utilization. Beneath the graph, the data is shown in a table. To plot the graph, click any data point in the Performance Advisor graph or click on any of the legends listed on the right. The Drive Performance and Utilization graph is displayed.

76

Command View TL GUI

Hovering over each bar provides the following information: Native transfer rate

Date The date for which the native transfer rate is calculated. Native Transfer Rate The transfer rate of the data, after compression, transferred to/from the tape for that particular day.

Host Transfer rate

Date The date for which the host transfer rate is calculated. Estimated Host Transfer Rate The estimated transfer rate of the host averaged over the data transferred from the host for that particular day. Compression Ratio The weighted average of write and read compression ratio of the data written/read to tape for that particular day.

Utilization

Date The date for which the utilization is calculated. Percent time spent pulling tape Measure of the time that the tape drive has been pulling tape divided by the amount of time that the tape drive has been powered on. Use this for measuring utilization from the hardware standpoint.

The tabular view lists all of the information above. It also provides a Sample Time link that launches a window that allows you to select a different sample time to plot; see Choosing a sample time (page 66) for details. Click Export Report to export the graph as a PDF file either downloaded locally or sent by email.

Viewing detailed LTO drive information

The Drive Properties page contains detailed information about the identity, health, environment, performance, and usage of a tape drive, along with detailed information about the last tape loaded into the tape drive. To open the Drive Properties page for a specific drive: 1. Select the TapeAssure tab. 2. In the Navigation panel under Drives, click Performance, Health, or Utilization to access a list of the drives enrolled this management station. 3. Click on the drive, then select ActionsProperties.) The default tab is whichever item was selected in the Navigation tree to list the drives. For example, if you clicked on Performance, the Drive Properties page will open to the Performance tab.
Using TapeAssure 77

At the top of the dialog box, above the tabs, the following information appears: Table 18 Viewing Drive Properties
Item Drive Identification Health Serial Number Description The serial number of the drive. The current status of the drive. The serial number of the drive. This is a static value and will change if a drive has been replaced. Use the serial number when contacting HP support. The serial number and barcode of the last tape loaded into the drive. The time at which the last sample was taken.

Last Loaded Tape Last Sample Time

This information remains visible when any tab is selected. 4. Click the Overview tab. The Overview page appears. Figure 7 Drive Properties window Overview tab

Information provided on the Overview page is explained in Table 19. Table 19 Information available from the Drive Properties window Overview tab
Item Identification Drive Type Serial Number The drive type including generation and interface type. The serial number of the drive. This value will change if a drive has been replaced. Use the serial number when contacting HP support. The version of drive firmware the drive is currently operating with. An identifier that distinguishes the firmware among multiple possible variants. Description

Firmware Revision Firmware Personality

78

Command View TL GUI

Table 19 Information available from the Drive Properties window Overview tab (continued)
Item Configuration Data Compression Usually set by the backup application. If enabled, the drive will perform hardware data compression. Refer to the backup application to configure data compression for backups. Usually set by the backup application. If prevented then the tape cannot be removed from the drive. Normally, media removal is enabled after the backup is complete but if the backup aborts it is possible that media removal will still be prevented. Refer to HP support documentation for resolution. The negotiated SCSI data rate. Description

Media Removal

Negotiated SCSI Burst Rate property

5.

Click the Health tab. The Health page appears. Figure 8 Drive Properties window Health tab

Information provided on the Health page is explained in Table 20 (page 79). Table 20 Information available from the Drive Properties window Health tab
Item Read/Write health (last loaded tape) Write Health A measure of the amount of tape used to write high quality data to the last loaded tape with the amount of data written to the tape since it was last loaded. Even if the warning is reported, the data will still have been written at high quality (unless the drive reported an error) but more tape was used than recommended by HP. A warning will normally trigger an alert. If Description

Using TapeAssure

79

Table 20 Information available from the Drive Properties window Health tab (continued)
Item Description appropriate, maintenance recommendations are made, such as to clean the drive and/or replace the tape. HP recommends the use of HP media for maximum confidence. Read Health A measure of the ease with which data was read back from the most recently loaded tape with the amount of data read from the tape since it was last loaded. Even if the warning is given, the data will have been read back correctly (unless the drive reported an error) but more error correction was required than recommended. Note that a warning will normally trigger an alert. If appropriate, maintenance recommendations are made such as to clean the drive and/or replace the tape. HP recommends the use of HP media for maximum confidence. Drive Life Head Life An estimate of the percentage of remaining head life based on the amount of tape passed over the head compared with worst case life expectancy testing in a clean environment. HP recommends HP media for increased head life. If a life warning is shown, the drive should be replaced at the next maintenance period. HP recommends HP media for increased head life. Reposition Life An estimate of the percentage of remaining reposition life based on the number of changes in direction of the tape over the life of the drive compared with the worst case life expectancy in a clean environment. HP recommends HP media for increased reposition life. If a life warning is shown, the drive should be replaced at the next maintenance period. HP recommends HP media for increased reposition life. Load/Unload Life An estimate of the percentage of remaining drive load/unload life based on the number of load/unload cycles over the life of the drive compared with worst case life expectancy testing in a clean environment. HP recommends HP media for increased load/unload life. If a life warning is shown, the drive should be replaced at the next maintenance period. HP recommends HP media for increased load/unload life. Device Analysis Result The results of the last analysis of the drive.

6.

Click the Environment tab. The Environment page appears.

80

Command View TL GUI

Figure 9 Advanced LTO Drive Properties Environment tab

Information provided on the Environment page is explained in Table 21 (page 81). Table 21 Information available from the Drive Properties window Environment tab
Item Internal Temperature Current Temperature The current temperature reported by the sensor located on the drive controller board. The current temperature value will be significantly higher than ambient temperature but dependent on it, as well as drive usage and air flow. The algorithm that assesses whether the drive is in specification takes account of the location of the sensor and uses that to estimate the thermal conditions of the tape path. If a warning is shown, the airflow for the drive should be improved. If this cannot be corrected, contact HP support. Note that a warning will normally trigger an alert. Max Temperature (since last power cycle) The maximum operational temperature reported by the sensor located on the drive controller board since the last power cycle with an assessment of whether the maximum temperature of the tape path is within specification. The maximum temperature value will be significantly higher than ambient temperature but dependent on it as well as drive usage and air flow. The algorithm that assesses whether the drive is in specification takes account of the location of the sensor and uses that to estimate the thermal conditions of the tape path. If a warning is shown, the airflow for the drive should be improved. If this cannot be corrected, contact HP support. Note that a warning will normally trigger an alert. Description

Using TapeAssure

81

7.

Click the Performance tab. The Performance page appears. Figure 10 Drive Properties window Performance tab

Information provided on the Performance page is explained in Table 22 (page 82). Table 22 Information available from the Drive Properties window Performance tab
Item Data Transfer Estimated Host Transfer Rate Media Transfer Rate Maximum Media Transfer Rate The estimated transfer rate of the host averaged over the data transferred to/from the tape since the last load. The actual, measured native transfer rate with that drive and tape. The Maximum Media Transfer Rate is determined by the drive type and represents the maximum native transfer rate specified for that drive type. Description

Compression Write Compression Ratio Read Compression Ratio The average write compression ratio of the data written to tape since the last load. The average read compression ratio of the data read from tape since the last load.

8.

Click the Usage tab. The Usage page appears.

82

Command View TL GUI

Figure 1 1 Drive Properties window Usage tab

Information provided on the Usage page is explained in Table 23 (page 83). Table 23 Information available from the Drive Properties window Usage tab
Item Usage Statistics Power On Time Tape Pulled Load/unload Cycles Percent Tape Loaded Total power on time of the drive since it was manufactured. Total tape pulled through the drive expressed in terms of the equivalent number of full volume writes or reads. Total number of tape loads for the drive since it was new. A comparison of the time the tape was in the drive with the time since the time it was loaded and the following tape load expressed as a percentage. For example, if the time between the two tape loads was 4 hours and this tape was in the drive for the first hour of that time then the tape loaded percent will be 25%. Use this for measuring utilization of the drive from the application standpoint. Duty cycle of the drive since the last tape load. This is a comparison of the time the drive has been active with the time since the last tape load expressed as a percentage. For example, if the last tape load was 4 hours ago and the drive has been active for 3 hours since then, the duty cycle will be 75%. Use this for measuring utilization from the hardware standpoint. Number of drive power cycles since the drive was manufactured. Description

Duty Cycle

Power Cycles

Using TapeAssure

83

Table 23 Information available from the Drive Properties window Usage tab (continued)
Item Cleans Firmware Upgrades Description Number of times the drive has been cleaned since it was manufactured. The number of times the drive has been updated with firmware.

9.

Click the Last Loaded Tape tab. The Last Loaded Tape page appears. Figure 12 Drive Properties window Last Loaded Tape tab

Information provided on the Last Loaded Tape page is explained in Table 24 (page 85).

84

Command View TL GUI

Table 24 Information available from the Drive Properties window Last Loaded Tape tab
Item Identity Barcode The reference defined within the user environment to identify the cartridge. This is the most useful reference for normal use as it should be visible within the application and is usually found on a printed label on the front of the cartridge. It is different from the cartridge serial number, which is defined at manufacture and used by HP support. Click the hyperlink on the barcode itself to access the LTO Tape Properties window for the specific tape. See Table 26 (page 89). The serial number that uniquely identifies the last cartridge loaded in the drive and which is defined during the manufacture of that cartridge. Reference this number when contacting HP support. It can be found on the bottom of the cartridge though it may be difficult to read. The cartridge may also have a barcode, which is defined within the user environment and not usable by HP support. The data format supported by the cartridge. The native (post compression) capacity of the cartridge in GB. The pre-compressed capacity is also given assuming a 2:1 compression ratio, which is an estimate for 'typical' data. The actual capacity of the cartridge will vary depending on the compression ratio of the data written. The manufacturer of the cartridge. Description

Serial number

Format Capacity

Vendor Configuration WORM

Indicates whether this is a WORM cartridge - Write Once Read Many. Data written to these cartridges cannot be overwritten or erased. Indicates whether the cartridge contains encrypted data or not.

Encrypted Data Health Worst case data (entire tape) Data written by last drive

The amount of tape used to write to the tape. This measurement is averaged across the entire tape. The amount of tape used to write high quality data to the last loaded tape. Even if a warning is reported, the data will still have been written at high quality (unless the drive reported an error). The warning lets you know that more tape was used to write the data than is recommended by HP. A warning will normally trigger an alert. If appropriate, maintenance recommendations are made, for example to clean the drive and/or replace the tape.

Life Read/Write Life An assessment of whether the cartridge read/write life remaining is within specification followed by an estimate of the remaining cartridge read/write life. Based on the amount of tape pulled over drive heads compared with HP recommended tape life (normally expressed in terms of 'full volume equivalents' which is Using TapeAssure 85

Table 24 Information available from the Drive Properties window Last Loaded Tape tab (continued)
Item Description the volume of data needed to completely fill a tape). If a life warning is shown, the cartridge should be retired at the next maintenance period. HP recommends HP media for increased load/unload life. An estimate of the percentage of remaining read/write life of the cartridge. Based on the amount of tape pulled over drive heads compared with HP recommended tape life (normally expressed in terms of full volume equivalents,which is the volume of data needed to completely fill a tape). When this figure reaches 0%, the cartridge should be retired. Load/Unload Life An assessment of whether the cartridge load/unload life remaining is within specification followed by an estimate of the remaining load/unload life. Based on the number of load/unload cycles compared with HP recommendation. If a life warning is shown, the cartridge should be retired at the next maintenance period. HP recommends HP media for increased load/unload life. An estimate of the percentage or remaining load/unload life of the cartridge based on the number of loads/unloads compared with HP recommendation. When this figure reaches 0%, the cartridge should be retired. Usage Native Capacity Native Capacity Used Native Capacity Remaining Total Tape Pulled Load/Unloads Temperature Maximum internal drive temperature The maximum operational temperature of the sensor located on the controller board of the drive the tape was loaded in followed by an assessment of whether this temperature is within specification. The temperature value will be significantly higher than ambient temperature but dependent on it, as well as on drive usage and air flow. The algorithm that assesses whether the drive is in specification takes account of the location of the sensor and uses that to estimate the thermal conditions of the tape path. A warning reported here should be considered as a warning that the temperature of the tape path has exceeded recommended limits and the airflow of the drive should be investigated. If a warning is shown, the airflow for the drive should be improved. If this cannot be corrected, contact HP support. Note that a warning will normally trigger an alert for the drive at the time so the alert log can be checked to identify the drive. 86 Command View TL GUI The maximum capacity of the tape. The amount of data stored on the tape. The capacity remaining on the tape after the exclusion of the used capacity. The total tape pulled expressed in terms of the equivalent number of full-volume writes or reads. The number of load and unload operations the drive has performed over the life of the drive.

Using the Tapes Content panel

The Content panel displays tape information and enables you to change the status of a tape by performing the following procedure: 1. Select the TapeAssure tab. 2. In the Navigation panel under Data Tapes, click Content to access a list all of the tapes in the libraries that are enrolled in the management station. The Content panel displays the following information for each drive: Tape StatusThe current status or availability of a tape. Possible values are Available, Vaulted and Retired. Available tapes are those currently residing in a tape library and available for use. BarcodeThe external barcode on the tape cartridge. Tape Serial NumberThe serial number that uniquely identifies the tape cartridge. Defined by the tape manufacturer. Library SN (or Hostname)For tapes in libraries, this column displays the serial number of that library. For tapes being used by standalone drives, this column shows the hostname of the server to which the drive is attached. Such hostname entries are highlighted with an asterisk (*). Cartridge TypeThe vendor ID and data format supported by the cartridge. FormatThe data format supported by the cartridge. PartitionedIndicates whether the cartridge has been partitioned or not. Partition 0 Native Capacity (Free/Total) The maximum capacity of partition 0 of the tape. Partition 1 Native Capacity (Free/Total)The maximum capacity of partition 1 of the tape. Encrypted DataIndicates whether the cartridge contains encrypted data or not. WORMIndicates whether this is a WORM cartridgeWrite Once Read Many. Data written to these cartridges cannot be overwritten or erased.

NOTE: In the Library SN column, an * marks hostnames with standalone drives. Other entries are tape library serial numbers.

Using TapeAssure

87

3.

To search for a specific tape: a. Select ActionsSearch to display the Search dialog box.

b.

Type or select the appropriate search criteria. For example, type the appropriate information in the Tape Serial Number or Barcode field. Use more than one of the criteria to further narrow the search. For example, select the appropriate library from the Choose Library field and select Yes in the Choose Partitioned field to display only partitioned tapes in the specified library.

Click OK. 4. You can change the status of tapes to Available, Vaulted, or Retired to indicate intent, and to have Command View TL display the tapes closer to the top (available) or bottom (vaulted, then retired) of the list. This will help make the list easier to use bacause the Available tapes, the tapes you will work with most often, will remain at the top of the list. To change the status of one or more tapes: NOTE: The status of a vaulted or retired tape remains until you change it back manually, or until a support ticket is created for that tape. At that point, the status is reset to Available. 5. To view properties of a specific tape, click on or check the box next to the tapes, then select ActionsProperties.) NOTE: Although you can choose more than one tape, the Properties action will display information for the most recently-selected tape only . The LTO Tape Properties dialog box appears, and displays the Health tab.

88

Command View TL GUI

At the top of the dialog box, above the tabs, the following information appears: Table 25 Information available from the LTO Tape Properties dialog box
Item Tape identification Health Cartridge ID Media Format Last Used Drive Last Sample Time Description Identifies the tape cartridge ID and media format. The current status of the drive. Identifies the tape by serial number and barcode. Identifies the data format supported by the tape. Identifies the most recent drive in which the tape was used. The time at which the last sample was taken.

This information remains visible when any tab is selected. 6. Click the Overview tab to view the general information about the selected tape. Table 26 Information available from the LTO Tape Properties window Overview tab
Item Status Library Serial Number For tapes in libraries, this column displays the serial number of that library. For tapes being used by standalone drives, this column shows the hostname of the server to which the drive is attached. Such hostname entries are highlighted with an asterisk (*). Indicates whether the tape is in a drive or not. Description

In Drive? Identity Barcode

The external barcode on the tape cartridge.

Using TapeAssure

89

Table 26 Information available from the LTO Tape Properties window Overview tab (continued)
Item Serial Number Format Vendor Capacity Configuration Encrypted Data WORM Indicates whether the cartridge contains encrypted data or not. Indicates whether this is a WORM cartridgeWrite Once Read Many. Data written to these cartridges cannot be overwritten or erased. Description The serial number that uniquely identifies the tape cartridge. Defined by the tape manufacturer. Identifies the data format supported by the tape. The manufacturer of the cartridge. The maximum capacity of the tape.

7.

Click the Health tab to view the following information about the selected tape.

Table 27 Information available from the LTO Tape Properties window Health tab
Item Health Effective Capacity (Average) The average quality of write operations for a tape, based on one write pass of the tape (in either the forward or reverse direction). The lowest value for write operations of the tape, based on one write pass. Description

Effective Capacity (Worst Case) Life

90

Command View TL GUI

Table 27 Information available from the LTO Tape Properties window Health tab (continued)
Item Load/Unload Life Description An assessment of whether the cartridge load/unload life remaining is within specification followed by an estimate of the remaining load/unload life. Based on the number of load/unload cycles compared with HP recommendation. If a life warning is shown, the cartridge should be retired at the next maintenance period. HP recommends HP media for increased load/unload life. An estimate of the percentage or remaining load/unload life of the cartridge based on the number of loads/unloads compared with HP recommendation. When this figure reaches 0%, the cartridge should be retired. Read/Write Life An assessment of whether the cartridge read/write life remaining is within specification followed by an estimate of the remaining cartridge read/write life. Based on the amount of tape pulled over drive heads compared with HP recommended tape life (normally expressed in terms of 'full volume equivalents' which is the volume of data needed to completely fill a tape). If a life warning is shown, the cartridge should be retired at the next maintenance period. HP recommends HP media for increased load/unload life. An estimate of the percentage of remaining read/write life of the cartridge. Based on the amount of tape pulled over drive heads compared with HP recommended tape life (normally expressed in terms of full volume equivalents,which is the volume of data needed to completely fill a tape). When this figure reaches 0%, the cartridge should be retired. Maximum internal drive temperature The maximum operational temperature of the sensor that is located on the controller board of the drive in which the tape was loaded, and whether that temperature is within specifications.

8.

Click the Performance tab to view the following information about the selected tape.

Using TapeAssure

91

Table 28 Information available from the LTO Tape Properties window Performance tab
Item Data Transfer Estimated Host Transfer Rate Media Transfer Rate Compression Write Compression Ratio Read Compression Ratio Last Sample Time The average write compression ratio of the data written to tape since the last load. The average read compression ratio of the data read from tape since the last load. The time at which the last sample was taken. The estimated transfer rate of the host averaged over the data transferred to/from the tape since the last load. The transfer rate of the data, after compression, transferred to/from the tape since the last load. Description

9.

Click the Usage tab to view the following information about the selected tape.

92

Command View TL GUI

Table 29 Information available from the LTO Tape Properties window Usage tab
Item Usage Native Capacity Native Capacity Used Load/Unloads Load/Unload Life The maximum capacity of the tape. The amount of data stored on the tape. The number of load and unload operations the drive has performed over the life of the drive. An assessment of whether the cartridge load/unload life remaining is within specification followed by an estimate of the remaining load/unload life. Based on the number of load/unload cycles compared with HP recommendation. If a life warning is shown, the cartridge should be retired at the next maintenance period. HP recommends HP media for increased load/unload life. An estimate of the percentage or remaining load/unload life of the cartridge based on the number of loads/unloads compared with HP recommendation. When this figure reaches 0%, the cartridge should be retired. Read/Write Life An assessment of whether the cartridge read/write life remaining is within specification followed by an estimate of the remaining cartridge read/write life. Based on the amount of tape pulled over drive heads compared with HP recommended tape life (normally expressed in terms of 'full volume equivalents' which is the volume of data needed to completely fill a tape). If a life warning is shown, the cartridge should be retired at the next maintenance period. HP recommends HP media for increased load/unload life. Description

Using TapeAssure

93

Table 29 Information available from the LTO Tape Properties window Usage tab (continued)
Item Description An estimate of the percentage of remaining read/write life of the cartridge. Based on the amount of tape pulled over drive heads compared with HP recommended tape life (normally expressed in terms of full volume equivalents,which is the volume of data needed to completely fill a tape). When this figure reaches 0%, the cartridge should be retired. Last Sample Time The time at which the last sample was taken.

10. Click the Last Used Drive tab to view the following information about the selected tape.

Table 30 Information available from the LTO Tape Properties window Last Used Drive tab
Item Identity Barcode The external barcode on the tape cartridge. Click on the barcode itself to access the LTO Tape Properties window for the specific tape. See Table 26 (page 89). The serial number that uniquely identifies the tape cartridge. Defined by the tape manufacturer. The type of drive last used, including generation and interface type. For tapes in libraries, this column displays the serial number of that library. For tapes being used by standalone drives, this column shows the hostname of the server to which the drive is attached. Such hostname entries are highlighted with an asterisk (*). The version of drive firmware the drive is currently operating with. Description

Serial number Drive Type Library Serial Number

Firmware Revision

94

Command View TL GUI

Table 30 Information available from the LTO Tape Properties window Last Used Drive tab (continued)
Item Firmware Personality Configuration Data Compression Usually set by the backup application. If enabled, the drive will perform hardware data compression. Refer to the backup application to configure data compression for backups. Usually set by the backup application. If prevented then the tape cannot be removed from the drive. Normally, media removal is enabled after the backup is complete but if the backup aborts it is possible that media removal will still be prevented. Refer to HP support documentation for resolution. Description An identifier that distinguishes the firmware among multiple possible variants.

Media Removal (application controller)

Read/Write health (last loaded tape) Write Health A measure of the amount of tape used to write high quality data to the last loaded tape with the amount of data written to the tape since it was last loaded. Even if the warning is reported, the data will still have been written at high quality (unless the drive reported an error) but more tape was used than recommended by HP. A warning will normally trigger an alert. If appropriate, maintenance recommendations are made, such as to clean the drive and/or replace the tape. HP recommends the use of HP media for maximum confidence. Read Health A measure of the ease with which data was read back from the most recently loaded tape with the amount of data read from the tape since it was last loaded. Even if the warning is given, the data will have been read back correctly (unless the drive reported an error) but more error correction was required than recommended. Note that a warning will normally trigger an alert. If appropriate, maintenance recommendations are made such as to clean the drive and/or replace the tape. HP recommends the use of HP media for maximum confidence. Drive Life Head Life An estimate of the percentage of remaining head life based on the amount of tape passed over the head compared with worst case life expectancy testing in a clean environment. HP recommends HP media for increased head life. If a life warning is shown, the drive should be replaced at the next maintenance period. HP recommends HP media for increased head life. Reposition Life An estimate of the percentage of remaining reposition life based on the number of changes in direction of the tape over the life of the drive compared with the worst case life expectancy in a clean environment. HP recommends HP media for increased reposition life. If a life warning is shown, the drive should be replaced at the next maintenance period. HP recommends HP media for increased reposition life. Using TapeAssure 95

Table 30 Information available from the LTO Tape Properties window Last Used Drive tab (continued)
Item Load/Unload Life Description An estimate of the percentage of remaining drive load/unload life based on the number of load/unload cycles over the life of the drive compared with worst case life expectancy testing in a clean environment. HP recommends HP media for increased load/unload life. If a life warning is shown, the drive should be replaced at the next maintenance period. HP recommends HP media for increased load/unload life. Usage Statistics Power On Time Tape Pulled Load/Unload Cycles Percent Tape Loaded Total power on time of the drive since it was manufactured. Total tape pulled through the drive expressed in terms of the equivalent number of full volume writes or reads. Total number of tape loads for the drive since it was new. A comparison of the time the tape was in the drive with the time since the time it was loaded and the following tape load expressed as a percentage. For example, if the time between the two tape loads was 4 hours and this tape was in the drive for the first hour of that time then the tape loaded percent will be 25%. Use this for measuring utilization of the drive from the application standpoint. Duty cycle of the drive since the last tape load. This is a comparison of the time the drive has been active with the time since the last tape load expressed as a percentage. For example, if the last tape load was 4 hours ago and the drive has been active for 3 hours since then, the duty cycle will be 75%. Use this for measuring utilization from the hardware standpoint. Number of drive power cycles since the drive was manufactured. Number of times the drive has been cleaned since it was manufactured. The number of times the drive has been updated with firmware.

Duty Cycles

Power Cycles Cleans Firmware Upgrades Internal Temperature Current Temperature

The current temperature reported by the sensor located on the drive controller board. The current temperature value will be significantly higher than ambient temperature but dependent on it, as well as drive usage and air flow. The algorithm that assesses whether the drive is in specification takes account of the location of the sensor and uses that to estimate the thermal conditions of the tape path. If a warning is shown, the airflow for the drive should be improved. If this cannot be corrected, contact HP support. Note that a warning will normally trigger an alert.

Max Temperature (since last power cycle)

The maximum operational temperature reported by the sensor located on the drive controller board since the last power cycle with an assessment of whether the

96

Command View TL GUI

Table 30 Information available from the LTO Tape Properties window Last Used Drive tab (continued)
Item Description maximum temperature of the tape path is within specification. The maximum temperature value will be significantly higher than ambient temperature but dependent on it as well as drive usage and air flow. The algorithm that assesses whether the drive is in specification takes account of the location of the sensor and uses that to estimate the thermal conditions of the tape path. If a warning is shown, the airflow for the drive should be improved. If this cannot be corrected, contact HP support. Note that a warning will normally trigger an alert.

1 1. Click Close to exit the Drive Properties window.

Viewing tape health

The TapeAssure tape health panel lists: Tape StatusThe current status or availability of a tape. Possible values are Available, Vaulted and Retired. Available tapes are those currently residing in a tape library and available for use. BarcodeThe external barcode on the tape cartridge. Tape Serial NumberThe serial number that uniquely identifies the tape cartridge. Defined by the tape manufacturer. Library SN (or Hostname*) For tapes in libraries, this column displays the serial number of that library. For tapes being used by standalone drives, this column shows the hostname of the server to which the drive is attached. Such hostname entries are highlighted with an asterisk (*). Overall HealthAn Overall Health icon and a details link allow you to view the Tape Health and Life graphs and tabular data. Cartridge TypeThe vendor ID and data format supported by the cartridge. Read/Write Life (%Life Remaining)Remaining Read/Write life of the cartridge as a percentage. Load/Unload Life (%Life Remaining)Remaining Load/Unload life of the cartridge as a percentage of its recommended life. Max Internal TemperatureMaximum temperature encountered by the cartridge during its lifetime (while in a drive). Effective CapacityA measure of the amount of tape used to write high quality data to the tape over its lifetime. Even if a warning is reported, the data will still have been written at high quality (unless the tape reported an error), though more tape was used to do so than recommended by HP. Note that a warning will normally trigger an alert. If appropriate, maintenance recommendations are made, such as checking for Write Quality problems with drives, or retiring the tape. Service ActionA recommendation for service based on the health criteria. More than one service action may apply; hover over the entry with the mouse to see a tool tip containing all recommended service actions for the drive.

NOTE: In the Library SN column, an asterisk (*) marks hostnames with standalone drives. Other entries are tape library serial numbers.
Using TapeAssure 97

For information on searching for a specific tape, see Searching for a specific tape (page 107).

Viewing Tape Health and Life

The Tape Health and Life shows the recent health history of a particular tape. Library administrator can view health related information including a graph showing what the tape health has been across the last several backups over multiple drives. In addition, you can drill down into the recent health history of any drives that used that tape. This helps determine if there is a problem with the tape or with a particular drive that has been using it. To view the Viewing Tape Health and Life: 1. In the Launcher window, click the TapeAssure tab. 2. In the Navigation panel under Data Tapes, select Health. A list of all of the tapes appears. Alternatively, in the Navigation panel under Dashboard, select Drives and Tapes Needing Attention. A list of all tapes that need attention (in a critical or warning state) appears. 3. 4. Click on the tape, then select ActionsProperties, or double click the row, to launch the tape properties. Click the Overall Health link to open the tape health graphs. Tape Barcode/Serial Number Library Serial Number Overall Health calculated based on the recent worst status of the tape health parameters TapeRWLifeQual, Load/UnLoad Life, Max Internal Temperature, and Effective Capacity Effective Capacity/Max Internal Temperature based on the last backup

The Tape Health/Life window displays the following:

Write Health tab The Write Health tab shows the write health history of the tapes across the last several backups and over multiple drives as both a graph and a table.

On the graph, the red, yellow, and green bands represent the critical, warning, and healthy status, respectively, of the tape write health. The X-axis represents the drive serial number and the Y-axis represents the effective capacity of the tape.
98 Command View TL GUI

The table displays the drive serial number, the date/time, and the effective capacity of the tape. Use the Sample Time to filter the write health history for the tape loaded onto multiple drives between the specified time intervals. In addition, each drive serial number is a link to the drive write health history. To export the report as a PDF, click Export Report at the bottom of the graph. This will allow you to save the graph locally or email it. You can also export only the graphs or the complete report. Life tab A set of parameters decide the life of a tape and they deteriorate over time due to wear and tear. Each backup leads to the generation of a Support Ticket that contains information about the quality of the backup. These life parameters keep reducing with each backup. The Life tab shows the trend of deterioration of the life parameters and recommends the action to be taken before the tape becomes unusable. The following are the life parameters of a tape and are compared to the HP recommended specification: TapeLoadLife the remaining load/unload life of the cartridge as a percentage TapeReadWriteLife the remaining read/write life of the cartridge as a percentage

A simple regression is done on the historical data that the management station has collected over a period of time for these life parameters. As a result, there is a trend line for each parameter. The trend line with a greater slope value indicates that the parameter is deteriorating at a faster pace than the others and determines the life of the tape (this parameter leads to the tape being unusable faster than the other parameters). The screen displays the trend line of the parameter that is degrading at the fastest pace. The trend line is then extrapolated to know when this parameter would become 0 in time; based on this date, a set of recommendations are made for this tape. There are three kinds of messages for the life of a tape: Tape is at the end of its recommended life if any of the tapes life parameters are already less than or equal to 0 based on last sample date Tape is nearing the end of its recommended service life when tape life trend data for <tape serial number> indicates the tape will reach the end of its serviceable life within the next six months Tape is within the recommended serviceable life when tape life trend data for <tape serial number> indicates the tape will not reach the end of its serviceable life within the next six months

Using TapeAssure

99

NOTE: All the analysis and recommendations are based on the date when the last support ticket was received by the management station for a particular tape/drive.

Viewing tape utilization

The TapeAssure tape utilization panel lists: Tape StatusThe current status or availability of a tape. Possible values are Available, Vaulted, and Retired. Available tapes are those currently residing in a tape library and available for use. BarcodeThe external barcode on the tape cartridge. Tape Serial NumberThe serial number that uniquely identifies the tape cartridge. Defined by the tape manufacturer. Library Serial NumberFor tapes in libraries, this column displays the serial number of that library. For tapes being used by standalone drives, this column shows the hostname of the

100 Command View TL GUI

server to which the drive is attached. Such hostname entries are highlighted with an asterisk (*). Cartridge TypeThe vendor ID and data format supported by the cartridge. Loads/Unloads (In Sample Time)The number of times this tape has been loaded into a drive in the specified time period. Data Written (In Sample Time) The amount of data written to the tape during the selected time window. Data Read (In Sample Time)The amount of data read from the tape during the selected time window. Capacity Used (At last sample)Amount of the native capacity that contains data. Last Sample TimeThe time at which the last sample was taken.

To view the media performance and utilization history of a particular tape, click the linked serial number. See Viewing the tape utilization and performance history (page 101). When a management station is reconnected to the network after more than 24 hours offline, the utilization panel display can be inaccurate. The TapeAssure data queued up on active drives and libraries arrives in bulk. To display a more accurate utilization, select ActionsChoose Sample Time, and choose the next longest time frame (7 days or more). See Choosing a sample time (page 66) for details. For information on searching for a specific tape, see Searching for a specific tape (page 107).

Viewing the tape utilization and performance history

The tape utilization and performance history panel displays the media format, drive type, library serial number, and sample time. The default sample time is one month. To view the tape utilization and performance history of a tape, use one of the following procedures: 1. Navigate to the Tape Utilization tab. 2. Click the linked serial number. The Tape Utilization and Performance History page opens and contains three tabs: Tape Capacity, Tape Unloads, and Tape Performance. Or: 1. Navigate to the Drive Utilization or the Drive Performance tab. 2. Click the linked serial number. The Drive Performance and Utilization History page opens and contains three tabs: Drive Performance, Drive Utilization, and Utilization Analysis. 3. Click the linked tape serial number. The Tape Utilization and Performance History page opens and contains three tabs: Tape Capacity, Tape Unloads, and Tape Performance. If the tape has not been utilized over the selected time period, no data is shown in the graphical view. Tape Capacity tab The Tape Capacity tab displays a bar graph showing how much tape is being used (the percentage full) by a particular drive. The X-axis is the drive serial number; each serial number is a link to the Drive History page with the Drive Performance tab selected. The Y-axis is the number of uploads.

Using TapeAssure

101

Hovering over a bar shows a tool tip of the drive serial number, date, and percentage of the tape full.

Beneath the graph, a table displays the serial number of the drive where the tape was used, the date/time, and the percentage full. Tape Unloads tab The Tape Unloads tab provides a bar graph showing how many times the tape is loaded and unloaded. The X-axis is the date on which the tape was unloaded, and the Y-axis is the percentage full from 0 to 100 in increments of 20.

102 Command View TL GUI

Hovering over a bar shows a tool tip of the date and number of unloads.

Beneath the graph is a table showing the date the tape was unloaded in the drive and the number of unloads. Tape Performance tab The Tape Performance tab, information about how the tape performed historically with each drive is shown.There are two bar graphs for each day representing the native transfer rate and the host transfer rate. The X-Axis displays the tape's serial number and date. The serial number is a link that launches the Drive Performance and Utilization dialog that defaults to the Drive Performance tab. The Y-Axis displays the transfer rate in MB/s.

Using TapeAssure 103

Hovering over or clicking a host transfer rate data point on the graph displays a tool tip that shows the tape serial number, barcode, and the date and time. On the Host transfer rate graph it also shows the estimated host rate in MB/sec and the compression ratio. On the Native transfer rate graph it also shows the native transfer rate in MB/sec.

Beneath the graph, the following utilization data is shown in a table: Serial number Date/time

104 Command View TL GUI

Estimated host transfer rate Write compression ratio Read compression ratio Media transfer rate

To export the report as a PDF, click Export Report at the bottom of the graph. This will allow you to save the graph locally or email it. NOTE: Exporting the graph to a PDF converts the 3D bar graph to a 2D line graph.

Launching the Newly Added Tapes graph

The Newly Added Tapes graph allows you to view the number of new tapes used per time period plotted over a longer time period. New tapes means any tapes that have been added to this Command View TL Management Station (MS). This could include tapes that have never been used or used tapes that are new to this MS in the user-defined time range. There are a number of uses for this information: Knowing a run-rate for tapes added so you know when to place orders for new tapes Planning and budgeting for additional tapes Seeing patterns of the tapes being added in a month or week Keeping control of the total tapes that are used in the data center/library Analyzing if the number of tapes used is in line with the data that is written

To launch the Newly Added Tapes graph, in the Navigation panel select TapeAssureData TapesNewly Added. This opens the graph showing data for Last One Year by default. NOTE: This shows the newly added tapes only for the libraries having a TapeAssure Advanced License. If there are no libraries with the Advanced License, the following message is displayed: Insufficient data available to plot the graph or Command View TL TapeAssure Advanced license is not available. Please install the Command View TL TapeAssure Advanced license for the appropriate tape libraries. To install a license, click 'Licensing' tab on the left pane and add the Command View TL TapeAssure Advanced license. On the graph: The Newly Added graph (left vertical axis, in blue) is a column graph showing the number of new tapes added over the selected time period (the default is One Year). If there is less than two years of data, the graph is grouped by weeks; if there is less than two years of data, the graph is grouped by month and year. The Total Added graph (right vertical axis, in green) is a line graph showing the total number of tapes added over the selected time period (the default is One Year). If there is less than two years of data, the graph is grouped by weeks; if there is less than two years of data, the graph is grouped by month and year. Slider and Zoom Effect: a small replica of the original graph is shown at the top. Use the slider at the bottom to select a particular portion of the graph to zoom into. This is reflected in the bigger graph, and the horizontal axes adjusts accordingly to analyze the data for a smaller time period. Tool Tips: Hover over the preview graph or the actual graph to see tool tip that shows the week (less than two years of data) or month (more than two years of data) start date of the data.

Using TapeAssure 105

You can change the sample time from the top bar (under the Actions menu) using the predetermined times or by setting a custom range. In addition, you can select a specific library from the drop-down box. The top bar also allows you to refresh, print, and export to PDF the graph. The Actions menu allows you to refresh the graph and export the report. NOTE: Although the start and end dates of the graph run for the entire week or month, only the data within the selected time period is retrieved. For example, in the week labeled 09/04/201 1 to 09/10/201 1, if the selected time period begins on 09/08/201 1 then only data for the 8th, 9th, and 10th is contained in that week. If the selected time period is greater than 104 weeks, the data in the graph is grouped by months. Otherwise, it is grouped in weeks. Figure 13 Sample Time Range is Less than Two Years

106 Command View TL GUI

Figure 14 Sample Time Range is More than Two Years

Searching for a specific tape

To search for a specific tape: 1. Select ActionsSearch to display the Search dialog box. 2. Type or select the appropriate search criteria. For example, type the appropriate information in the Tape Serial Number or Barcode field. Use more than one of the criteria to further narrow the search. For example, select the appropriate library from the Choose Library field, select Cartridge type and Media vendor field to display specified tapes. 3. Click OK.

Viewing information about the Cleaning Tapes

Information about cleaning tapes is compiled and reported by TapeAssure. To access the cleaning tapes information or to change the status of a cleaning tape, in the Navigation panel, under Cleaning Tapes, select Life. The Life screen lists all cleaning tapes, and the following information: Tape StatusIndicates whether the tape is Available or Retired. BarcodeThe external barcode on the cleaning tape cartridge. Tape Serial NumberThe serial number that uniquely identifies the cleaning tape cartridge. Defined by the tape manufacturer. Library SNThe HP serial number that uniquely identifies the library. Drive SNThe serial number that uniquely identifies the drive in which the cleaning tape is currently located. Last UsedThe time at which the cleaning tape was last used.
Using TapeAssure 107

Cleans RemainingIndicates the number of times the cleaning tape can be successfully used to perform a cleaning.

Status DescriptionBased on the number of uses remaining for the cleaning tape, appropriate messages are displayed in this field. If there are 5 or fewer uses remaining on the cleaning tape, the message indicates the tape should be replaced soon. If there are no uses remaining, the message indicated the tape must be replaced now. You can change the status of cleaning tapes to Retired to indicate intent, and to have Command View TL display the tapes closer to the bottom of the list. This makes the list easier to use, as the Available tapes, the tapes you work with most often, remain at the top of the list. To change the status of a cleaning tape: 1. Select the box next to the appropriate cleaning tape or tapes. If no tape is selected, the Change Tape Status Error dialog box displays. Click OK to clear the dialog box, then select a tape or tapes. 2. Click ActionsChange Tape StatusRetired.

NOTE: The status of a retired cleaning tape remains until a support ticket is created for that tape. At that time, the status is automatically reset to Available unless there are 0 cleanings remaining on the tape. TIP: To apply a filter to a group of drives, type the pattern filter criteria in the filter text box provided on the toolbar and click Apply the filter string entered at left. For example, to search for LTO-5 cartridges, enter LTO-5 in the filter text and click Filter. To clear the filter, click Clear filter string. For information on searching for a specific tape, see Searching for a specific tape (page 107).

Exporting Library Data to CSV via TapeAssure

You can export the TapeAssure data collected by the current management station to a comma-separated-value file (.csv) and then use that data to generate charts and reports with a spreadsheet program or custom scripts. To export TapeAssure data: 1. In the Launcher window, click the TapeAssure tab. 2. Click OperationsExport Library Data to CSV and then click ActionsExport to CSV. 3. Read the information, then click Next. 4. In the Select Libraries section, do one of the following: Select Export everything present in the MDS database. Select Choose libraries currently managed by the management station, then select the box or boxes next to the appropriate libraries in the table. Use the Select All or Clear All buttons, if needed. 5. In the Select Time Frame section, select the time frame for the export, either by selecting a time period in the For field, or by specifying a time frame in the Date Range field. 6. Click Next. 7. Browse to a location for the exported data to be placed. 8. Accept the file name suggested in the File Name field or specify a new one. 9. Make the appropriate choice in the Files of Type field. 10. Click Next. 1 1. Verify the information in the Export Library Data Summary, then click Finish. 12. Click OK in the Data Export Successful dialog box.
108 Command View TL GUI

Exporting TapeAssure panels as PDF files

The following TapeAssure panels can be exported as PDF files for offline analysis: Dashboard Performance Advisor Collection status Drives (Health, Performance, Utilization) Data Tapes (Content, Health, Utilization, Newly added) Cleaning Tapes life Specific drive performance and utilization Drive health and life Tape health and life Drive performance and utilization history Tape utilization and performance history Drives and tapes needing attention Library Tape Assure Tabular view (Overview and Usage) Moves per library Unused slots per library

To generate PDF reports: 1. Navigate to the specific panel for which you want a report. 2. Do one of the following: 3. Click the Export button on the button bar Select ActionsExport Report Click Export Report on the panel (available only in pop-up panels)

Choose the export options.

Using TapeAssure 109

Export type:

Select Export Complete Report for detailed report (default) Select Export Chart Only to save only charts

Save or Email:

4.

Select Save to Local System to save the report locally (default) Select Send a Copy as Email to email the report

Press Ok to continue.

1 10

Command View TL GUI

5.

If you selected Save to Local System, click Ok when asked to save the file locally. If you selected Send a Copy to Email, enter the additional details and click Ok.

Email Sent can be customized using the Customize email checkbox. You can save for future use all the email addresses entered using the Save email addresses checkbox.

Additional items to note: Export report will export only the graphs that have a minimum of three data points. In the exported PDF file, graphs with less than the minimum will show the message, Data not available/Insufficient data. The default file names are:

Complete report: TA__<Feature>_<Drive/Lib/Tape identifier>_HHMM_MMDDYYY.pdf Charts only: TA_<Feature>_<Drive/Lib/Tape identifier>_HHMM_MMDDYYY_charts.pdf

Ensure the file is saved with the .pdf extension when saving to local system. If there is a problem saving the PDF file to the local system, a message is displayed to choose a different location. If you selected both Save to Local System and Send a Copy to Email, you will be prompted to save the file locally first and then email. SMTP must be configured to send PDF report as email. The Save email addresses checkbox saves the email IDs on the local system and will not be shared across browsers or other systems.

Using TapeAssure

1 1 1

Scheduling a Library Data Export via TapeAssure

You can schedule data to be exported from a specific library one time or on a recurring schedule. To schedule a data export: 1. In the Launcher window, click the TapeAssure tab. 2. In the Navigation panel under Operations, select Export to CSV. 3. Select ActionsSchedule Library Data Export. The Schedule Library Data Export dialog box appears. Figure 15 Viewing the Schedule Library Data Export dialog box

4. 5. 6.

Enable the scheduler if it is not already enabled. Select the time at which the save will occur. Select the start and end dates. Select No End Date for a one time report or to have reports exported for an indefinite time period. 7. Select a repeat interval. 8. If you selected a Weekly repeat interval, select the day of the week for the report. 9. In the Select Destination Path section, select the destination directory for the reports, either by selecting the Default Path option, or by selecting New Path and typing the appropriate destination directory in the field. 10. Click OK. 1 1. Click OK again, in the Scheduler configuration Successful dialog box.

Analyzing TapeAssure data from CSV files using the TapeAssure Analysis Template
The TapeAssure Analysis Template uses data exported from Command View TL to create graphs and tables that help backup administrators answer important questions about drive and media health, performance, and utilization. Over thirty pre-defined graphs and tables display write and read margin, host and native data transfer rates, megabytes read and written, write and read compression ratios, drive unloads, drive utilization percentages, and media capacity. These metrics can be analyzed by drive, by tape, and over timeby day, week, day of week, month, or week of yearto satisfy a variety of user needs. NOTE: The only file opened and operated on by the Template is a user-selected Tickets.csv file. No other information is gathered, and no changes are made to your computer, registry, or Office settings.

1 12

Command View TL GUI

HP StoreEver Command View TL version 2.5 or later is required to export TapeAssure data for use in the Template. TapeAssure data can be gathered from the following HP tape libraries: EML E-Series, ESL E-Series, MSL G3, 1/8 Autoloader. Selected standalone tape drives are also supported through the TapeAssure Service driver, available from http://www.hp.com/go/tapeassure. The TapeAssure Analysis Template is a Microsoft Excel spreadsheet with embedded macros. Two versions are available: one for Excel 2003 and the other for Excel 2007 or 2010. In Excel 2007 and 2010, a custom TapeAssure tab and ribbon menu are included for easy access to all graphs and start-up options. Macro security settings must be configured to allow user-selected macros to run. To configure macro security in Excel 2003: 1. From the main menu bar, select ToolsMacroSecurity. 2. Choose the Medium setting, then click OK. 3. Close and reopen Excel and the Template. The settings take effect. To configure macro security settings in Excel 2007: 1. Click the Office button, usually in the upper left corner, and select Excel Options. 2. Select Trust Center and click the Trust Center Settings button. 3. In the Trust Center window, select Macro Settings, click Enable all macros, then click OK. 4. Close and reopen Excel and the Template. The settings take effect. To configure macro security settings in Excel 2010: Look for the Security Warning bar just below the menu ribbon and click the Enable Content button. The settings take effect without needing to close or reopen Excel. To create graphs and tables using the TapeAssure Analysis Template: 1. Export your collected TapeAssure data from Command View TL. See Exporting Library Data to CSV via TapeAssure (page 108) or Scheduling a Library Data Export via TapeAssure (page 112). NOTE: Each Tickets.csv file contains data collected from a single library, or in the case of standalone tape drives, from a single host. Data on all drives and tapes within that library (or collected by that host) are contained in one Tickets.csv file. The library serial number is provided as part of the file name so that, for example, TapeAssure data from a library with serial number US124357 would be stored in the US124357_Tickets.csv file. In the case of standalone tape drives, the name of the host collecting TapeAssure data is used as part of the file name. For example, TapeAssure data from a host named myTapeHost would be stored in the myTapeHost_Tickets.csv file. 2. Open the TapeAssure Analysis Template (.xls or .xlsm) file. If prompted, select Enable Macros (in Excel 2003). If additional prompts or messages appears, refer to the Minimum Requirements section of the HP StoreEver Command View TL TapeAssure Analysis Template white paper, available at http://www.hp.com/support/cvtl. Follow the instructions on the opening screen of the template, use the Help tab to view answers to frequently asked questions on how to get started with the Template, and see the HP StoreEver Command View TL TapeAssure Analysis Template white paper, available at http:// www.hp.com/support/cvtl for more uses of this template.

3.

Backing up the TapeAssure database

You can schedule a backup of the TapeAssure database one time or on a recurring schedule. A TapeAssure database backup file can be used to restore the database after a failure. When you restore a previously-saved database file of the same Command View TL version, the current database and associated data is first saved as a backup database file then is overwritten. All data that was added to the current database after the restore file was saved will be lost. A restore action cannot be undone; however, you can restore the (automatically-saved) current database if necessary. If the restore operation fails, the current database is not changed.
Using TapeAssure 1 13

NOTE:

A management station can only have one scheduler running.

Restoring an older version of the Command View TL TapeAssure database is not supported. To schedule a one-time or recurring TapeAssure backup: 1. In the Launcher window, click the TapeAssure tab. 2. In the Navigation panel under Operations, select Save/Restore Database. The Save/Restore Database window appears. If no backups have been saved, actions that can be taken from this window are listed. If backups have been saved, the list of backups is shown. 3. 4. 5. 6. Select ActionsScheduled Backup of Database. The Scheduler to Save Database dialog box appears. Enable the scheduler if it is not already enabled. Select the time at which the save will occur. Select the start and end dates. Select No End Date for a one time report or to have reports exported for an indefinite time period. 7. Select a repeat interval. 8. If you selected a Weekly repeat interval, select the day of the week on which to save the report. 9. Select the destination directory for the reports, either by selecting the Default Path option, or by selecting New Path and typing the appropriate destination directory in the field. 10. In the Retention Policy section, select the number of backup files (15) to be retained. 1 1. Click OK. 12. Read the text in the Scheduler configuration Successful dialog box, then click OK. To stop the scheduler, clear the Enable Scheduler box in Scheduler to Save Database window.

Restoring a TapeAssure database file

When you restore a previously-saved database file, the current database and associated data is first saved as a backup database file then is overwritten. All data that was added to the current database after the restore file was saved will be lost. A restore action cannot be undone; however, you can restore the (automatically-saved) current database if necessary. If the restore operation fails, the current database is not changed. To restore an existing TapeAssure database file: 1. In the Launcher window, click the TapeAssure tab. 2. In the Navigation panel under Operations, select Save/Restore Database. The Save/Restore Database window appears. If no backups have been saved, actions that can be taken from this window are listed. If backups have been saved, the list of backups is shown. 3. 4. 5. Click ActionsRestore Database. In the Restore Database dialog box, if the file was saved to the devault location, it is listed under Default Path. Select the file name and click Next. If the file was saved to an alternate location, click to select Alternate Path. The Select TapeAssure Database File dialog box appears. Select the appropriate path and click the backup file to be restored, then click Next. Read the cautionary message in the Restore Database window, select the box to indicate that you have read the warning, then click Finish. Read the text in the Restore Database confirmation dialog box, then click Yes. Click OK in the Restore Database Success dialog box.

6. 7. 8.

1 14

Command View TL GUI

NOTE:

Restoring an older version of the Command View TL TapeAssure database is not supported.

Saving or copying a database backup file

Existing backup files can be copied to another location and renamed using the following procedure: 1. In the Launcher window, click the TapeAssure tab. 2. In the Navigation panel under Operations, select Save/Restore Database. The Save/Restore Database window appears. If no backups are listed, there are no backups saved. See Backing up the TapeAssure database (page 113) to begin saving backup copies of the database. If backups have been saved, the list of backups is shown. 3. 4. 5. 6. From the list of backups available, click to select the backup to be saved. Select ActionsSave Backup File As. The Save dialog box appears. Select the destination location, either verify that the file name is correct or type a name into the File Name field, and click Save. Read the text in the Save Successful dialog box, then click OK. The original backup file remains unchanged, and the copy of the file is saved to the specified location and file name.

Using data verification

The data verification feature provides an automated process to validate media readability and data integrity on your backup tapes. By quickly identifying the degrading media and notifying select users via email, events, and reports, data verification helps you avoid failures in your data restores. In addition, the data verification process scans tapes as a background process without interfering with your running applications. Table 31 and Table 32 list the drive and tape compatibility with data verification. Table 31 Drive compatibility
Type Partition contains only LTO5 drives Partition contains only LTO6 drives Minimum Tape Generation LTO3 LTO4 Maximum Tape Generation LTO5 LTO6 LTO6

Partition contains both LTO5 and LTO6 LTO3 drives

Table 32 Tape compatibility

Type Cleaning types Partitioned tapes Backup tapes Encrypted tapes WORM tapes Compatible with Data Verification? No No Yes No Yes Compatible with Drive Assessment? No No Yes Yes No

Table 33 shows the average time taken for different data verification test options in LTO-5 and LTO-6 tapes.

Using data verification

1 15

Table 33 Average time for data verification tests

Tape Generation LTO-6 LTO-6 LTO-6 LTO-5 LTO-5 LTO-5 Test Option Quick Moderate Full Quick Moderate Full Data Verified 39 GB 500 GB 2.5 TB 38 GB 300 GB 1.5 TB Time Taken (average) 5 minutes 55 minutes 5 hours 5 minutes 45 minutes 4 hours 30 minutes

NOTE: The data verification feature requires a Data Verification license. You must install the Command View TL license and Data Verification license for at least one tape library. See Adding a license key (page 32) for details on installing a license.

Configuring the libraries to use data verification

For data verification to function, you must enable CVTL user on each library that will use it. 1. Launch the ESL G3 Library Management Console. 2. Go to SetupNetwork ConfigurationNetwork Security Settings. This opens the Security Settings window. 3. Enable the CVTL user if it is not already enabled. 4. Click OK.

Creating the data verification partition

You must create a data verification partition on the library that will use data verification. Tapes will reside in the data verification partition as they are being tested. 1. In the Launcher window, click the Data Verification tab. 2. In the navigation panel under Data Verification, select Control Panel. 3. Select the library on which to create the data verification partition. 4. Select ActionsCreate DV Partition. This launches the Create Data Verification Partition wizard. NOTE: The Create DV Partition menu option is only enabled if the selected library does not already have a data verification partition. The Service status will be Not Configured. You can also launch the wizard by clicking the linked Service status for that library. The wizard will only launch if the library has the following prerequisites: 5. 6. One LTO5 or LTO6 drive Six available storage slots Six available I/E slots

Click Next. Select the Drive Domain from the drop-down menu. Currently only LTO5 and LTO6 are supported.

1 16

Command View TL GUI

NOTE:

The partition name is automatically assigned as DVP and cannot be changed.

The wizard does not support creating a mixed mode of LTO5 and LTO6 drives on one library. However, you can create this using the ESL G3 Library Management Console. 7. 8. Click Next. Enter the number of drives, storage slots, and I/E slots the partition will use. The quantity available is provided.

9. Click Next. 10. Confirm your selections and click Finish. A success message is shown when the data verification partition is created.

Using data verification

1 17

NOTE: When recreating a data verification partition, you must remove the current partition before creating the new one. Mixed partition is not supported by CVTL. Mixed partition can be created by Library Management Console.

Deleting the data verification partition

You can only delete the data verification partition when data verification is not running; the Service status must be Stopped. 1. In the Launcher window, click the Data Verification tab. 2. In the navigation panel under Data Verification, select Control Panel. 3. Select the appropriate library. 4. Click Stop Service. 5. Select ActionsDelete DV Partition. 6. On the confirmation window click Yes. A success message is shown when the data verification partition is deleted.

Viewing the Data Verification Control Panel

The Control Panel provides an overview of the libraries with a Command View TL and Data Verification license; see Using license keys (page 144) to install the licenses. It also allows you to enable or disable data verification for a particular library. In the Launcher window, click the Data Verification tab. The Control Panel opens by default and lists the libraries by serial number with a qualified data verification license. For each library it lists the total number of slots available in the data verification partition, total number of mail slots available in the data verification partition, total number of drives in the data verification partition, total purchased license quantity, number of data verification licenses available, and the current status of the data verification engine.

NOTE: If the data verification partition is modified from the Library Management Console, you must restart the data verification service to reflect the changes in the Test Setup Details screen. Ensure that all drives assigned are not loaded with tapes before starting the service. If the data assessment results are poor or fair, an email notification is sent. To configure email notifications for data verification, see Setting up data verification email notifications (page 126).

1 18

Command View TL GUI

Starting and stopping the data verification service

For 1. 2. 3. each library, you can start and stop the data verification service. In the Launcher window, click the Data Verification tab. The Control Panel opens by default. Select the row of the library on which to start or stop the service. Click the start or stop button in the app bar as appropriate.

Setting the default verification type

For each library, you can specify the default verification type used when a tape from that library is tested. 1. In the Launcher window, click the Data Verification tab. The Control Panel opens by default. 2. Select the library on which to create the data verification partition. 3. Select ActionsChange default settings. This opens the Change Default Settings window. 4. Select the default verification type: Full Data Verification is carried out for all the data on the tape. Moderate 20% of the data written on the tape is verified (in a sequential way) Quick Two wraps of data written on the tape is verified

5.

Click OK.

Deleting the data verification test logs

For 1. 2. 3. all libraries, you can delete the data verification test log files that are older than 30 days. In the Launcher window, click the Data Verification tab. The Control Panel opens by default. Select ActionsDelete DV test logs. This opens a confirmation/warning window. Click Yes to clear the detailed data verification logs.

Viewing the detailed data verification information for each library

1. 2. In the Launcher window, click the Data Verification tab. In the navigation panel under Data Verification, select Control Panel.

Using data verification

1 19

3.

Click the linked library serial number to view the Test Setup Details screen for that library.

The Test Setup Details screen has three tabular windows. You can maximize/minimize each window using the button in the top right corner. Tapes in Partition lists the tapes present in the data verification partition; see Viewing tapes that are present in the data verification partition (page 121). Tapes under Verification lists the tapes currently being verified; see Viewing tapes that are currently under data verification (page 122). Tapes/Drives Queued for Verification lists the tapes currently in the data verification queue; see Viewing tapes that are queued for data verification (page 122).

120 Command View TL GUI

NOTE: If the data verification partition is modified from the Library Management Console, you must restart the data verification service to reflect the changes in the Test Setup Details screen. Ensure that all drives assigned are not loaded with tapes before starting the service. If the data assessment results are poor or fair, an email notification is sent. To configure email notifications for data verification, see Setting up data verification email notifications (page 126). You can run a maximum of six drive assessment tests, data verification tests, or a combination of both at one time.

Viewing tapes that are present in the data verification partition

The Tapes in Partition section of the Test Setup Details screen lists the tapes present in the data verification partition.

A warning symbol next to the barcode in this window means the tapes are not supported by data verification. See Table 31 (page 115) for compatible tapes. You can use the Tapes in Partition window to mark known good tapes for use with the drive assessment test: 1. Select the tapes known to be good; use Ctrl+select to select multiple tapes at a time. 2. 3. Click the Mark/Unmark button ( Click OK. ) on the app bar. A confirmation/warning box appears.

Click the linked previous verification result to see the details of the last verification test.

Using data verification

121

NOTE: The Tapes in Partition window may be empty on its initial launch. Starting the data verification service for the selected library will synchronize all the necessary data from the library. This window may list more tape cartridges than listed in the PoliciesManage Tapes view. No action is required; in time the two views will be consistent.

Viewing tapes that are currently under data verification

The Tapes under Verification section of the Test Setup Details screen lists the tapes currently undergoing data verification.

Viewing tapes that are queued for data verification

The Tapes/Drives Queued for Verification section of the Test Setup Details screen lists the tapes in the queue for data verification.

122

Command View TL GUI

Viewing drives that are present in the data verification partition

You can view the drives in the data verification partition from the Test Setup Details screen. Select ActionsDrive Assessment Test or click Drive Assessment Test on the app bar to open the Drive Details window listing the drives in the data verification partition. Select the drive from the list. indicates the drive is in healthy condition. indicates that three consecutive data assessment tests on this drive have failed. You should run the drive assessment test on this drive. indicates the drive is in critical state and will no longer be used for drive and data assessment tests. Contact HP Support for further assistance.

You can click Add to queue and the system will queue the selected drive for the drive assessment test using the tape you select from the Select Tapes drop-down box. NOTE: An email notification is sent when the data verification fails three times in a row on a particular drive. A similar email is sent when the drive assessment test fails on a particular drive to notify you that the drive will no longer be used; contact HP Support for further assistance. To configure email notifications for data verification, see Setting up data verification email notifications (page 126).

Using data verification

123

124

Command View TL GUI

NOTE:

The drive assessment test takes, on average, 20 minutes to complete for a drive.

Running the drive assessment test will overwrite or delete all the data on the tape.

Adding, removing, and changing tapes from the queue

From the Test Setup Details screen you can make the following changes: Add tapes to the queue by either selecting them in the Tapes in Partition window and clicking Add to queue or by dragging and dropping the tapes into the Tapes/Drives Queued for Verification window. Then click Save in the Tapes/Drives Queued for Verification window. The tapes get queued with the default verification type specified. Remove tapes from the queue by selecting them in the Tapes/Drives Queued for Verification window and clicking Remove from queue. Then click Save in the Tapes/Drives Queued for Verification window. Change the verification type of tapes by selecting them and then selecting an option from the Verification type drop down box. Then click Save in the Tapes/Drives Queued for Verification window. This changes the type for this test but does not change the default type. Stop data verification for a particular tape by selecting it from the Tapes under Verification window and clicking Abort.

Configuring the data verification policy

The data verification policy definition allows you to select the tapes you want CVTL to track for data verification. 1. In the Launcher window, click the Data Verification tab. 2. In the navigation panel under Policies, select Configure Tapes. A list of tapes known to the management station appears showing the appropriate library serial number, cartridge bar code, cartridge type, and policy applicable. NOTE: Tapes may be listed more than once if the tape is moved from one library to another.

3.

Select a tape and use the Set Policy drop-down box at the top of the screen to determine the policy for how often data verification is performed on that tape. You can select multiple tapes by holding the Ctrl key while selecting.

Use ActionsRemove Policy to remove the policy and ActionsExport Report to export the Configure Tapes table.

Selecting the tapes for verification

1. In the Launcher window, click the Data Verification tab.
Using data verification 125

2.

In the navigation panel under Policies, select Tapes for verification. A list of tapes due for data verification appears. These are tapes that have a policy for data verification and they have reached or exceeded that policy time period. The table includes: Barcode The barcode of the tape cartridge. Verification date The date and time the last data verification test was performed. Last Result The last data verification test result. Policy name The policy applied to this particular tape. Days overdue The number of days elapsed from the date the tape exceeded its policy. Action Recommended A message based on the location of the cartridge is shown. If the cartridge is in the data verification partition, the message is Move to Queue. If the cartridge is outside the data verification partition, the message is Move to DV Partition.

3. 4.

Click Queue Tapes. This opens a window displaying the tapes that are already in the data verification partition. Select the tapes that you want to test and click OK. This moves them to the queued state for testing. Once tested, the results are available on the Results window (see Viewing the test results for Data Verification (page 127)) and via email if you set up the email notification (see Setting up data verification email notifications (page 126)).

You can also select the tapes to test from the Test Setup Details screen; see Adding, removing, and changing tapes from the queue (page 125).

Setting up data verification email notifications

Data verification email notifications allow you to receive email alerts when data verification determines that data should be migrated to a new tape because the tape is bad. You configure the data verification notification at the library level. When you receive a data verification email notification, the subject line is cartridge migration notification. The body of the email lists the serial number of the library, the bar code of the tape requiring data migration, the total amount of data verified (in MB), the run time of the test (in minutes), and the verification result. NOTE: You must have permanent CVTL and data verification licenses to enable data verification email notification. Perform any SMTP configurations before enabling data verification email notifications. 1. 2.
126

In the Launcher window, navigate to the Administration panel. Select ActionsEnable DV E-mail Notification. This opens the DV Email Notification wizard.

Command View TL GUI

3.

Click Next to set up the email options.

4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9.

Select the libraries that require email notifications. Enter to and from email addresses for the notifications. You can enter multiple addresses in the Alternative To E-mail Address field by separating them with a semi-colon (;). Click Next. Select the Alert category. Additional categories will be available in a future release. Click Next. Confirm your selections and click Finish. The data verification Email Notification panel will be available on the AdministrationManagement Station screen.

Disabling data verification email notification

1. 2. 3. In the Launcher window, navigate to the Administration panel. Select ActionsDisable DV E-mail Notification. This opens the data verification Email Notification wizard. Click Yes in the confirmation window.

Viewing the test results for Data Verification

The test verification results page lists the latest results of the tapes tested by data verification. 1. In the Launcher window, click the Data Verification tab. 2. In the Data Verification section of the Navigation panel, select Data Verification under Test Results.

Using data verification

127

The information includes: Barcode The serial number that uniquely identifies the tape as defined by the manufacturer. Click the linked barcode to see historical test results for this tape. The verification results history screen shows the same information as the data verification results screen excluding the Barcode and Cartridge Type columns.

Click the linked result to see the result details. Cartridge Type The vendor ID and data format supported by the tape cartridge. Library SN The HP serial number that uniquely identifies the library. Defined at manufacture, this is the number to quote when contacting HP support. Drive SN The serial number of the drive. This is a static value and will change if a drive has been replaced. Use the serial number when contacting HP support. Total Data verified (MB) The amount of data read on the tape during the data verification test. Read Margin The ease with which the data was read back from the tape by the drive. Read Margin Percentage Read margin expressed as a percentage where 100% indicates a minimal amount of error correction and using a sliding scale down to 0% indicating the maximum amount of error correction and retries as recommended by HP. Test run time (mins) The time it took to run the data verification test. Result The data verification test result. This will be Test Passed, Test Failed, Test Passed with Warnings, Test Aborted, or Test Incomplete. Result details The reason for failure if the tape failed. Verification date The date and time when the data verification test was performed.

128

Command View TL GUI

From the results page you can release the data verification license for a selected tape to free up that license for use. Use ActionsRelease License. NOTE: Releasing a data verification license will remove the data verification history of that tape. However, if the test failed with a Move to Drive error the license was not used and the Release License option will only clear the database.

Viewing the drive assessment results

The drive assessment results page lists the tapes with the latest drive assessment test results. 1. In the Launcher window, click the Data Verification tab. 2. In the Results section of the Navigation panel, select Drive Assessment.

Click the linked result to see the result details. The information includes: Drive SN The serial number of the drive. This is a static value and will change if a drive has been replaced. Use the serial number when contacting HP support. Click the linked drive serial number to see historical drive assessment results for this tape. The drive assessment results history screen shows the same information as the drive assessment results screen excluding the Drive SN column. Library SN The HP serial number that uniquely identifies the library. Defined at manufacture, this is the number to quote when contacting HP support. Barcode The serial number that uniquely identifies the tape as defined by the manufacturer.

Using data verification

129

Cartridge Type The vendor ID and data format supported by the tape cartridge. Test run time (mins) The time it took to run the drive assessment test. Result The drive assessment test result. This will be Test Passed, Test Failed, or Test Aborted. Verification date The date and time when the data verification test was performed.

Working LTO4 and later tape drives

LTO4 and later tape drives offer direct FC connectivity to the SAN. See Changing the connection properties of advanced LTO4 tape drives (page 131) for information on changing the configuration of the tape drive's FC ports. The Interface Manager card and the library robotics controller work together to ensure that the library's LTO4 and later tape drives maintain the same World Wide Names (WWN), host mapping configuration, and speed and topology configuration when a tape drive is replaced. This enables the backup configuration to continue unchanged after the replacement. By default, only port A is presented through Secure Manager. You must create a custom device map to present port B.

Adding an LTO4 and later tape drive to a library

Tape libraries with LTO4 and later tape drives use a different library architecture than tape libraries that only contain LTO2 and LTO3 tape drives. Adding the first LTO4 and later tape drive to a library requires additional steps, such as installing the internal network switch and inserting LTO4 or later tape drive media. In addition, the library firmware must be updated to support LTO4 and later tape drives, and LTO2 and LTO3 tape drives must be updated to the most recent firmware to avoid problems if an LTO4 or later tape cartridge is accidentally loaded into an LTO2 or LTO3 tape drive. See the poster included with the tape drive for detailed drive installation instructions. TIP: If the tape library already contains other LTO4 and later tape drives, the new drive can be installed without powering off the library.

130 Command View TL GUI

Replacing an LTO2 or LTO3 tape drive with an LTO4 or later tape drive
Command View TL versions 2.5 and newer include a wizard to assist in migrating the settings from the original tape drive to the new tape drives. By using this wizard, library and drive settings, such as port topology and speed, partitions, and host mappings in Secure Manager, are retained for the new drive. To replace an LTO2 or LTO3 tape drive with an LTO4 or later tape drive: 1. Remove the old tape drive and install the new tape drive following the instructions on the upgrade guide that came with the new tape drive. NOTE: Older versions of the upgrade guide include an instruction to restore system defaults. Ignore that step and continue the installation process with the following steps. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. In the Support tab, select Drive Upgrade. The Drive Upgrade tab will display drives that have been replaced and are awaiting configuration. Right-click Actions and select Launch Drive Upgrade Wizard. Click Next. Click Next. The wizard displays the drives it found that have been replaced. 7. 8. If the list is correct, click Next. If any drives are missing from the list, verify that they have been correctly installed and are powered on. Click Refresh to update the list.

The wizard displays the upgrade process. Click Next when the upgrade is complete. Click Finish.

Changing the connection properties of LTO4 and later tape drives

The connection properties for LTO4 and later tape drives include: World Wide Name (not editable) Connection Type (editable) Port Mode (not editable) Hard AL-PA (editable only if the port connection type is set to Direct Attach) Speed (Gbps) (editable)

Only the connection type and speed of the ports can be set manually. The remaining items are configured automatically by the tape drive. NOTE: Hard AL-PA can be edited only if the Connection Type is Direct Attach. To apply the changes to all of the tape drives, enable the combo box Apply the setting to All Advanced LTO Drives. To edit the FC host port settings: 1. In the Library window, click the Configuration tab. 2. In the left panel, select Drive Connection Properties. A list of connections appears in the right panel. 3. In the right panel, select an FC host port, and then select ActionsEdit Drive Connection Settings. The Port Connection Settings dialog box appears.

Working LTO4 and later tape drives

131

4.

Set the Port Connection Type to one of the following: AutosenseUse this connection type when connecting the tape drive's FC port to an FC switch or directly to a Host Bus Adapter (HBA) on a backup server. The software will choose the appropriate option. Fabric (SAN) AttachUse this connection type when connecting all FC host ports to an FC switch. Direct AttachUse this connection type when connecting all FC host ports directly to a Host Bus Adapter (HBA) on a backup server.

5. 6. 7.

Set the Port Speed. Use the maximum speed that your SAN infrastructure supports. Select Auto-Negotiate to have the software determine the fastest speed possible. Click OK to save the changes. Confirm that you want to reboot in the Reboot Warning dialog box.

Using SNMP alerts

Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP) is a well-defined standard for reporting device information through a network. The Interface Manager card has a built-in SNMP agent that supports queries to MIB-II in addition to SNMP traps/alerts. Command View TL lets you change the following common SNMP settings: Trap DestinationsIP addresses of hosts or applications that need to receive SNMP alerts/traps from the Interface Manager card. A trap receiver is an SNMP-enabled machine on the LAN that decodes and logs SNMP traps. Up to eight trap destinations can be specified. Community StringPlain-text community string or password required by SNMP clients to read or write SNMP MIB values.

Adding an SNMP trap

To add a new SNMP trap entry: 1. If necessary, obtain the required network settings from your network administrator. 2. In the Library window, click the Configuration tab.
132 Command View TL GUI

3. 4.

In the left panel, select SNMP Alerts. The current SNMP traps appear in the right panel. Select ActionsAdd Trap Entry. The SNMP Trap Entry dialog box appears.

5.

Enter the Trap Destination and Community String, and then click OK.

Editing an SNMP trap

To edit an existing trap entry: 1. In the Library window, click the Configuration tab. 2. In the left panel, select SNMP Alerts. The current SNMP traps appear in the right panel. 3. Do one of the following: In the right panel, double-click a trap entry. In the right panel, select the trap entry to be modified, and then select ActionsEdit Trap Entry.

The SNMP Trap Entry dialog box appears.

4.

Modify the Trap Destination and Community String as necessary, and then click OK.

Removing an SNMP trap

To remove an existing trap entry: 1. In the Library window, click the Configuration tab. 2. In the left panel, click SNMP Alerts. The current SNMP traps appear in the right panel. 3. In the right panel, select the trap entry that you want to remove, and then select ActionsRemove Trap Entry. 4. Confirm that you want to delete the SNMP trap.
Using SNMP alerts 133

Saving the configuration of the library

The Save/Restore feature enables you to save configuration information of the Interface Manager card and interface controllers. The information saved includes library settings (name, contact information), connection properties, advanced feature settings (host access, partitioning), and SNMP alert settings. A saved configuration stores the settings of all the features on the Configuration tab. It does not save firmware versions or data on tape cartridges. CAUTION: For firmware versions I231 or previous, saving and restoring the configuration must be done with the same version of the Interface Manager firmware. For example, you cannot save the configuration with Interface Manager firmware version I230, upgrade to version I231, and then restore the configuration. For firmware versions I240 and later, you will always be able to restore configurations up to two firmware revisions back. NOTE: Save the configuration of the system after any change to the physical configuration of the library. A successful restore will not occur if the configuration file contains references to a physical configuration that no longer exists.

Saving the current configuration

1. 2. 3. In the Library window, click the Configuration tab. In the left panel, select Save/Restore. Select ActionsSave Current Configuration.

4. 5. 6.

After reviewing the summary information, click Next. To confirm, click Save. Select a location and enter a filename in the File Name box and click Finish or Save. The configuration file is saved as a ZIP file.

Restoring a configuration
1.
134

In the Library window, click the Configuration tab.

Command View TL GUI

2. 3.

In the left panel, select Save/Restore. Select ActionsRestore Configuration.

4. 5. 6. 7.

Select the configuration file that you want to restore. Browse to the file and click Open. The configuration file appears. Read the warning and select the check box acknowledging that you realize that restoring a previous configuration overwrites the current configuration. Click OK. The Interface Manager card reboots with the new settings.

Viewing a saved configuration

1. 2. 3. In the Library window, click the Configuration tab. In the left panel, select Save/Restore. Select ActionsView Saved Configuration.

Saving the configuration of the library

135

4. 5.

Browse to the file and click Open. The configuration file appears. When done reading, click Close.

Rebooting components
CAUTION: Rebooting a component terminates any operations that the component might be performing. To avoid loss of data, make sure that all backup jobs or other operations have completed before attempting to reboot any component.

Rebooting a single component

NOTE: Depending on the library type, number of slots, tape cartridge locations, and whether the tape cartridges have barcodes, rebooting a library can take 20 to 45 minutes. If you choose to remotely reboot the library, allow sufficient time for the reboot to complete before attempting to manage or configure the library. Components that can be rebooted as a single component are: interface controllers, the interface manager, and tape drives. To reboot a single component: 1. In the Library window, click the Operations tab. 2. In the left panel, select Reboot. The list of components appears in the right panel. If any components need updating, Yes appears in the Reboot Required column. 3. In the right panel, select the component that you want to reboot, and then select ActionsReboot Selected Component. 4. Confirm that you want to reboot the component in the confirmation warning dialog.

Rebooting the Interface Manager and all controllers

To reboot the Interface Manager and all controllers: 1. In the Library window, click the Operations tab. 2. In the left panel, select Reboot. The list of components appears in the right panel. If any components need updating, Yes appears in the Reboot Required column. 3. Select ActionsReboot Interface Manager and All Controllers. 4. Confirm that you want to reboot all the components in the confirmation warning dialog.

Rebooting all components that require a reboot

To reboot all components that require a reboot (that is, all components that say Yes in the Reboot Required column): 1. In the Library window, click the Operations tab. 2. In the left panel, select Reboot. The list of components appears in the right panel. If any components need updating, Yes appears in the Reboot Required column. 3. Select the Interface Manager component or one of the Interface Controller components to enable the Actions menu. 4. Select ActionsReboot All Required Components. 5. Confirm that you want to reboot all the components in the confirmation warning dialog.

Moving tape cartridges

CAUTION: Whenever possible, move media using your backup application. The move media functionality of Command View TL is provided as an alternate means of moving media if you encounter a problem with your backup application or with the library. After using Command View TL to move media, you must re-inventory the library from within your backup application so that the library and backup application remain synchronized.
136 Command View TL GUI

To move media: 1. In the Library window, click the Operations tab. 2. In the left panel, click Media Management. A list of the locations of all the tape cartridges appears in the right panel. 3. To launch the Move Media wizard, select ActionsMove Media. Source Media page of the Move Media wizard appears.

4.

5.

6. 7.

8.

On the first page of the Move Media wizard, select the source location, and then click Next. The selected source should be FULL, if it is not a validation error occurs. The Next button remains disabled and is enabled only if the selected source media is full. On the second page, select the destination location, and then click Next. The destination must be EMPTY or a validation error occurs. The Next button remains disabled and is enabled only if the selected destination media is empty. If the selected source and destination are incompatible then a warning message immediately occurs. On the third page, verify that the source and destination locations are correct and read the warning. If you are satisfied with your choices, click the check box to indicate that you understand the warning, and then click Next to proceed with the move. If you are not satisfied with your choices, click Back to make changes, or click Cancel to exit the wizard without performing the move. The final page of the wizard displays progress information. When the move is successfully completed, click Finish to complete the wizard. If an error occurs, the appropriate error message displays in the wizard page. Click Finish to close the wizard.

Updating the firmware with the Firmware Update wizard

HP recommends that you always use the latest firmware for all the components in the library. Command View TL provides a convenient Firmware Update wizard to help you manage firmware revisions. CAUTION: Make sure that all applications that access the library or drives are shut down until the firmware update is complete. Do not interrupt the firmware update process. Stopping this program or powering down the component during the update could cause the component to be inoperable and require physical repair.

Updating the firmware with the Firmware Update wizard

137

NOTE:

Review the downloading instruction in the release notes before upgrading the firmware.

Command View TL 3.5.00 cannot upgrade any libraries with i240 or older Interface Manager firmware. Upgrade to 2.8.00 then install the bundle. Once the installation of 2.8.00 is complete, install Command View TL 3.5.00. If upgrading or downgrading the ESL E-Series library from a revision less than 4.86, download and install revision 4.86 to the ESL E-Series library before you download the latest ESL E-Series library code. Otherwise the smart media or Daughter card will need to be replaced. You must be at the I232 and 2.32 firmware bundle or higher before proceeding with the upgrades to the I273 and 3.1.00 firmware bundle. If at a revision lower than I232 or 2.32 firmware bundle first migrate to I232 and 2.32 firmware bundle to proceed. You have to be at i250 or above to download with Command View TL 3.1.00. If the EML library is below 1200 download 1200 first. Then if the EML library is below 1407 download 1407 first. Otherwise the RLC might need to be replaced.

To update the Interface Manager card firmware: 1. In the Library window, click the Support tab. 2. In the left panel, select Firmware Update. A list of components appears in the right panel. If any components need updating, Yes appears in the Update Available column. 3. Select ActionsLaunch Firmware Update Wizard. The welcome screen of the Firmware Update wizard appears.

4.

Read the warning, and then click Next. The Selection page of the Firmware Update wizard appears.

138

Command View TL GUI

5.

Decide whether to enable firmware downgrades. By default, firmware downgrades are not enabled. Only newer firmware versions can be uploaded to your hardware. To enable firmware downgrades, you must enter the factory password. For more information, see Using factory overrides (page 142). If you need to enable firmware downgrades (for example, if a newer firmware version is causing problems and you want to revert back to an older version that was known to work properly), select Allow Firmware Downgrades.

6.

Choose one of the following options: Use HP web services to determine optimal updates for the libraryCommand View TL will check the HP Support website for all compatible firmware files. If you select Ensure firmware information is up to date (recommended), Command View TL downloads the latest list of supported hardware with current firmware revisions and saves it locally on the management station. This list is updated every 24 hours on the HP Support website, so checking this option makes sure that Command View TL is up-to-date on all the latest firmware revisions. Choose local firmware file(s)Choose firmware files that are stored locally. Click Add to browse to the firmware file(s). To select multiple files in the same directory, hold down Ctrl while selecting the files. Click Select to return to the Firmware Selection Method window.

7. 8.

Click Next to display the Device Selection screen which lists all the components available for updating. Select the check box next to any device that needs updating. IMPORTANT: If the dialog shows that the Interface Manager card and other components require updating, update the other components first. Then, start the process again to update the Interface Manager card. You cannot update the other components and the Interface Manager card at the same time.

9.

For each selected device, select the appropriate firmware revision from the drop-down box in the right column. 10. Click Next to display the Firmware Update Summary screen. 1 1. Confirm the firmware update selections and select I understand that this update will cause currently running backups to fail.

Updating the firmware with the Firmware Update wizard

139

12. Click Next to display the Firmware Update Progress window. This window displays the progress of the firmware update. Click Hide Details to hide the progress by component. When complete, a dialog box displays the status of the update. If there are any errors during the firmware update, the update will stop and leave your configuration settings intact. Contact Support for assistance. 13. Click OK to close the Update Complete dialog box. 14. Click Finish to exit the wizard.

Updating the firmware from version I1xx to version I2xx

Because the format of the firmware file has changed, you must use different procedures to update the Interface Manager card firmware depending on whether you are changing minor revisions (I1xx to I1xx or I2xx to I2xx) or major revisions (I1xx to I2xx). You must update a major revision with the Command View TL GUI (see Updating the firmware with the Firmware Update wizard (page 137)). You can update a minor revision with the Command View TL GUI (see Updating the firmware with the Firmware Update wizard (page 137)) or with the CLI (see Updating the firmware with the CLI (page 186)). IMPORTANT: Only versions I182 or higher can upgrade to version I200.

IMPORTANT: The Interface Manager firmware version I200 and above is not available for the ESL9000 Series library. The ESL9000 Series library must remain at the latest I182 version. IMPORTANT: After upgrading to version I200, you will not be able to view support tickets that you generated with version I1xx. When you update the firmware from version I1xx to version I2xx, the Firmware Update wizard migrates your configuration settings including: Support information Library settings Interface Manager settings Network settings SNMP settings License information Partitions Secure Manager

In the first step, the Firmware Update Wizard copies the configuration settings to a database file. In the second step, the Firmware Update Wizard copies the database file to the I200 Interface Manager card. Depending on the complexity of your configuration, the firmware update may take up to 1 hour.

140 Command View TL GUI

Restoring factory defaults

The Restore Factory Defaults screen provides a way to restore factory default settings for the Interface Manager card and selected interface controllers. Consider the following when restoring factory default settings: If you reset the Interface Manager card, another dialog box opens for you to choose which configuration data should be retained and which data should be reset. The following types of configuration data can be retained:

Network settings (HP recommends retaining network settings if they are already configured properly) SNMP settings Trace and event logs

Selecting the check box causes the corresponding data to be retained. HP recommends that you back up the Interface Manager card configuration using the Saving the configuration of the library (page 134) before restoring the Interface Manager card factory defaults. The host mapping configuration data of each interface controller is synchronously stored on both the interface controller and on the Interface Manager card. If you reset an interface controller, the Interface Manager card restores the mapping configuration to the interface controller when the interface controller reboots. If you reset all devices, the mapping configuration is lost and you will have to reconfigure mapping.

NOTE: The library will timeout after 60 minutes if the network settings are not saved. If you do not save the settings before the session terminates, you will have to remove the library and add it again.

Restoring factory defaults for one component

1. 2. 3. 4. In the Library window, click the Support tab. In the left panel, select Restore Factory Defaults. A list of components appears in the right panel. In the right panel, select the component that you want to restore, and then select ActionsRestore Selected Component. Confirm that you want to restore the factory defaults.

Restoring factory defaults for all components

1. 2. 3. In the Library window, click the Support tab. In the left panel, select Restore Factory Defaults. A list of components appears in the right panel. Select ActionsRestore Defaults on All Components. The Restore IM to Factory Defaults wizard appears.

Restoring factory defaults

141

4. 5.

Select which Interface Manager card settings to keep, and then click Next. HP recommends that you keep all settings if they are currently configured correctly. Read the warning, and if you agree, select the check box, and then click Finish.

Using factory overrides

Some Command View TL features are available only when enabled with a factory password. The password is intended to prevent inexperienced users from accessing functionality that can be particularly harmful to their system if used improperly. These features include: Firmware DowngradeAllows you to downgrade firmware revisions. The device product ID and revision string sequence must match. Factory DetailsAllows you to select the factory detail level when generating or viewing a support ticket.

Two types of passwords can be used. Temporary passwords enable users to perform the above actions on a one-time basis. Support personnel passwords (for internal HP use only) enable all of the above options and are permanent. To obtain a factory password, contact your support provider or call center. To enter the factory password: 1. In the Command View TL window, click the Administration tab. The current setting for factory overrides appears.

142

Command View TL GUI

2.

Select ActionsEnable Factory Overrides. The Factory Overrides dialog box appears.

3. 4.

Contact HP Technical Support to obtain the factory password. Enter the factory password, and then click OK. Assuming the factory password is valid, you are now able to access the password-protected functions of Command View TL.

Disabling factory overrides

To disable factory overrides: 1. In the Command View TL Launcher window, click the Administration tab. The current setting for factory overrides appears. 2. Select ActionsDisable Factory Overrides. The Confirmation dialog box appears for removing the factory overrides password.

3.

Click OK to remove the factory overrides password.

Disabling factory overrides

143

3 Advanced features in the GUI

Using license keys
The Interface Manager card in EML and ESL E-series tape libraries supports optional features that require a Secure Manager license. A single Secure Manager license enables Advanced Host Access, Library Partitioning, and the Secure Key Manager (SKM) or Enterprise Secure Key Manager (ESKM). Advanced Host AccessGives the library administrator control over which robotics or drives within a library may be accessed by the various backup hosts on the SAN. Library PartitioningEnables the library administrator to divide the physical library into multiple, logical libraries. HP StorageWorks Licensed Capacity UpgradeWith certain tape libraries, additional capacity can be licensed as needed. The Licensed Capacity Upgrade feature enables you to enter a license key to unlock this additional capacity. Key ManagerEnables you to encrypt data on LTO4 and later tapes with LTO4 and later drives. TapeAssure AdvancedSupports the ESL G3, MSL6460, and MSL libraries and AutoLoaders. This license provides an intuitive, easy to use dashboard and advance analytic features for performance, health, and utilization related to drives and cartridges. NOTE: The ESL G3 and MSL6480 TapeAssure Advanced license requires one permanent Command View TL License for ESL G3/MSL6480 for that library. Data VerificationSupports the ESL G3 library. This license is used for verifying the data quality of the cartridge. Each cartridge uses up one license on the first use for the data verification; subsequent use by the same cartridge does not use up the license again.

To use these features you must buy and install license keys. 1. Purchase the licenses. You may have already purchased the additional licensable features when you ordered the library. If not, visit https://h30580.www3.hp.com/poeticWeb/ portalintegration/hppWelcome.htm or contact your HP authorized reseller for purchasing information. After purchasing the licenses, you receive one or more Software Entitlement Certificates that show the HP order number, the product number and name, and the quantity ordered. 2. Obtain the license keys. Fill out the required information and follow the instructions on the Software Entitlement Certificates to obtain your license keys. HP generates the license key based on the HP order number and the serial number of the library in which the key will be installed. HP provides you with the license keys via whichever method you specified on the Software Entitlement Certificate (online, e-mail, or fax). NOTE: You must use Command View TL to install each license key for the library having the serial number used to obtain the key. The license cannot be installed for a different library. 3. Use Command View TL to install the license key(s) for your library. This step is described in detail in Adding a license key (page 32).

Configuring host HBA access with HP Secure Manager

Secure Manager gives the library administrator control over which devices in the library (drives and robotic controller) may be accessed by the various backup hosts on the SAN. Access can be configured for each FC port on a Host Bus Adapter (HBA). Each port of a dual-port HBA must be configured separately.
144 Advanced features in the GUI

There are two levels of Secure Manager implemented with the Interface Manager card: Basic Secure ManagerDoes not require a license key and is automatically activated. With basic Secure Manager, you can configure whether or not a host HBA can access the library. However, basic Secure Manager does not enable you to control whether this host HBA can see individual components within the library. Basic Secure Manager provides an all or nothing level of control. Advanced Secure ManagerRequires a license key before it can be used. Advanced Secure Manager provides the same functionality as basic Secure Manager, but adds more granular control over access. With advanced Secure Manager, you can configure which robotics and drives in the library each host HBA is able to access. This level of control effectively partitions the library resources into user-defined zones or Access Control Groups that can be allocated to certain host HBA FC ports on the SAN, thus reducing the possibility of access conflicts and errors.

A valid license key is required to use Advanced Secure Manager. See Using license keys (page 144) for more information.

About Access Control Groups (ACG)

To make host access as flexible and scalable as possible, Command View TL 3.0.0 and later makes use of Access Control Groups. An Access Control Group contains a collection of devices (robotics and drives) and a collection of host HBAs in the SAN that are granted access to those devices. Only those host HBAs that are granted access, as part of an Access Control Group, can discover and use the robotics and tape drives. An Access Control Group can contain as few as one host HBA and one drive, or as many hosts or devices as desired. Each EML and ESL E-Series must have at least one Access Control Group defined. NOTE: Once a host HBA is added to an Access Control Group, it is no longer available to other Access Control Groups. Host HBAs can only be part of one ACG.

Creating an Access Control Group

To create an Access Control Group: 1. In the Library window, click the Configuration tab, then select Host Access from the left panel. 2. In the right panel, select ActionsAdd Access Control Group. The Add Access Control Group wizard appears. 3. Enter a name for the ACG and click Next.

Configuring host HBA access with HP Secure Manager

145

4.

Select the robotics or drives to be added to the ACG, then click Next.

NOTE: If you are using Basic Secure Manager, all the devices in the library will be selected and the wizard will be grayed out. Your single ACG will have full access to all devices in the library. If you are using Advanced Secure Manager (license required), individual devices can be selected, and more than one ACG can be created. To separately configure each FC Port or LUN for each device, click Customize Port/LUN settings at the bottom of the wizard screen. When checked, individual FC Ports and LUNs can be selected for each device. NOTE: For LTO3 and earlier tape drives, the FC port/LUN combinations must be unique for each device, and this is validated when completing the next step. For LTO4 and later tape drives, select FC Port 0 if the FC cable is connected to port A on the tape drive or FC Port 1 if the FC cable is connected to port B. The LUN will always be 0 for LTO4 and later drives.
146 Advanced features in the GUI

5.

In the Select Host page of the Add Access Control Group wizard, click Add Known Host.

A list of previously-added or automatically-discovered hosts and HBAs appears. To include a host/HBA in this ACG, click the box next to its name. To locate a host/HBA by Name, WWN, or SID, simply begin typing in the Filter box to display only host and HBAs that match your filter criteria.

6.

If the host HBA you want to add does not appear in the list, click Add New Host button, then fill in the host/HBA name and WWN information, and click OK.

Configuring host HBA access with HP Secure Manager

147

7. 8.

If you want to completely remove a host/HBA from the available list, check the box to the left of one ore more hosts, and click Remove Host. If you want to change the host/HBA name to a more user-friendly alias, click the box next to a single host and click Edit Host, then enter the new name, and click OK.

148

Advanced features in the GUI

9. When all host selections and changes have been made, click Next. 10. Review your choices on the Configuration screen, and click Finish.

1 1. The Host Access Progress screen displays operation progress. When 100% is reached, click OK.

Editing an Access Control Group

To edit an Access Control Group:

Configuring host HBA access with HP Secure Manager

149

1.

In the Library window, click the Configuration tab, then select Host Access from the left panel.

2.

In the right panel, click on the Access Control Group you want to edit, then select ActionsEdit Access Control Group. The Edit Access Control Group wizard appears. Follow the wizard prompts to edit the Access Control Group's name, device list, and host list.

3.

150

Advanced features in the GUI

All configuration options available in the Add Access Control Group wizard are also available in the Edit Access Control Group wizard.

Configuring host HBA access with HP Secure Manager

151

4.

Click Finish to complete the wizard or Cancel to cancel your changes.

Removing an Access Control Group

To remove an Access Control Group: 1. In the Library window, click the Configuration tab. In the left panel, select Host Access from the left panel. 2. Remove already created ACGs by doing one of the following: 3. In the right panel, select the ACG you want to remove, and select ActionsRemove Access Control Group. In the right panel, select Actions-Remove all ACG to remove all created ACGs.

Click YES on the confirmation dialog and return to the Library window.

Synchronizing host access settings

If you have made interface controller host access changes directly through the interface controller Telnet or serial interface instead of using the Interface Manager card or Command View TL, the interface controller will be out of sync with the Interface Manager card. You must then synchronize the settings which reapplies the Interface Manager card settings to the interface controllers. 1. In the Library window, click the Configuration tab. 2. In the right panel, select ActionsSynchronize Secure Manager Settings.

Viewing the device map

The device map shows how a particular host HBA sees the configuration within a library. The host HBA Properties dialog shows the device map. 1. In the Library window, click the Configuration tab. Previously created Access Control Groups (ACG) with the list of the host HBAs that currently have access to the library appear in the right panel.

152

Advanced features in the GUI

2.

In the right panel, select an ACG by doing one of the following: In the right panel, double-click the ACG for which you want to see the device map. In the right panel, double-click the ACG for which you want to see the device map, and select ActionsProperties.

The Host/HBA Properties dialog appears. The device map displays all of the devices in the library in the first column. The second and third columns display the FC port and LUN information respectively for the corresponding device, as it appears to that host HBA. If the library is partitioned the fourth column displays the partition information in which the device is present.

Partitioning a library
Using the advanced version of Secure Manager (license required), you have the option of partitioning the physical library into multiple logical libraries. When partitioning a library, consider the following: If you choose not to partition your library, that is not equivalent to having a library with one large partition. Although you could create one large partition, doing so does not have any benefit. You should either create two or more partitions, or not partition the library at all. If you choose to partition your library, you must assign each of the library resources to a partition. Any devices that are not assigned to a partition cannot be seen by backup software. A partition must contain at least one drive and one slot. Mailslots are optional. Creating and deleting partitions affects host access configuration. Deleting a partition removes mapping information for that partition. When you add or remove partitions in a library that is enrolled with the SKM or ESKM, you must also add or remove the key generation policy for that partition using the SKM or ESKM Management Console software. (For instructions, see the appropriate user guide.) Until this policy is updated, the key management status for the tape drives in the affected partition will appear as critical (red) on the Health Summary screen. After you update this policy, it is applied the next time media is loaded into the tape drive, which will clear the critical status. Only the security user can change this policy (see (page 22) and Changing library passwords (page 34)).

Adding a partition
To add a partition to your library: 1. In the Library window, click the Configuration tab. 2. In the left panel, select Partitioning. The right panel displays the existing partitions in the library, if any. 3. Select ActionsAdd Partition.

Partitioning a library

153

4.

Follow the instructions in the wizard to create the new partition. Review your choices and click Finish. NOTE: Some devices may not be available to add to the partition depending on your library configuration, or if those devices are already assigned to another partition.

Removing a partition
To remove a partition from your library: 1. In the Library window, click the Configuration tab. 2. In the left panel, select Partitioning. The right panel displays the existing partitions in the library, if any. 3. In the right panel, select a partition, and then select ActionsRemove Selected Partition. CAUTION: When you remove a partition, any devices that were in that partition must be reassigned to the remaining partitions on the library. Devices are unavailable until they are reassigned to another partition. If you remove all partitions, the library reverts to a non-partitioned state and all devices are available. Any time you add or remove partitions, you must reconfigure host access. For more information, see Configuring host HBA access (page 144).

154 Advanced features in the GUI

4.

Confirm that you want to remove the partition.

Removing all partitions

To remove all partitions from your library: 1. In the Library window, click the Configuration tab. 2. In the left panel, select Partitioning. The right panel displays the existing partitions in the library, if any. 3. Select ActionsRemove All Partitions. CAUTION: When you remove a partition, any devices that were in that partition must be reassigned to the remaining partitions on the library. Devices are unavailable until they are reassigned to another partition. If you remove all partitions, the library reverts to a non-partitioned state and all devices are available. Any time you add or remove partitions, you must reconfigure host access. For more information, see Configuring host HBA access (page 144).

4.

Confirm that you want to remove all partitions.

Extending a partition
You can add drives, mailslots, or slots to an existing partition. IMPORTANT: Extending a partition will not enable you to change the partition element address of elements already in the partition. Therefore, all new components added to the partition must have a larger element address than the last element (of a particular type) in the partition. For example, if a library has 6 tape drives and a partition currently contains Drive 3 and Drive 4. You may extend the partition to contain drive 5 and 6, but you may not add Drive 1 or Drive 2. 1. 2. 3. In the Library window, click the Configuration tab. In the left panel, select Partitioning. The right panel displays the existing partitions in the library, if any. In the right panel, select the partition that you want to add to, and then select ActionsExtend Partition.

Partitioning a library

155

4.

Follow the instructions in the wizard to add drives, mailslots, or slots. Review your choices, and then click Finish.

Upgrading capacity
Some HP StoreEver tape libraries enable you to license additional capacity as needed. The following HP StoreEver tape libraries support the Licensed Capacity feature: ESL322e ESL286e EML 71e

Capacity upgrades for ESL E-Series libraries

In the ESL E-Series libraries, slots are grouped into panels. When you purchase one of these libraries, panels one, two, and three are enabled by default. You can purchase up to three additional licenses to upgrade the capacity of the library. The first license enables panel four, the second license enables panel five, and the third license enables panels six and seven. To upgrade capacity, follow the steps in the sections: Using license keys (page 144) Adding a license key (page 32) Enabling capacity upgrades (page 157)

(page 157) shows the layout of the slot panels in an ESL E-Series tape library and how those panels are named.

156

Advanced features in the GUI

Figure 16 Capacity upgrades for ESL E-Series tape libraries

1. Upper left panel (enabled at the factory) 3. Lower left panel (enabled at the factory) 5. Middle right panel (available for capacity upgrade) 7. Back wall (available for capacity upgrade)

2. Middle left panel (enabled at the factory) 4. Upper right panel (available for capacity upgrade) 6. Lower right panel (available for capacity upgrade)

Capacity upgrades for EML E-Series libraries

You can upgrade the EML 71e library from 71 slots to 103 slots. You need to purchase a license to do this upgrade. To upgrade capacity, follow the steps in the sections: Using license keys (page 144) Adding a license key (page 32) Enabling capacity upgrades (page 157)

Figure 17 (page 157) shows the layout of the slots. Figure 17 Capacity upgrades for EML tape libraries

1. 71 slots in the 8U base module (enabled at the factory) 2. 32 slots in the 4U base module (available for capacity upgrade)

Enabling capacity upgrades

Licensing the additional capacity is a two step process: 1. Obtain and install the license key as described in Using license keys (page 144).
Upgrading capacity 157

2.

Activate the newly licensed capacity as follows: a. In the Library window, click the Configuration tab. b. In the left panel, select Licensed Capacity. A list of the available capacity upgrades appears in the right panel. NOTE: The Licensed Capacity item in the left panel is only visible with libraries that support the Licensed Capacity feature.

c.

In the right panel, select a capacity upgrade that lists Pending in the State column, and then select ActionsEnable Pending Capacity.

The State column is updated and the newly-licensed capacity is now available.

Encrypting data with the HP StorageWorks Secure Key Manager (SKM) or HP Enterprise Secure Key Manager (ESKM)
To encrypt data, you must have the following items: Advanced Secure Manager (license required) LTO4 and later tape drive LTO4 or later tape cartridge An HP StorageWorks Secure Key Manager (SKM) or an HP Enterprise Secure Key Manager (ESKM) appliance installed on your network. See the appropriate installation guide to install the SKM or ESKM.

If encryption is enabled for an LTO4 and later tape drive and a write request occurs, the ETLA tape library retrieves metadata from the drive and cartridge. This metadata includes the cartridge type,
158 Advanced features in the GUI

a unique media identifier, and the media barcode. This metadata is used to create a unique key name. The library then requests a key from the SKM or ESKM, based on the key generation policy for that library or partition. The library obtains its key generation policies (one per partition) from the SKM or ESKM when it logs in. The available policies are Key per Tape, Key per Partition, and No Encryption. The SKM or ESKM returns the key to the library over an SSL connection. The key, and the key name, are forwarded to the LTO4 and later tape drive. This key is used on all subsequent write operations, until the cartridge is unloaded. The key retrieval occurs in a very short period of time, and the entire process is transparent to the backup application. If a later backup session appends data to the tape, the same key will be retrieved and used to encrypt the appended data. The LTO4 and later tape drive compresses the data prior to encrypting it. Encryption does not increase the size of the data on the tape. Furthermore, encryption does not affect the performance of the drive. All encryption is performed using AES-256 keys. During a read operation, the library retrieves the key name from the tape, and requests that key from the SKM or ESKM. The key is returned over SSL, forwarded to the LTO4 and later tape drive, and is used on all subsequent read operations until the cartridge is unloaded. Figure 18 Data encryption process

1. Backup domain server 3. Backup media server 5. LTO4 and later tape drives 7. ETLA library 9. Encrypted key 1 1. SSL socket

2. Backup clients 4. Read/write request 6. LTO4 and later tape cartridges 8. Metadata 10. LAN 12. SKM or ESKM

NOTE: When encryption is enabled, HP strongly recommends that all cartridges have high quality barcodes, and the tape library is configured to enable a barcode length of 6 or more characters. The cartridge barcode is useful for later matching an encryption key with a cartridge. For example, if a tape is lost then the barcode can be used to identify the key associated with that cartridge.

Encrypting data with the HP StorageWorks Secure Key Manager (SKM) or HP Enterprise Secure Key Manager (ESKM)

159

Enrolling libraries with the SKM or ESKM

Each of the ETLA libraries that you want to use to encrypt data must be enrolled with the SKM or ESKM. You perform this enrollment as part of the installation of the SKM or ESKM. To install the SKM or ESKM, see the installation and replacement guide that shipped with your SKM or ESKM.

Selecting the SKM or ESKM as the key manager

You will have selected the SKM or ESKM as your key manager as part of the SKM or ESKM installation. However, you might need to perform this procedure again if you changed the key manager to be your backup application and you now want to change it back. To select a key manager, use the Key Management Setup Wizard. This wizard establishes communication between the library and the SKM or ESKM by setting up the certificate authority and certificates on the library, entering the user name and password that the library uses to log on to the SKM or ESKM, and entering the IP addresses of the SKM or ESKM appliances. The wizard will verify the connectivity to the SKMs or ESKMs when all the data has been provided. NOTE: You perform some of the steps in this procedure with the SKM or ESKM Management Console software. Make sure you have access to it before beginning. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. You must log into Command View TL as a security user to change the key manager. See Starting Command View TL (page 21). In the Launcher window, click the Devices tab. A list of your current libraries appears. Double-click the library for which you want to change the key manager. Click the Configuration tab. In the left panel, select Key Management. NOTE: The Key Management command will only appear if you have Advanced Secure Manager (see Using license keys (page 144)) and LTO4 and later tape drives installed in your library (in the Library window, click the Status tab, then in the left panel, click Advanced LTO Drives).

6. 7.

Select ActionsSelect Key Manager Type. Select HP StorageWorks Secure Key Manager to select SKM or HP Enterprise Secure Key Manager to select ESKM, then click Next. The welcome screen appears.

160 Advanced features in the GUI

8.

Read the information on the screen, and click Next. Page 1 of the wizard appears.

Encrypting data with the HP StorageWorks Secure Key Manager (SKM) or HP Enterprise Secure Key Manager (ESKM)

161

9.

Follow the remaining instructions in the wizard. When you have completed the wizard, the key manager information will appear in the right panel of the Key Management window.

Un-enrolling SKM or ESKM and reverting to the backup application as the key manager
You can stop using the SKM or ESKM and start using the backup application as the key manager at any time. CAUTION: Changing key managers will delete the certificates and configuration for the SKM or ESKM. To re-enable the SKM or ESKM as your key manager, you must run the Key Management Setup Wizard again. See (page 160).

162

Advanced features in the GUI

1. 2. 3. 4. 5.

You must log into Command View TL as a security user to change the key manager. See Starting Command View TL (page 21). In the Launcher window, click the Devices tab. A list of your current libraries appears. Double-click the library for which you want to change the key manager. Click the Configuration tab. In the left panel, select Key Management. NOTE: The Key Management command will only appear if you have Advanced Secure Manager (see Using license keys (page 144)) and LTO4 and later tape drives installed in your library (in the Library window, click the Status tab, then in the left panel, click Advanced LTO Drives).

6.

Select ActionsUn-enroll Key Manager. The welcome screen appears.

Encrypting data with the HP StorageWorks Secure Key Manager (SKM) or HP Enterprise Secure Key Manager (ESKM) 163

7. 8. 9.

Read the information on the screen, and click Next. Page 1 of the wizard appears. By default this will un-enroll the enroll key manager and set it to backup software. Read the text in the Reboot Warning, then click Next. Verify the information, then click Next. When you have completed the wizard, the key manager will be un-enrolled and Backup Software is selected as Key Manager and appears in the right panel of the Key Management window.

Changing the login on an SKM or ESKM

Use this procedure to change the user name and password that the library uses to log into the SKM or ESKM. IMPORTANT: You must also change the user name and password for the library in the SKM or ESKM Management Console software. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. You must log into Command View TL as a security user to change the key manager. See Starting Command View TL (page 21). In the Launcher window, click the Devices tab. A list of your current libraries appears. Double-click the library for which you want to change the key manager. Click the Configuration tab. In the left panel, select Key Management. NOTE: The Key Management command will only appear if you have Advanced Secure Manager (see Using license keys (page 144)) and LTO4 and later tape drives installed in your library (in the Library window, click the Status tab, then in the left panel, click Advanced LTO Drives). 6. Select ActionsUpdate Key Manager Configuration. The welcome screen appears.

164 Advanced features in the GUI

7.

Read the information on the screen, and click Next. The login page appears.

8.

Type the current user name and password, and click Next. The tier #1 information screen appears.

Encrypting data with the HP StorageWorks Secure Key Manager (SKM) or HP Enterprise Secure Key Manager (ESKM)

165

9.

Click Next without making any changes to the tier information. Follow the remaining instructions in the wizard.

Changing the tier information for an SKM or ESKM

Tiers are a way to indicate which SKM or ESKM appliances a library should contact first when it needs to get an encryption key. For example, to avoid network performance issues, you might want a library to access local SKM or ESKM appliances before remote SKM or ESKM appliances. To specify this, you would enter the local SKM or ESKM appliances in tier 1 and the remote SKM or ESKM appliances in tier 2. The library will try to get a key from any of the SKM or ESKM appliances in tier 1 first. If none of the SKM or ESKM appliances in tier 1 respond, it will move to tier 2. If you add or remove an SKM or ESKM from your network, you will need to update the tier information by running the Key Management Setup Wizard and selecting Update Key Manager Configuration and running the Key Management Setup Wizard.

Adding or deleting addresses or hostnames for SKM or ESKM appliances

To add or delete addresses or hostnames for any SKM or ESKM appliances: 1. You must log into Command View TL as a security user to change the key manager. See Starting Command View TL (page 21). 2. In the Launcher window, click the Devices tab. A list of your current libraries appears. 3. Double-click the library for which you want to change the key manager. 4. Click the Configuration tab. 5. In the left panel, select Key Management. NOTE: The Key Management command will only appear if you have Advanced Secure Manager (see Using license keys (page 144)) and LTO4 and later tape drives installed in your library (in the Library window, click the Status tab, then in the left panel, click Advanced LTO Drives). 6. Select ActionsUpdate Key Manager Configuration. The welcome screen appears.

166 Advanced features in the GUI

7.

Read the information on the screen, and click Next. The login page appears.

8. 9. 10. 1 1. 12. 13.

Type the current user name and password, and then click Next. The tier #1 information page appears. Verify the existing information for tier #1 is correct. If you have more than one tier, and you are making changes to tier #2 or tier #3, verify the existing information of tier #2 and tier #3 is correct. Type the appropriate SSL port number for nodes in the tier in the SSL Port Number for nodes field. Enter the IP addresses or hostnames for any SKM or ESKM appliances that were added. Delete the information for any SKM or ESKM appliances that were removed.
167

Encrypting data with the HP StorageWorks Secure Key Manager (SKM) or HP Enterprise Secure Key Manager (ESKM)

14. Click Next. Follow the remaining instructions in the wizard.

Adding a tier to the Key Manager Configuration

To add a tier to the Key Manager Configuration: 1. Perform steps 19 of Adding or deleting addresses or hostnames for SKM appliances. 2. Click Add Tier. 3. Type the SKM or ESKM Node Address for each node on the tier. 4. Verify the information is correct, then click Next. 5. At the Reboot Warning wizard, read the warning, then click Next. 6. Verify the information, then click Next. When you have completed the wizard, the key manager tier information will get updated and Key Manager with new tier information will appear in the right panel of the Key Management window.

Deleting a tier from the Key Manager Configuration

To delete a tier from the Key Manager Configuration: NOTE: Tiers must removed from highest to lowest. For example, if there are three tiers defined, tier 2 cannot be removed until after tier 3 is removed. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Perform steps 19 of Adding or deleting addresses or hostnames for SKM appliances. All tiers are listed in the same wizard. Remove the node addresses from the tier to be removed. Click Remove Tier. The tier information will be removed. Read the Reboot Warning dialog box, then click Next. Confirm the information, then click Next. When you have completed the wizard, the key manger tier information will get updated and Key Manager with updated tier information will appear in the right panel of the Key Management window.

Updating certificates or the certificate authority for an SKM or ESKM

When a certificate expires, you must enter information for a new certificate. Also use this procedure to change the certificate authority. 1. You must log into Command View TL as a security user to change the key manager. See Starting Command View TL (page 21). 2. In the Launcher window, click the Devices tab. A list of the current libraries appears. 3. Double-click the library for which you want to change the key manager. 4. Click the Configuration tab. 5. In the left panel, select Key Management. NOTE: The Key Management command will only appear if you have Advanced Secure Manager (see Using license keys (page 144)) and LTO4 and later tape drives installed in your library (in the Library window, click the Status tab, then in the left panel, click Advanced LTO Drives). 6. Select ActionsUpdate Key Manager Certificate. Select one of the following: Update Certificate Authority Certificate Update Library Certificate Update Both Certificates

The welcome screen appears.

168 Advanced features in the GUI

7.

Click Next. Follow the remaining instructions in the wizard. For more detailed information, see the appropriate SKM or ESKM installation and replacement guide.

Changing library partitions after initial SKM or ESKM setup

When you add or remove partitions in a library that is enrolled with the SKM or ESKM, you must also add or remove the key generation policy for that partition using the SKM or ESKM Management Console software. (For instructions, see the SKM or ESKM user guide.) Until this policy is updated, the key management status for the tape drives in the affected partition will appear as critical (red) on the Health Summary screen. After you update this policy, it is applied the next time media is loaded into the tape drive, which will clear the critical status. Only the security user can change this policy (see (page 22) and Changing library passwords (page 34)).

Verifying connectivity from the library to SKM or ESKM

To verify connectivity from the library to the SKM or ESKM: 1. You must log into Command View TL as a security user to change the key manager. See Starting Command View TL (page 21). 2. In the Launcher window, click the Devices tab. A list of the current libraries appears. 3. Double-click the library for which you want to change the key manager. 4. Click the Configuration tab. 5. In the left panel, select Key Management. NOTE: The Key Management command will only appear if you have Advanced Secure Manager (see Using license keys (page 144)) and LTO4 and later tape drives installed in your library. (To verify if LTO4 and later tape drives are installed, navigate to the Library window, click the Status tab, then in the left panel, click Advanced LTO Drives). 6. 7. Select ActionsVerify Key Manager Connectivity. The welcome screen appears. Read the information on the screen, and click Next.

8.

Verify that the configuration is correct, then click Next.

Encrypting data with the HP StorageWorks Secure Key Manager (SKM) or HP Enterprise Secure Key Manager (ESKM)

169

9.

When the Update and Verification Operation Complete dialog box appears, read whether the operation completed successfully or not, then click Finish.

Transferring current HP StorageWorks Secure Key Manager (SKM) enrollment settings to an HP Enterprise Secure Key Manager (ESKM)
This procedure will transfer an existing SKM enrollment to a new ESKM cluster. The ESKM cluster must be installed and operational prior to upgrading from SKM to ESKM. IMPORTANT: Any of the SKM cluster keys, CAs, and certifications that you want to re-use on the replacement ESKM cluster must have already been backed up and restored to the new ESKM cluster before starting this procedure. See HP Enterprise Secure Key Manager Installation and Replacement Guide that came with your ESKM. To upgrade from SKM to ESKM: 1. You must log into Command View TL as a security user to change the key manager. See Starting Command View TL (page 21). 2. In the Launcher window, click the Devices tab. A list of the current libraries appears.
170 Advanced features in the GUI

3. 4. 5.

Double-click the library on which you want to change the key manager. Click the Configuration tab. In the left panel, select Key Management. NOTE: The Key Management command will only appear if you have Advanced Secure Manager (see Using license keys (page 144)) and LTO4 and later tape drives installed in your library (in the Library window, click the Status tab, then in the left panel, click Advanced LTO Drives).

6.

Select Actions+Transfer current SKM enrollment settings to ESKMReuse SKM Certificate Authority and client certificate. If Create new Certificate Authority and client certificate is selected, then certificates generated when SKM was installed will be deleted, and the upgrade will proceed as a new enrollment. See Selecting the SKM or ESKM as the key manager (page 160).

7. 8.

Read and follow the text on the screen that appears, then click Next. Enter the library user name and password in the appropriate fields, then click Next. Tier information appears.

9. If appropriate, select the box to reuse pre-existing SKM tiers. 10. If appropriate type the appropriate SSL port number for nodes in the tier in the SSL Port Number for nodes field. 1 1. Type the IP addresses or hostnames for any nodes that were added. 12. Delete the information for any nodes that were removed. 13. If appropriate, add a tier to the Key Manager Configuration using the following procedure: 1. Click Add Tier. 2. Type the ESKM Node Address for each node on the tier. 3. Click Next. 4. Verify the information is correct, then click Next. 5. At the Reboot Warning dialog box, read the warning, then click Yes.

Encrypting data with the HP StorageWorks Secure Key Manager (SKM) or HP Enterprise Secure Key Manager (ESKM)

171

NOTE: The Interface Manager must be rebooted for this operation to take effect. However, the drives and the tape library are not rebooted. 6. When the Update and Verification Operation Complete message appears, read whether the operation was completed successfully, then click Finish.

14. If appropriate, delete a tier from the Key Manager Configuration using the following procedure: 1. All tiers are listed in the same wizard. 2. Remove the node addresses from the tier to be removed. 3. Click Remove Tier. The tier information will be removed. 4. 5. 6. 7. 15. 16. 17. 18. Read the warning in the Remove Tier dialog box, then click Next to continue. Read the Reboot Warning dialog box, then click Yes. When the Update and Verification Operation Complete message appears, read whether the operation was completed successfully, then click Finish. Use the procedures in Changing the tier information for an SKM or ESKM (page 166) to make other changes to the ESKM configuration, as needed.

After the information is complete, click Next. Verify the information in the Key Management Setup Summary dialog box, then click Next. Read the message in the Reboot Warning dialog box, then click Next. When the Update and Verification Operation Complete message appears, read whether the operation was completed successfully, then click Finish.

Using support tickets

Command View TL uses an integrated version of HP StoreEver L&TT to generate a support ticket. In the event of a hardware problem, a support ticket can provide vital information to help in diagnosing and resolving the problem. When a support ticket is generated, the program collects configuration information and executes a Device Analysis test on the selected device or devices. This information can then be viewed, saved, or sent via e-mail to HP Support for assistance. NOTE: A support ticket for a drive contains a drive margin report and is the only way to get that information. A support ticket is saved as a ZIP file that Command View TL uses when you save or e-mail the support ticket (see (page 177) and Sending a support ticket by e-mail). The ZIP file contains a *.ltd file for each selected device. You can extract and view a *.ltd file with L&TT versions 4.2 and later.

Generating a support ticket

1. 2. 3. In the Library window, click the Support tab. In the left panel, select Support Ticket. A list of the support tickets that you have generated appears in the right panel. Select ActionsLaunch Support Ticket Wizard. The welcome screen of the wizard appears.

172

Advanced features in the GUI

4.

Click Next. Page 1 of the wizard appears.

5.

Enter a name for the new support ticket and select the components you want included in the support ticket. The Cached Support Ticket (Timestamp) column lists whether a cached support ticket is available and, if so, the time it was generated. (Support tickets for tape drives are generated and cached whenever a tape cartridge is ejected.) Clicking the ... button displays more information about a cached support ticket. NOTE: later. Cached support tickets will no longer be available in Command View TL 2.6 and

Using support tickets

173

6.

Click Next. Page 2 of the wizard appears.

7.

Read the note, select the check box to confirm, and click Next. The progress screen appears.

174

Advanced features in the GUI

8.

When the support ticket is complete, click Finish. The new support ticket appears in the right panel.

Viewing a support ticket

Support tickets appear in a separate window. To view a support ticket: 1. In the Library window, click the Support tab. 2. In the left panel, select Support Ticket. A list of the support tickets that you have generated appears in the right panel.

3.

In the right panel, select a component under the name of the support ticket, and then select ActionsView Selected Support Ticket. The support ticket appears in a separate window. NOTE: If you have a popup blocker, it will prevent the new window from appearing. You can either set your popup blocker to enable pop-ups on this site or hold the Ctrl key while selecting the View Selected Support Ticket command.

Using support tickets

175

4.

Click the plus (+) and minus () signs to expand and collapse sections of the support ticket. Use the standard navigation keys (Home, End, Page Up, Page Down, and the arrow keys), the Windows scroll bars, and the mouse to navigate through the document. To view different amounts of information, in the drop-down box, you can change the level of detail shown to Highlights, Normal, More details, or Everything.

NOTE: The detail level of the support ticket is set to Everything by default. Entering the factory password enables you to select the Factory detail level. For more information about factory passwords, see Using factory overrides (page 142).

Saving a management station log

To save the management station log for the support ticket: 1. In the library window, click the support ticket. 2. Click ActionsSave Management Station Logs as. 3. Enter the location and file name with the extension .zip. 4. Click Save to save the management station log zip file. This zip file will have the management station logs which can be extracted and viewed. The management station logs in the support ticket can be saved to a local machine.

176

Advanced features in the GUI

Saving a support ticket

To save a support ticket to a different location or with a different name. For example, you can save a support ticket on a client so that it can be opened with L&TT. 1. In the Library window, click the Support tab. 2. In the left panel, select Support Ticket. A list of the support tickets that you have generated appears in the right panel.

3.

Enter a path and filename, and click Save. The file is saved as a ZIP file.

Sending a support ticket by e-mail

To send a support ticket by e-mail: NOTE: Before Command View TL can e-mail a support ticket, you must have an SMTP server. See Changing the e-mail settings (page 28). 1. 2. In the Library window, click the Support tab. In the left panel, select Support Ticket. A list of the support tickets that you have generated appears in the right panel.

Using support tickets 177

3.

Enter your information on the pages of the E-mail Support Ticket wizard. If this is an ongoing support case, select the Send to support provider in reference to an open case option and enter the case reference number in the appropriate field. If this is a new support request, select the Send to support provider to request support by e-mail option. Enter the product number and product serial number in the appropriate fields. When you have completed the wizard, click Finish. The ZIP file that was created when you generated the support ticket is sent to HP Support.

178

Advanced features in the GUI

Removing a support ticket

1. 2. In the Library window, click the Support tab. In the left panel, select Support Ticket. A list of the support tickets that you have generated appears in the right panel.

3.

To confirm that you want to remove the support ticket, click Yes.

Using support tickets

179

4 Command View TL CLI

In addition to the Command View TL GUI, the Interface Manager card can be managed via a command line interface (CLI). The CLI provides commands to perform all necessary management functions. This chapter explains how to initiate a CLI session, the structure of the CLI, and basic navigational techniques. For a comprehensive listing of CLI commands, see (page 190).

Accessing the CLI

You can access the CLI either through a direct RS-232 connection, or by using Telnet or SSH over the LAN. You can have multiple sessions open at the same time (serial, Telnet or SSH, or Command View TL). If a write operation is in progress in one session, subsequent write operations for that library from other sessions will be denied. SerialUses a CLI and connects directly to the Interface Manager card through an RS232 serial interface rather than through the LAN. TelnetUses the same CLI as the serial interface, but requires the IP address of the Interface Manager card to initiate the session. This IP address can be set through the Interface Manager card serial interface or cascade port or, on ESL E-Series and EML E-Series libraries, through the library OCP. The advantage of using Telnet over the serial interface is that users can Telnet from any client machine that is on the LAN; a separate serial connection is not needed. NOTE: If you use Telnet to change the IP address of the Interface Manager card, you must log in to a new Telnet session with the new IP address. The Telnet service may be disabled by the admin user. If the Telnet service has been disabled, it can only be re-enabled with a Serial connection. See set inet telnet (page 206). SSHThis protocol uses the same CLI as the Telnet and serial interfaces, but over a more secure channel. Different SSH client applications are available for various operating systems. When connected via SSH, use it in the exact way you would use Telnet.

Starting a serial session

1. 2. Connect the management station or other PC or laptop to the Interface Manager card using the serial cable shipped with the Interface Manager card. Start a terminal emulation program on the PC that you connected to the Interface Manager card in Step 1. A variety of programs can be used, but HyperTerminal, included with Microsoft Windows operating systems, is the most common. To start HyperTerminal, select Start+All ProgramsAccessoriesCommunicationsHyperTerminal. Set the communications settings as follows: Port Speed: 9600 Data Bits: 8 Parity: none Stop bits: 1 Flow control: none

3.

180 Command View TL CLI

4.

At the login prompt, use the following default information: Username: cliadmin Password: clipwd NOTE: After initially logging in, you should change your password using the set mgmt password (page 210) command. This command starts an interactive procedure for changing the password.

Starting a Telnet session

You can start a Telnet session with the Interface Manager card in one of two ways: Through the LANUse any PC on the LAN, including the management station, to Telnet into the Interface Manager card using the network IP address. See Telnetting through the LAN. Through the Cascade portConnect a PC to the Interface Manager card via the cascade port and Telnet into the Interface Manager card using the cascade IP address. See Telnetting through the cascade port.

Any time you can connect via Telnet, you can connect via SSH. SSH uses the same CLI as the Telnet and serial interfaces, but over a more secure channel. Different SSH client applications are available for various operating systems. When connected via SSH, use it in the exact way you would use Telnet.

Telnetting through the LAN

From any PC on the LAN, including the management station, do the following: 1. Open a command prompt and enter the following command: telnet name where name is either the IP address or hostname of the Interface Manager card. 2. At the login prompt, use the following default information: Username: cliadmin Password: clipwd NOTE: After initially logging in, you should change your password using the set mgmt password (page 210) command. This command starts an interactive procedure for changing the password. Any time you can connect via Telnet, you can connect via SSH. SSH uses the same CLI as the Telnet and serial interfaces, but over a more secure channel. Different SSH client applications are available for various operating systems. When connected via SSH, use it in the exact way you would use Telnet.

Telnetting through the cascade port

The cascade port of the Interface Manager card has a dedicated IP address that is hardcoded into the Interface Manager card and is completely separate from the network IP address. The cascade port provides a backdoor method for accessing the Interface Manager card and making configuration changes, such as getting or setting the network IP address.

Accessing the CLI

181

1.

Connect a standard RJ-45 Ethernet cable from the network port of the PC or laptop to the cascade port of the Interface Manager card. Figure 19 Telnetting through the cascade port

2.

Open a command prompt and enter the following command: telnet 192.168.2.1 NOTE: The above IP address is hardcoded into the Interface Manager card and is completely separate from the network IP address. At the login prompt, use the following default information: Username: cliadmin Password: clipwd NOTE: After initially logging in, you should change your password using the set mgmt password (page 210) command. This command starts an interactive procedure for changing the password. Any time you can connect via Telnet, you can connect via SSH. SSH uses the same CLI as the Telnet and serial interfaces, but over a more secure channel. Different SSH client applications are available for various operating systems. When connected via SSH, use it in the exact way you would use Telnet.

Command syntax structure

The command prompt has the following format: /command_level > The variable command_level indicates the current command level. For example, when you first log in to the CLI with your CLI username and password, you see the following root-level prompt: / > The root command level offers all of the basic and operational commands. To change command levels, enter any command that is available from the current command level. For example, from the root command level, if you enter the set command to change to the set command level, the following prompt shows: /set > All of the set commands are directly available at this level.

Using command sequences

You can change to any command level by specifying a sequence of command levels. A command sequence contains each command level name separated by a space. For example, to get to the mode command level of the set command level, you could either enter set mode from the root command level or mode from the set command level:
182 Command View TL CLI

/ > set mgmt /set/mgmt > - or / > set /set > mgmt /set/mgmt > To execute a command that is available at a particular command level, either change to that command level and enter the command, or enter a command sequence followed by the command name. For example, if you were at the root command level and wanted to use the clock command available at the show mgmt command level, you could do either of the following (in this example, output of the clock command has been omitted): / > show mgmt clock / > - or / > show mgmt /show/mgmt > clock /show/mgmt > NOTE: Executing a command does not change the current command level, except in the case of changing the Interface Manager mode. Refer to Interface Manager mode (page 184) for more information.

Abbreviating commands
All commands can be abbreviated provided that the abbreviation is unique. For example, from the root command level, se mo is equivalent to set mode. However, se m is ambiguous because m at the root command level could mean either mgmt or mode.

Device numbering conventions

In some instances, Command View TL numbers devices differently from how they are numbered on the tape library front panel. For example, if the library contains eight drives, the ESL9000 Series library front panel refers to those drives as drive 0 through 7. Command View TL refers to the same drives as drive 1 through 8. Table 34 (page 183) shows the device numbering conventions used by Command View TL and by the library front panel (when applicable). Table 34 Device numbering conventions, CLI
Device Drives Drive clusters Slots FC interface controllers FC host port numbers SCSI bus numbers Command View TL One-based n/a One-based One-based Zero-based2 Zero-based2 ESL9000 Series front panel Zero-based n/a Zero-based n/a n/a n/a ESL E-Series front panel One-based Zero-based n/a n/a n/a n/a
1

EML E-Series front panel One-based n/a One-based One-based n/a n/a

Command syntax structure 183

Drive clusters in the ESL E-Series libraries are zero-based, although they are not referred to from the front panel of the library. The zero-based numbering of the FC ports and SCSI busses corresponds to the numbers that are printed on the actual hardware.

Navigating the CLI

The CLI is case-sensitive. Enter all commands and keywords in lower case. User-defined strings, such as names or descriptions, may be any case including mixed case. Case information for user-defined strings is preserved in the configuration. The CLI provides the following basic commands: Table 35 Basic commands
Command show set map unmap save restore download reboot create move synch replace remove clear Description Displays configuration, status, and log information. Sets or changes configurable values. Contains commands to map hosts to all drives. Contains commands to unmap hosts from all drives. Saves the current configuration or logs. Restores saved or factory default configurations. Downloads firmware. Reboots devices. Contains commands to create hosts for mapping purposes. Move media between drives, slots, and mail slots. Contains commands to synchronize the mapping. Launches part replacement wizards. Launches the remove host wizard. contains commands to clear various Interface Manager characteristics

Table 36 (page 184) shows additional operating commands provided by the CLI. Table 36 Operational commands
Command home up help exit Description Moves to the root command level. Moves up one command level. Displays help text for a particular command. Terminates the current management session.

The CLI also provides a command history that stores the last ten entered commands. Use the up and down arrow keys to scroll through the list of previous commands. For a complete listing of CLI commands, see (page 190).

Interface Manager mode

The Interface Manager mode setting specifies how the FC interface controllers are configured. In Automatic mode, the host port connection settings will be configured the same across all FC interface controllers in the library. In Manual mode, the host port connection settings for each FC interface
184 Command View TL CLI

controller can be configured differently. For example, one host port can be configured for Fabric Attach and another can be configured for Direct Attach. CAUTION: HP strongly recommends that you leave the Interface Manager mode set to the default setting of Automatic. To change the Interface Manager mode, enter the following command: set mode [ auto] | [manual] When switching between modes, the current command level is changed to the root command level for that mode. When changing from Manual mode to Automatic mode, many of the manual configuration changes made in Manual mode will be lost.

Common CLI functions

The following list provides quick links to several of the most common functions performed in the CLI. Configuring a library (page 185) Configuring the FC interface controllers (page 185) Monitoring device status (page 186) Updating the firmware with the CLI (page 186) Generating support tickets with the CLI (page 187) Using Secure Manager functions (page 188)

Configuring a library
Use the following commands to configure library properties: set system contact assetnumber (page 219) set system contact email (page 219) set system contact location (page 219) set system contact name (page 219) set system contact pager (page 220) set system contact phone (page 220) show system info (page 246) show system status (page 247) set network dhcp (page 216) set network ipaddress (page 216)

Use the following commands to configure TCP/IP settings:

Configuring the FC interface controllers

Use the following commands to configure the port settings: set interface hostport alpa (page 207) set interface hostport connection (page 208) set interface hostport mode (page 208) set interface hostport speed (page 208)

Common CLI functions 185

Monitoring device status

The CLI provides several commands to monitor device status. The status shown is a snapshot of device status at the moment the command was executed. After the CLI shows the status, it does not refresh. To refresh the status information, execute the command again. Use the following commands to show the status of the corresponding device: NOTE: In this command, mgmt refers to the Interface Manager card, interface refers to the interface controllers, and library refers to the library robotics controller. show drive status (page 224) show interface status (page 233) show library status (page 237) show mgmt status (page 240) show robotics status (page 243)

Updating the firmware with the CLI

You can use the CLI to update the firmware of the Interface Manager card and other library hardware. IMPORTANT: You cannot update firmware from version I1xx to I2xx with the CLI. Because the format of the firmware file has changed, you must use different procedures to update the firmware depending on whether you are changing minor revisions (I1xx to I1xx or I2xx to I2xx) or major revisions (I1xx to I2xx). You must update a major revision with the Command View TL GUI. You can update a minor revision with the Command View TL GUI or with the CLI. This procedure involves three steps: 1. Acquire the latest firmware from http://www.hp.com and save it to a temporary location. 2. Use FTP or SFTP to transfer the firmware file to a temporary storage area in the Interface Manager card memory. a. Open a command shell on any PC connected to the LAN. b. Navigate to the directory where the firmware you downloaded in Step 1 is located. c. Enter the following command, as appropriate, depending on whether you are using FTP or SFTP: ftp ipaddress where ipaddress is the IP address of the Interface Manager card. or sftp ipaddress@sftp where ipaddress is the IP address of the Interface Manager card. d. Log in with the following credentials: e. f. g. User name: ftp or sftp, as appropriate. Password: Use your e-mail address to log in via FTP, or use sftp to log in via SFTP.

After logging in a command shell opens, displaying the anonymous FTP/SFTP directory. If necessary, use the ls command to list the contents of the FTP/SFTP directory. Enter the bin command to turn on binary transfer mode. Enter the following command to copy the firmware file to the temporary location in the Interface Manager card's memory: put [filename]

186 Command View TL CLI

where filename is the filename of the firmware file. h. 3. Use the quit command to logoff the FTP/SFTP session. Execute one of the following commands to download the firmware file from the Interface Manager card memory to the appropriate device: download drive (page 192) download interface (page 193) download library (page 194) download mgmt (page 194) NOTE: In this command, mgmt refers to the Interface Manager card, interface refers to the interface controllers, and library refers to the library robotics controller. NOTE: Firmware files have a special header that prevents them from being downloaded to the wrong type of device. If the Interface Manager card detects an incorrect firmware type when you execute any of the download commands, it notifies you of the problem and deletes the firmware file from the temporary storage location in the card memory.

Generating support tickets with the CLI

The Interface Manager card can generate a support ticket for various library components. You can generate a support ticket for drives, FC interface controllers, the library itself, and the Interface Manager card. The command used specifies the type of support ticket to be generated. CAUTION: Each time a support ticket is generated, it uses the same filename (supportticket.zip) and overwrites the previous support ticket. 1. Execute one of the following commands, depending on the type of support ticket to be created: save drive lttsupportticket See save drive lttsupportticket (page 202). save interface lttsupportticket See save interface lttsupportticket (page 202). save library lttsupportticket See save library lttsupportticket (page 202). save mgmt lttsupportticket See save mgmt lttsupportticket (page 203). NOTE: In this command, mgmt refers to the Interface Manager card, interface refers to the interface controllers, and library refers to the library robotics controller. The Interface Manager card generates the file supportticket.zip and stores it in a temporary location in the Interface Manager card memory. 2. Use FTP/SFTP to retrieve the supportticket.zip file and copy it to a location on your PC or network: a. On any PC connected to the LAN, open a command shell. b. Navigate to the directory that you want to store the support ticket in. c. Enter one of the following commands, depending on whether you are using FTP or SFTP: ftp ipaddress where ipaddress is the IP address of the Interface Manager card. or sftp ipaddress@sftp where ipaddress is the IP address of the Interface Manager card.

Common CLI functions

187

d.

Log in with the following credentials: User name: ftp or sftp, as appropriate Password: Use your e-mail address to log in via FTP, or sftp to log in via SFTP.

After logging in, a command shell opens displaying the anonymous FTP/SFTP directory. e. f. g. If necessary, use the ls command to list the contents of the FTP/SFTP directory. Enter the bin command to turn on binary transfer mode. Enter the following command to copy the firmware file to the temporary location in the Interface Manager card memory: get supportticket.zip The file is copied to the directory you navigated to in Step 2.b. h. 3. Enter the quit command to logoff the FTP/SFTP session. Use HP StoreEver L&TT software to view the support ticket. The support ticketsupportticket.zip contains a st.ltd file that you can extract and view in L&TT versions 4.2 and later. You can download L&TT from the HP website: http://www.hp.com/support/tapetools See the documentation included with L&TT for instructions on how to view a support ticket.

Using HP Secure Manager functions

Secure Manager gives the library administrator control over which drives in the library can be accessed by the various backup hosts on the SAN. There are two levels of Secure Manager implemented with the Interface Manager card: Basic Secure ManagerDoes not require a license key and is automatically activated. With basic Secure Manager, you can configure whether or not a particular Host Bus Adapter (HBA) can access the library. However, basic Secure Manager does not enable you to control whether a particular host HBA can see individual robotics or drives within the library. Basic Secure Manager provides an all or nothing level of control. Basic Secure Manager is accessible through the CLI. Advanced Secure ManagerRequires Command View TL to use and is not available through the CLI. See Configuring host HBA access (page 144) for more information.

Accessing Basic Secure Manager through the CLI

You can use the CLI to map a Host Bus Adapter (HBA) of a backup host to the library. When you map a host, you give it full access to the entire library. When you unmap a host, you deny it access to the entire library. To map a host:

188 Command View TL CLI

1.

Use the following command to show a list of all hosts that are known by the system: show host info This command lists all known hosts and assigns each one a host number. You need the host number to map the host. The Interface Manager card keeps track of all hosts that attempt to access the library. Some hosts in the SAN might not be recognized by the Interface Manager card. If a host that you need to map is not recognized by the system, use the following command to add the host: create host [nodewwn] [hostname] The arguments for the create host command are as follows: nodewwnSpecify the node world wide name. World wide names are specified as 16 hex digits. For example, 1234567890ABCDEF is a well-formed world wide name. This operand is required. hostnameSpecify the name of the host. The host name may contain letters, numbers, and '_' characters. The maximum length for a host name is 19 characters. This operand is required. After creating a new host, use the show host info command to determine the host number of the new host.

2.

Use the following commands to map or unmap a host, respectively. For each command, enter the host number determined in Step 1. map host (page 195) unmap host (page 247)

Common CLI functions 189

5 CLI Command Reference

The following commands are available to all users. Click a command name in the table to jump to the description of that command. clear station create host download drive download interface download library download mgmt map host move media reboot interface reboot library reboot mgmt replace interface remove host restore interface defaults restore system config restore system defaults save drive lttsupportticket save interface lttsupportticket save library lttsupportticket save ltt save mgmt lttsupportticket save system config set drive hostport mode set drive hostport speed set host name set inet ftp set inet telnet set interface beacon set interface clearwwnmismatch set interface hostport alpa set interface hostport connection set interface hostport mode set interface hostport speed set mgmt clock set mgmt ntp set mgmt password set mgmt timezone set mgmt wwnstate set mode set net v6 dhcpv6 set net v6 ipaddress set net v6 ipversion set net v6 manual set net v6 stateless set network config set network dhcp set network ipaddress set network snmpcommunity set network snmptrap (page 217)
190 CLI Command Reference

show show show show show show show show show show show show show show show show show show show show show show show show show show show show show show show show show show show show show show show show show show show show show show show show show

drive serialnumber drive status drive type firmware available firmware revisions host access host info host name host sparselunmap inet interface access interface beacon interface hostport alpa interface hostport connection interface hostport mode interface hostport speed interface info interface name interface revision interface status interface wwninfo library access library info library interface library name library productid library revision library sensors library serialnumber library status library topology license media mgmt clock mgmt info mgmt log detail mgmt log event mgmt revision mgmt status mgmt timezone mgmt wwnstate mode net info inet network dhcp network ipaddress network snmpcommunity partition robotics status

set ssh hostkeys (page 218) show station (page 244) set supportticket disable set supportticket enable set system contact assetnumber set system contact email set system contact location set system contact name set system contact pager set system contact phone set system name show drive access show drive hostport show drive info show drive interface show drive productid show drive revision

show ssh hostkeys (page 243) show station (page 244) show supportticket cache show supportticket policy show supportticket statistics show system contact assetnumber show system contact email show system contact location show system contact name show system contact pager show system contact phone show system info show system name show system status synch secmgr unmap host

clear station
Description Syntax Availability Operands Examples Clears any management station registered with the Interface Manager. Use this command when removing a library from its primary management station. clear station All users and modes None To unregister the library associated with this Interface Manager from any management station:
/>clear station Management station cleared.

See also

show station (page 244)

To get a management station to be the primary management station close Command View TL and restart the service. 1. Close the Command View TL browser. 2. Right-click on My Computer and select Manage. 3. Click Services and Applications, then Services. 4. Select the Command View TL service. 5. Click Restart the service. 6. Reopen the Command View TL program.

create host
Description Creates a reference to a HBA. This should only be used for hosts not currently connected to any interfaces. If the specified host has already been created using the specified node world wide name and port world wide name, no changes are made. If there already exists a host with the specified host name, no changes are made. create host node_wwn node_wwpn host_name All users and mode node_wwn Specify the node world wide name. World wide names are specified as 16 hex digits. For example, 1234567890ABCDEF is a well-formed world wide name. This operand is required.
clear station 191

Syntax Availability Operands

node_wwpn

Specify the node world wide port name. World wide port names are specified as 16 hex digits. For example, 1234567890ABCDEF is a well-formed world wide name. This operand is required. Specify the name of the host. The host name may contain letters, numbers, and '_' characters. The maximum length for a host name is 19 characters. This operand is required.

host_name

Examples

To create the host with node world wide name 10000E002020C69, world wide port name FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF, and named myhost1:
/>create host 100000E002020C69 FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF myhost1 Committing configuration done

See also

unmap host set host name show host name

download drive
Description Downloads the images of a firmware file to one or more interfaces. Firmware files can be retrieved from the Internet using HP StoreEver L&TT. Before using this command, a firmware file must have been transferred to the Interface Manager card's firmware repository via FTP/SFTP. See Updating the firmware with the CLI (page 186) for more information. Syntax Availability Operands Examples download drive All users and mode None To download the firmware repository file to all drives:
Welcome to the Interface Manager Command Line Interface. Type 'help' at the prompt for context-sensitive help. />download drive You may enter 'q' at any time to quit. Download code to Ultrium 2-SCSI drive HU10542VK4 (default: n):y 1. /im/xfer/LTT_Ultrium_2-SCSI_K620_OEM3.frm Enter the number of the firmware file to use: 1 You may enter 'q' at any time to quit. Download code to Ultrium 2-SCSI drive HUM4C00492 (default: n):y 1. /im/xfer/LTT_Ultrium_2-SCSI_K620_OEM3.frm Enter the number of the firmware file to use: 1 You may enter 'q' at any time to quit. Download code to Ultrium 3-SCSI drive HU10509A3B (default: n):n You may enter 'q' at any time to quit. Download code to Ultrium 2-SCSI drive HU10542W12 (default: n):n You may enter 'q' at any time to quit. Download code to Ultrium 2-SCSI drive HU10542W11 (default: n):n You may enter 'q' at any time to quit. Download code to Ultrium 2-SCSI drive HU10542VJB (default: n):n You may enter 'q' at any time to quit. Download code to Ultrium 2-SCSI drive HU10542VJ3 (default: n):n You may enter 'q' at any time to quit. Download code to Ultrium 2-SCSI drive HU10542VJL (default: n):n You may enter 'q' at any time to quit. Download code to Ultrium 2-SCSI drive HU10542W0V (default: n):n You may enter 'q' at any time to quit. Download code to Ultrium 2-SCSI drive HU10542VJ1 (default: n):n You may enter 'q' at any time to quit. Download code to Ultrium 2-SCSI drive HU10542W15 (default: n):n You may enter 'q' at any time to quit.

K620 ? Enter 'y' or 'n'

K620 ? Enter 'y' or 'n'

L58S ? Enter 'y' or 'n'

K620 ? Enter 'y' or 'n'

K620 ? Enter 'y' or 'n'

K620 ? Enter 'y' or 'n'

K620 ? Enter 'y' or 'n'

K620 ? Enter 'y' or 'n'

K620 ? Enter 'y' or 'n'

K620 ? Enter 'y' or 'n'

K620 ? Enter 'y' or 'n'

192 CLI Command Reference

Download code to Ultrium 3-SCSI drive HU105089K6 L58S ? Enter 'y' or 'n' (default: n):n Task: Downloading drives. Task % Complete: 0 Device % Complete Errors Status ---------- ---------- ------ -------------------Drive 1 0 false Waiting... Drive 2 0 false Waiting... Task: Downloading drives. Task % Complete: 9.5 Device % Complete ---------- ---------Drive 1 19 Drive 2 0 . . . Task: Downloading drives. Task % Complete: 100 Device % Complete ---------- ---------Drive 1 100 Drive 2 100

Errors -----false false

Status -------------------HU10542VK4 Sending chunk 25 of 27 Waiting...

Errors -----false false

Status -------------------Firmware update complete Firmware update complete

See also

download interface download mgmt

download interface
Description Downloads the images of a firmware file to one or more FC interface controllers. Firmware files can be retrieved from the Internet using HP StoreEver L&TT. Before using this command, a firmware file must have been transferred to the Interface Manager card firmware repository via FTP/SFTP. See Updating the firmware with the CLI (page 186) for more information. CAUTION: Downloading firmware forces a reboot of the interface. Ensure that no backup jobs are in progress before running this command. Syntax Availability Operands Examples download interface All users and mode None To download the firmware repository file to three different interface controllers simultaneously:
/>download interface You may enter 'q' at any time to quit. Download code to HP NS E2400-160 IFC? Enter 'y' or 'n' (default: n):y 1. /im/xfer/LTT_HP_E2400-160_590c.frm 2. /im/xfer/LTT_HP_E2400-4G_590c.frm 3. /im/xfer/LTT_HP_E2400FC_590c.frm Enter the number of the firmware file to use: 1 You may enter 'q' at any time to quit. Download code to HP NS E2400FC IFC? Enter 'y' or 'n' (default: n):y 1. /im/xfer/LTT_HP_E2400-160_590c.frm 2. /im/xfer/LTT_HP_E2400-4G_590c.frm 3. /im/xfer/LTT_HP_E2400FC_590c.frm Enter the number of the firmware file to use: 3 You may enter 'q' at any time to quit. Download code to HP NS E2400FC-4G IFC? Enter 'y' or 'n' (default: n):y 1. /im/xfer/LTT_HP_E2400-160_590c.frm 2. /im/xfer/LTT_HP_E2400-4G_590c.frm 3. /im/xfer/LTT_HP_E2400FC_590c.frm Enter the number of the firmware file to use: 2 Task: Beginning download operations. Task % Complete: 0 Device % Complete Errors Status ------------------ ---------- ------ -------------------100000e00202621b 0 none Waiting... 100000e00202d2b4 0 none Waiting... 100000e002030a71 0 none Waiting... Task: Downloading interface controllers. Task % Complete: 0 Device % Complete Errors ------------------ ---------- ------

Status --------------------

download interface

193

100000e00202621b 100000e00202d2b4 100000e002030a71

0 0 0

none none none

Transferring firmware to device Transferring firmware to device Transferring firmware to device

. . . Task: Downloading interface controllers. Task % Complete: 100 Device % Complete Errors ------------------ ---------- -----100000e00202621b 100 none 100000e00202d2b4 100 none 100000e002030a71 100 none

Status -------------------Complete. Complete. Complete.

See also

download drive download library download mgmt

download library
Description Downloads the image of a firmware file to the library. Firmware files can be retrieved from the Internet using HP StoreEver L&TT. Before using this command, a firmware file must have been transferred to the Interface Manager card firmware repository via FTP/SFTP. See Updating the firmware with the CLI (page 186) for more information. CAUTION: Downloading firmware forces a reboot of the library and all its devices. Ensure that no backup jobs are in progress before running this command. Syntax Availability Operands Examples download library All users and mode None To download firmware to the library:
Welcome to the Interface Manager Command Line Interface. Type 'help' at the prompt for context-sensitive help. />download lib You may enter 'q' at any time to quit. Download code to EML E-Series library? Enter 'y' or 'n' (default: n):y 1. /im/xfer/LTT_HP_EML_E-Series_1120.frm Enter the number of the firmware file to use: 1 Task: Downloading library. Task % Complete: 0 Device % Complete Errors Status ---------- ---------- ------ -------------------Library 0 none Waiting... Task: Downloading library. Task % Complete: 1.88 Device % Complete ---------- ---------Library 1.88 . . . Task: Downloading library. Task % Complete: 100 Device % Complete ---------- ---------Library 100

Errors -----none

Status -------------------Transferring image to the device.

Errors -----none

Status -------------------Complete.

See also

download drive download interface download mgmt

download mgmt
Description
194 CLI Command Reference

Downloads the image of a firmware file to the Interface Manager card.

Firmware files can be retrieved from the Internet using HP StoreEver L&TT. Before using this command, a firmware file must have been transferred to the Interface Manager card firmware repository via FTP/SFTP. See Updating the firmware with the CLI (page 186) for more information. CAUTION: Downloading firmware forces a reboot of the Interface Manager card. Ensure that no backup jobs are in progress before running this command. Syntax Availability Operands Examples download mgmt All users and mode None To download firmware to the Interface Manager card:
Welcome to the Interface Manager Command Line Interface. Type 'help' at the prompt for context-sensitive help. />download mgmt You may enter 'q' at any time to quit. Download code to INTRFC-MGR01 interface manager? Enter 'y' or 'n' 1. /im/xfer/imax_fw_I200.frm Enter the number of the firmware file to use: 1 Task: Waiting... Task % Complete: 10 Device % Complete Errors Status ---------- ---------- ------ -------------------IM 10 none Checking firmware integrity. Task: Waiting... Task % Complete: Device ---------IM

(default: n):y

20 % Complete ---------20

Errors -----none

Status -------------------Rebooting Interface Manager

The Interface Manager is rebooting.

The CLI is closing.

See also

download drive download interface download library

map host
Description Provides a host with access to all of the current drives. CAUTION: Using this command could force a reboot of some interfaces. Ensure that no backup jobs are in progress before running this command. Syntax Availability Operands map host host_num[force] All users and mode host_num [force] Examples Specify the host number. This operand is required. An optional parameter; when force is specified, there will be no prompt asking if you really want to map the host.

To give host 1 access to all drives:

/>map host 1 Caution: Mapping hosts could force a reboot of some interfaces and will terminate all backup operations involving the rebooting interfaces. Do you really want to map the host? y Committing configuration done

See also

unmap host set host name show host name

map host 195

move media
Description Syntax Availability Operands Moves media between drives, slots, and mail slots. move media destination source All users and mode destination, source The media locations are specified using a media location type code and the logical address of the location. For instance: Examples DnDrive at logical address n MnMailslot at logical address n SnStorage slot at logical address n

To move media from storage slot 10 to drive 1:

/>move media S10 D1

To move media from drive 1 to mail slot 1:

/>move media D1 M1

To move media from mail slot 1 to storage slot 10:

/>move media M1 S10

See also

show media

reboot interface
Description Reboots one or more interfaces. After entering this command, you are prompted to input whether you are sure you want to reboot the interfaces. CAUTION: Ensure that an interface is not involved in any backup operations before rebooting it. Syntax Availability Operands reboot interface interface_num [force] All users and manual mode only interface_num Specify the interface number. All of the interfaces may be rebooted by specifying all for this operand. This operand is required. Specify force to skip the prompt asking if you are sure you want to reboot the interface(s). This operand is optional.

[force]

Examples

To reboot interface 1:
/>reboot interface 1 Caution: Rebooting interfaces could take up to XX seconds and will terminate all backup operations involving the rebooting interfaces. Do you really want to reboot the interface(s) (y/n)? y Rebooting interfaces..done

To reboot all interfaces, skipping the reboot prompt:

/>reboot interface all force Rebooting interfaces..done

See also

reboot library reboot mgmt

196

CLI Command Reference

reboot library
Description Reboots the library. After executing this command, the CLI session is lost and must be reestablished. CAUTION: To avoid loss of data, ensure that all backup jobs have completed before executing this command. Syntax Availability Operands Examples reboot library [force] All users and manual mode only [force] Specify force to skip the prompt asking if you are sure you want to reboot the Interface Manager card. This operand is optional.

To reboot the library:

/>reboot library

To reboot the library, skipping the reboot prompt:

/>reboot library force Rebooting the Interface Manager

See also

reboot interface reboot mgmt

reboot mgmt
Description Reboots the Interface Manager card. After entering this command, you are prompted to input whether you are sure you want to reboot the Interface Manager card. CAUTION: To avoid loss of data, ensure that all backup jobs have completed before executing this command. Syntax Availability Operands Examples reboot mgmt [force] All users and manual mode only [force] Specify force to skip the prompt asking if you are sure you want to reboot the Interface Manager card. This operand is optional.

To reboot the Interface Manager card:

/>reboot mgmt Caution: Rebooting the Interface Manager could take up to XX seconds, and you will have to log on again to use the CLI. Do you really want to reboot the Interface Manager (y/n)? y Rebooting the Interface Manager

To reboot the Interface Manager card, skipping the reboot prompt:

/>reboot mgmt force Rebooting the Interface Manager

See also

reboot interface reboot library

remove host
Description Step-by-step wizard that guides you through the removal of a host node. The wizard displays the hosts that are available for removal from the Interface Manager. Only hosts that are not mapped appear. remove host All users and modes None
reboot library 197

Syntax Availability Operands

Examples

/>remove host Current hosts available for removal: Caution if the SID is non-zero, the host may be logged in to one or more interface controllers. (Note: If a host is currently mapped, it will not be displayed in the following list.)

Host # -----1 2

WW Node Name -----------------1234567890abcdee 1234567890abcdef

WW Port Name -----------------1234567890abcdee 1234567890abcdef

Current Name(Alias) -------------------1234567890abcdee 1234567890abcdef

SID ------0h 0h

Enter a host number to remove or 'q' to quit:1 Do you really want to remove the host '1234567890abcdee'? Enter 'y' to continue or 'q' to quit: y Removing host. Removing host WWNN: 1234567890abcdee, WWPN: 1234567890abcdee from 100000e002034d9a, port # 0 Removing host WWNN: 1234567890abcdee, WWPN: 1234567890abcdee from 100000e002034d9a, port # 1 Activating changes on IFC: 100000e002034d9a Finished removing host

See also

show host access show interface access

replace interface
Description Step-by-step wizard that guides you through the replacement of one or more interface controllers. Retains all settings including Secure Manager settings, partitions, and WWNs and updates firmware revisions. replace interface All users and modes None
/>replace interface The Interface Controller Replacement Wizard guides you through the interface controller replacement procedure. You will be asked to confirm which Interface Controllers have been removed from the library and verify that a replacement interface controller(s) has been correctly cabled. Once the replacement Interface Controller(s) has been identified the wizard will automatically reconfigure all interface controller settings. These settings may include: - Fibre Channel Port Speed - Fibre Channel Port Mode - Secure Manager and Partitioning settings - Robotics (SIPP) Settings - WWN Information When replacing an Interface Controller it is critical that the new card is cabled identically to the one it is replacing. Carefully document the current cabling prior to removing the card. The following cards on the specified library platform may be hot swapped: - 4 Gig IFC on ESL-e For all other card/library combinations you must power off the library before replacing the controller(s). Press 'C' to continue (default), or 'Q' to quit this process >> c At this point, please take the following steps: 1. Document the cabling currently used by the Interface Controller(s) that need to be replaced. 2. If any of the cards to be replaced are not hot-swappable, please power down the library prior to swapping the cards. If the library is powered down you will need to restart this wizard after powering up the library. 3. Remove the Interface Controller(s) from the library. 4. Add the replacement Interface Controller(s) to the library. 5. Re-cable each replacement Interface Controller identically to the one replaced (WARNING) Do not connect new FRUs to hosts until this wizard has completed. Warning: You must identically re-cable the IFC or the IM will not be able to re-apply the settings. Press 'C' once the IFCs have been swapped. If you need to power down the library press 'Q' and restart this wizard after restoring power to the library. >> c Locating replacement devices in the library

Syntax Availability Operands Examples

Calling FindReplacmentIFCs

198 CLI Command Reference

Searching for replacement candidate for missing Interface Controller 1 out of 1 (100000e002025e2f) Finished searching for replacement hardware Calling GetValidReplacementIndices IFC # Missing IFC WWN Replacement IFC WWN Status ----- -------------------- -------------------- ----------------1 100000e002025e2f 100000e00202a627 Ready to configure Select 1 or more IFCs to replace, using the index in column 1. If more than one IFC is selected, separate the indices with spaces: 1 2 4. Type 'all' to reconfigure all cards with the identified replacement. Type 'R' to refresh the list (for instance, after correcting a cabling error). Type 'Q' to quit this wizard without completing the operation. >> 1 FRU replacement has begun. Initializing Activity: Initiating Restore Initializing Activity: Initiating Restore Activity: Restoration of connection settings to IFC 100000e002025e2f completed successfully; Waiting for IFC to reboot to finalize settings Initializing Activity: Initiating Restore Activity: Restoration of connection settings to IFC 100000e002025e2f completed successfully; Waiting for IFC to reboot to finalize settings Activity: Restoration of port settings to IFC 100000e002025e2f completed successfully Initializing Activity: Initiating Restore Activity: Restoration of connection settings to IFC 100000e002025e2f completed successfully; Waiting for IFC to reboot to finalize settings Activity: Restoration of port settings to IFC 100000e002025e2f completed successfully IFC Replacement operation failed - Synch failed . IFC Replacement operation failed - Synch failed. Activity: Initiating Restore Activity: Restoration of connection settings to IFC 100000e002025e2f completed successfully; Waiting for IFC to reboot to finalize settings Activity: Restoration of port settings to IFC 100000e002025e2f completed successfully FRU replacement has completed. You may now connect the FRUs that were successfully replaced to the hosts.

See also

None

restore interface defaults

Description Restores interfaces to their factory defaults. CAUTION: Using this command forces a reboot of the interface. Ensure that no backup jobs are in progress before running this command. Syntax Availability Operands restore interface defaults interface_num All users and manual mode only interface_num Specify the interface number that will be restored to factory defaults. All of the interfaces may be restored to factory defaults by specifying all for this operand. This operand is required.

Examples

To restore the factory defaults on interface 1:

/>restore interface defaults 1 Committing configuration...done The interface(s) must be rebooted before the new configuration will take effect.

To restore the factory defaults on all interfaces:

/>restore interface defaults all Committing configuration done The interfaces(s) must be rebooted before the new configuration will take effect.

See also

restore system defaults

restore interface defaults 199

restore system config

Description Restores the system configuration so that it matches the last saved configuration. The system configuration includes the Interface Manager card, interfaces, and licensed feature configuration. Before using this command, the system configuration must have been saved using the save system config command. The save system config command creates a file called IM_save_snapshot.zip, which is saved in the ftp directory of the Interface Manager card and Command View TL save current configuration action creates a file name IM_save_snapshot_<serialnumber>.zip which is saved on the server in a user picked location. With Interface Manager firmware i273 or lower the Command view TL save configuration file has to be renamed IM_save_snapshot before putting it in the ftp directory. With I274 and above the file can be both names. It also works if the CVTL file has the date inserted before the .zip. One of these configuration files must be present in the ftp directory before running the restore system config command. If the saved configuration file is not named IM_save_snapshot.zip, it must be renamed before the FTP process. After entering this command, you are prompted to input whether you are sure you want to restore the system configuration. CAUTION: This command causes reboots of all interfaces and all LTO4 and later drives, causing backup operations to terminate, so ensure that there are no backup operations in process when this command is executed. CAUTION: In I240 and above you can restore the configuration for two major revisions back. For example, I270 can restore configurations saved with I260 and I250. Saving and restoring the configuration must be done with the same version of the Interface Manager firmware for I232 and below. For example, you cannot save the configuration with Interface Manager firmware version I230, upgrade to version I231, and then restore the configuration. Syntax Availability Operands restore system config [force] All users and modes [force] Specify force to skip the prompt asking if you are sure you want to restore the system configuration to the last saved configuration. This operand is optional.

Examples

To restore the system configuration:

/>restore system config Caution: Restoring the system configuration will force a reboot of the Interface Manager, and you will have to log on again. Do you really want to restore the system configuration? Enter 'y' to continue or 'n' to skip [default='n']: y Preparing the system configuration... Restoring the system configuration...

To restore the system configuration, skipping the prompt:

/>restore system config force Committing configuration done Rebooting interfaces..done

See also

save system config

NOTE: Back up the system after any change to the physical configuration of the library. A successful restore will not occur if the configuration file contains references to a physical configuration that no longer exists.
200 CLI Command Reference

restore system defaults

Description Restores the factory defaults of the Interface Manager card and all connected interface controllers. When restoring the factory defaults, the following Interface Manager card settings may be optionally retained: Network settings (IP address, subnet, and gateway). HP recommends retaining the network settings if they are already working properly. Management station settings Trace and event logs SNMP settings Encryption settings

CAUTION: Using this command forces a reboot of the Interface Manager card and all connected interface controllers. Ensure that no backup jobs are in progress before running this command. NOTE: The host mapping configuration data of each interface controller is synchronously stored on both the interface controller and on the Interface Manager card. When either the interface controller or the Interface Manager card is reset, the Interface Manager card attempts to synchronize the host mapping configuration. If you reset an interface controller, the Interface Manager card restores the mapping configuration to the controller when the controller reboots. If you reset the Interface Manager card, the Interface Manager card retrieves the mapping configuration of all connected interface controllers after it reboots. However, because this command resets all devices, the mapping configuration is lost and you will have to reconfigure mapping. Syntax Availability Operands restore system defaults [force] [imnet] [mgmt] [logs] [snmp] [imkma] All users and modes [force] [imnet] [mgmt] [logs] [snmp] [imkma] Examples Specify force to skip the prompt asking if you are sure you want to reboot the Interface Manager card. This operand is optional. Retains the Interface Manager card network settings (IP address, subnet, and gateway). This operand is optional. Retains management station settings. This operand is optional. Retains trace and event logs. This operand is optional. Retains SNMP settings. This operand is optional. Retains encryption settings used for LTO4 and later tape drives. This operand is optional.

To restore the factory defaults and retain network settings:

/>restore system defaults imnet Caution: Restoring the system factory defaults will force a reboot of the Interface Manager, and you will have to log on again. Do you really want to restore the system factory defaults? Enter 'y' to continue or 'n' to skip [default='n']: y Restoring the system factory configuration...Please log in again after the reboot.

See also

restore interface defaults

restore system defaults 201

save drive lttsupportticket

Description Generates an HP StoreEver L&TT support ticket for a tape drive. The Interface Manager card places the support ticket in an anonymous FTP directory, which can then be transferred from the Interface Manager card firmware repository via FTP/SFTP. CAUTION: Each time a support ticket is generated, it uses the same filename (supportticket.zip) and overwrites the previous support ticket. Syntax Availability Operands save drive lttsupportticket drive_num [force] All users and modes drive_num [force] Specify a drive number. Information for the selected tape drive appears in the support ticket. This operand is required. Specify force to skip the prompt asking if you are sure you want to save the support ticket for the tape drive. This operand is optional.

Examples

To generate a support ticket for the third drive in the ESL library:
/>save drive lttsupportticket 3 Generating support ticket...done You can get your support ticket by using anonymous FTP.

See also

save interface lttsupportticket save library lttsupportticket save mgmt lttsupportticket

save interface lttsupportticket

Description Generates an L&TT support ticket for a FC interface controller. The Interface Manager card places the support ticket in an anonymous FTP/SFTP directory, which can then be transferred from the Interface Manager card firmware repository via FTP/SFTP. CAUTION: Each time a support ticket is generated, it uses the same filename (supportticket.zip) and overwrites the previous support ticket. Syntax Availability Operands save interface lttsupportticket interface_num All users and modes interface_num Specify an interface number. Information for the selected FC interface controller appears in the support ticket. This operand is required.

Examples

To generate a support ticket for the interface 3:

/>save interface lttsupportticket 3 Generating support ticket done You can get your support ticket by using anonymous FTP.

See also

save drive lttsupportticket save library lttsupportticket save mgmt lttsupportticket

save library lttsupportticket

Description Generates an L&TT support ticket for a library. The Interface Manager card places the support ticket in an anonymous FTP/SFTP directory, which can then

202 CLI Command Reference

be transferred from the Interface Manager card firmware repository via FTP/SFTP. CAUTION: Each time a support ticket is generated, it uses the same filename (supportticket.zip) and overwrites the previous support ticket. Syntax Availability Operands Examples save library lttsupportticket All users and modes None To generate a support ticket for the ESL library:
/>save library lttsupportticket Generating support ticket done You can get your support ticket by using anonymous FTP.

See also

save drive lttsupportticket save interface lttsupportticket save mgmt lttsupportticket

save ltt
Description Saves the Access Control Groups (ACG) or maps and Target Port Associations (TPA) support ticket information in the acg.txt and tpa.txt files. The Interface Manager card places the files in anonymous FTP/SFTP directory (/im/xfer in the Interface Manager Flash), which can then be transferred from the Interface Manager card firmware repository via FTP/SFTP. CAUTION: Each time the ACG and TPA information is saved, it uses the same filenames (acg.txt and tpa.txt ) and overwrites the previous files. Syntax Availability Operands Examples save ltt All users and modes None To save the ACG and TPA information for the ESL library:
/>save ltt Generating files You can get your files by using anonymous FTP.

See also

save drive lttsupportticket save interface lttsupportticket save mgmt lttsupportticket

save mgmt lttsupportticket

Description Generates an L&TT support ticket for the Interface Manager card. The Interface Manager card places the support ticket in an anonymous FTP/SFTP directory, which can then be transferred from the Interface Manager card firmware repository via FTP/SFTP. CAUTION: Each time a support ticket is generated, it uses the same filename (supportticket.zip) and overwrites the previous support ticket. Syntax Availability Operands save mgmt lttsupportticket All users and modes None
save ltt 203

Examples

To generate a support ticket for the Interface Manager card:

/>save mgmt lttsupportticket Generating support ticket done You can get your support ticket by using anonymous FTP.

See also

save drive lttsupportticket save interface lttsupportticket save library lttsupportticket

save system config

Description Saves the system configuration so that it can be restored at a later time using the restore system config command. The system configuration includes the Interface Manager card, interfaces, and licensed features configuration. This command overwrites any previously saved system configuration. After entering this command, you are prompted to input whether you are sure you want save the system configuration. CAUTION: In I240 and above you can restore the configuration for two major revisions back. For example I270 can restore configurations saved with I260 and I250. Saving and restoring the configuration must be done with the same version of the Interface Manager firmware for I232 and below. For example, you cannot save the configuration with Interface Manager firmware version I230, upgrade to version I231, and then restore the configuration. NOTE: This command saves the configuration to the IM_save_snapshot.zip file in the FTP directory. Syntax Availability Operands Examples save system config [force] All users and modes [force] Specify force to skip the prompt asking if you are sure you want to save the current system configuration. This operand is optional.

To save the system configuration:

/>save system config Caution: Saving the system configuration will overwrite the last saved system configuration. Do you really want to save the system configuration (y/n)? y Saving the system configuration...done

To save the system configuration, skipping the prompt:

/>save system config force Saving the system configuration...done

See also

restore system config

NOTE: Back up the system after any change to the physical configuration of the library. A successful restore will not occur if the configuration file contains references to a physical configuration that no longer exists.

set drive hostport mode

Description Syntax Availability Sets the mode for all host ports for the drive entered or all LTO4 and later drives. set drive hostport mode [drive_num] | [all] mode [alpa] All users and manual mode only

204 CLI Command Reference

Operands

drive_num

The drive number for which to set the hostport mode. The mode may be changed for all LTO4 and later drives by specifying all for this operand. This operand is required. The mode, which can be: auto, hard, soft, or nport. When mode is hard, the alpa may be specified. This operand is required. NOTE: The alpa value cannot be 0xEF because this is equal to a loopid of 0, which is soft mode.

mode

Examples

To set the mode to soft addressing on all ports on all LTO4 and later drives:
/>set drive hostport mode all soft

To set the mode to hard addressing on all ports on all LTO4 and later drives:
/>set drive hostport mode all hard

To set the mode to hard addressing and ALPA to 0xbc on all ports on all LTO4 and later drives:
/>set drive hostport mode all hard 0xbc

To set the mode to hard addressing on all ports on drive number 1:

/>set drive hostport mode 1 hard

See also

set drive hostport speed show interface hostport alpa ALPA matrix

set drive hostport speed

Description Syntax Availability Operands Sets the speed for all host ports for the drive entered or all LTO4 and later drives. set drive hostport speed [drive_num] | [all] speed All users and manual mode only drive_num The drive number for which to set the hostport speed. The mode may be changed for all LTO4 and later drives by specifying all for this operand. This operand is required. The value associated with the speed. This operand is required. The speed may be: Examples See also 1 for 1-gigabit (LTO4 only) 2 for 2-gigabit 4 for 4-gigabit 8 for 8gigabit (LTO5 and later)

speed

To set the speed to 4-gigabit on all LTO4 and later drives:

/>set drive hostport speed all 4

set drive hostport mode

set host name

Description Gives a host HBA a name. A name is applied to a host using the number of that host as it appears when using the show host name all command. If another host already has the specified name, no changes are made because every host name must be unique. If the specified host already has a name,

set drive hostport speed 205

the new name is applied, and all resource mapping pools to which the host had been added are updated to reflect the new name. Syntax Availability Operands set host name index host_name All users and modes index host_name Specify the number of the host to be named. Specify the name of the host. The host name may contain letters, numbers, and '_' characters. The maximum length for a host name is 19 characters. This operand is required.

Examples

To set the name of host 1 to myhost1:

/>set host name 1 my_host1 Committing configuration...done

See also

show host name

set inet ftp

Description Syntax Availability Operands Examples Enables or disables the FTP/SFTP service. set inet ftp [on] | [off] Admin user and all modes on off Enables the FTP/SFTP service. Disables the FTP/SFTP service.

To disable the FTP/SFTP service:

/>set inet ftp off Committing configuration...done

See also

set inet telnet

set inet telnet

Description Enables or disables the Telnet service. NOTE: If the Telnet service is disabled, you can only re-enable it by connecting with a serial cable to the Interface Manager. Syntax Availability Operands Examples set inet telnet [on] | [off] Admin user and all modes on off Enables the Telnet service. Disables the Telnet service.

To disable the Telnet service:

/>set inet telnet off Committing configuration...done

See also

set inet ftp

set interface beacon

Description Turns the beacon on an HP StorageWorks e2400-4Gb FC interface controller on or off. Starts a wizard that prompts you for each interface controller that has a beacon. set interface beacon All users and modes None To turn on the beacon on interface controller 2:

Syntax Availability Operands Examples

206 CLI Command Reference

/>set interface beacon The following interfaces have beacon functionality: You may enter 'q' at any time to quit. Change beacon on interface 2 ? Enter 'y' or 'n' (default: n):y Enable this beacon? Enter 'y' for on, 'n' for off (default: n):y You may enter 'q' at any time to quit. Change beacon on interface 3 ? Enter 'y' or 'n' (default: n):n You may enter 'q' at any time to quit. Change beacon on interface 4 ? Enter 'y' or 'n' (default: n):n

See Also

show interface beacon

set interface clearwwnmismatch

Description Clears the World Wide Name (WWN) mismatch on an interface controller. All WWN information shown is for the node name/ID. For more information, see Managing the interface controllers (page 42). set interface clearwwnmismatch interface_num All users and modes interface_num Specify the number of the interface controller. To clear the WWN mismatch on interface controller 1:
/>set interface clearwwnmismatch 1

Syntax Availability Operands Examples See also

set mgmt wwnstate show interface wwninfo

set interface hostport alpa

Description Sets the ALPA for an interface port when the addressing mode of that port is set to hard addressing. If the interface port mode is not set to hard addressing, the ALPA is saved and used when the addressing mode is changed to hard addressing. set interface hostport alpa interface_num port_num address All users and manual mode only interface_num Specify the number of the interface. The ALPA may be changed for all interfaces by specifying all for this operand. This operand is required. Specify the number of the port. The ALPA may be changed for all ports by specifying all for this operand. This operand is required. Specify the ALPA for the interface port. The ALPA may be either in hex notation or base 10. The hex notation must include the leading 0x, and letter digits may be in upper or lower case. For example, to set the ALPA to 31, this operand could be either 0x1F or 0x1f in hex notation or 31 in base 10. This operand is required.

Syntax Availability Operands

port_num

address

Examples

To set the ALPA on port 1 of interface 1 to 15:

/>set interface hostport alpa 1 1 15 Committing configuration...done

See also

show interface hostport alpa ALPA matrix

set interface clearwwnmismatch 207

set interface hostport connection

Description Sets the connection type for one or more interfaces. The connections are either fabric or direct connect. CAUTION: Using this command forces a reboot of all interfaces. Ensure that no backup jobs are in progress before running this command. Syntax Availability Operands Examples set interface hostport connection [fabric] | [direct] All users and automatic mode only [fabric] | [direct] Specify the connection type as fabric or direct. This operand is required.

To set the connection type of all interfaces to fabric:

/>set interface hostport connection fabric Committing configuration...done The interface(s) must be rebooted for this command to take effect.

See also

show interface hostport connection

set interface hostport mode

Description Sets the port mode for one or more interfaces. If the interface port mode is set to hard addressing, the interface is given a default ALPA of 0xef (31 decimal). Use the set interface hostport alpa command to change the ALPA for that interface. set interface hostport mode [interface_num] | [all] [port_num] | [all] [hard] | [soft] | [nport] All users and manual mode only interface_num Specify the number of the interface. The mode may be changed for all interfaces by specifying all for this operand. This operand is required. Specify the number of the port. The mode may be changed for all ports by specifying all for this operand. This operand is required. Specify the port mode for the interface(s). This operand may be either hard for hard addressing, soft for soft addressing, or nport for fabric addressing. This operand is required.

Syntax Availability Operands

port_num

[hard] | [soft] | [nport]

Examples

To set the port mode of ports on all interfaces to soft addressing:

/>set interface hostport mode all all soft Committing configuration...done The interface(s) must be rebooted for this command to take effect.

See also

show interface hostport mode show interface hostport alpa set interface hostport alpa

set interface hostport speed

Description Sets the port speed for one or more interfaces. The available port speeds are 1, 2, or 4 Gbps. Only the HP StorageWorks e2400-4Gb FC interface controller

208 CLI Command Reference

can run at 4 Gbps. In Automatic mode, changing the interface hostport speed applies to all ports on all interfaces. CAUTION: Using this command in Automatic mode forces a reboot of all interfaces. Ensure that no backup jobs are in progress before running this command. Syntax Availability Operands set interface hostport speed [interface_num] | [all] [port_num] | [all] [1] | [2] | [4] All users and modes interface_num Specify the number of the interface. The speed may be changed for all interfaces by specifying all for this operand. This operand is required only in manual mode. Specify the number of the port. The speed may be changed for all ports by specifying all for this operand. This operand is required only in manual mode. Specify 1, 2, or 4 Gbps port speed. This operand is required.

port_num

[1] | [2] | [4] Examples

To set the port speed of all ports on all interfaces to 2 Gbps (this example assumes that you are using manual mode):
/>set interface hostport speed all all 2 Committing configuration...done The interface(s) must be rebooted for this command to take effect.

See also

show interface hostport speed

set mgmt clock

Description Syntax Availability Operands Sets the date and time on the Interface Manager card. set mgmt clock time All users and modes time Specify the date and time as a string in the format: mmddhhmmyy where: mm is the month, valid values are 01-12 dd is the date, valid values are 01-31 hh is the hour, valid values are 00-23 mm is minutes, valid values are 00-59 yy is the year, valid values are 00-37

This operand is required. Examples To change the current date and time on the Interface Manager card to February 27, 2001 12:30:00:
/>set mgmt clock 0227123001 Committing configuration...done.

See also

show mgmt clock

set mgmt clock 209

set mgmt ntp

Description Starts or stops clock synchronization via NTP or checks connectivity with NTP servers. If starting NTP or checking connectivity, provide one to three NTP servers. set mgmt ntp [[check ntp-servers] | [start ntp-servers]stop] All users and modes ntp-servers The IP address or name of one to three NTP servers separated by spaces. For example:
192.0.2.12 192.0.2.20 ntp.example.com

Syntax Availability Operands

Examples

To check the connectivity of three potential NTP servers:

/> set mgmt ntp check 192.0.2.12 ntp.example.com bogus.example.com Checking Checking Checking Checking for for for for connectivity with NTP server(s). NTP server at: 192.0.2.12 NTP server at: ntp.example.com NTP server at: bogus.example.com NTP Responds -----------TRUE TRUE FALSE

Server Name ------------------192.0.2.12 ntp.example.com bogus.example.com

To start NTP with two NTP servers:

/> set mgmt ntp start 192.0.2.12 ntp.example.com Beginning Start NTP Operation Configuring Starting NTP Synchronizing with NTP servers Exiting Start NTP Operation

To stop NTP:
/> set mgmt ntp stop Beginning Stop NTP Operation NTP successfully stopped.

See also

show mgmt clock

set mgmt password

Description Syntax Availability Operands Examples Sets the password for the current user. After using this command, the new password must be used to log in to the CLI. set mgmt password All users and modes None To change the password to clipwd:
/> set mgmt password Changing password for user cliadmin New UNIX password: clipwd BAD PASSWORD: it is based on a dictionary word Retype new UNIX password: clipwd

See also

None

set mgmt timezone

Description Syntax
210 CLI Command Reference

Sets the Interface Manager card time zone. set mgmt timezone zone

Availability Operands Examples

All users and modes zone Specify the time zone number that corresponds with the list that appears. This operand is required.

To change the Interface Manager card time zone to that for Denver, Colorado:
/>set mgmt timezone Number Timezone Number Timezone ------ --------------------------------- ---------------------------63 America/Belize 94 America/Goose_Bay 64 America/Boa_Vista 95 America/Grand_Turk 65 America/Bogota 96 America/Grenada 66 America/Boise 97 America/Guadeloupe 67 America/Buenos_Aires 98 America/Guatemala 68 America/Cambridge_Bay 99 America/Guayaquil 69 America/Cancun 100 America/Guyana 70 America/Caracas 101 America/Halifax 71 America/Catamarca 102 America/Havana 72 America/Cayenne 103 America/Hermosillo 73 America/Cayman 104 America/Indiana/Indianapolis 74 America/Chicago 105 America/Indiana/Knox 75 America/Chihuahua 106 America/Indiana/Marengo 76 America/Cordoba 107 America/Indiana/Vevay 77 America/Costa_Rica 108 America/Indianapolis 78 America/Cuiaba 109 America/Inuvik 79 America/Curacao 110 America/Iqaluit 80 America/Danmarkshavn 111 America/Jamaica 81 America/Dawson 112 America/Jujuy 82 America/Dawson_Creek 113 America/Juneau 83 America/Denver 114 America/Kentucky/Louisville 84 America/Detroit 115 America/Kentucky/Monticello 85 America/Dominica 116 America/Knox_IN 86 America/Edmonton 117 America/La_Paz 87 America/Eirunepe 118 America/Lima 88 America/El_Salvador 119 America/Los_Angeles 89 America/Ensenada 120 America/Louisville 90 America/Fort_Wayne 121 America/Maceio 91 America/Fortaleza 122 America/Managua 92 America/Glace_Bay 123 America/Manaus 93 America/Godthab 124 America/Martinique Enter the timezone number to select a timezone, 'm' to print more possible timezones or 'q' to quit without selecting a timezone [default = 'm']: 83 Committing configuration...done

See also

show mgmt timezone

set mgmt wwnstate

Description Sets the World Wide Name (WWN) retention state for the Interface Manager card. All WWN information shown is for the node name/ID. This command is deprecated. For more information, see Managing the interface controllers (page 42). NOTE: In Command View TL versions 2.0 and later and Interface Manager I200 and later the WWN retention state feature is always enabled. Syntax Availability Operands set mgmt wwnstate [enabled] | [disabled] All users and modes [enabled] | [disabled] Specify whether to enable or disable the WWN retention state. This operand is required.

Examples See also

To enable the WWN retention state of the Interface Manager card:

/>set mgmt wwnstate enabled

set interface clearwwnmismatch show interface wwninfo show mgmt wwnstate

set mgmt wwnstate

21 1

set mode
Description Sets the Interface Manager mode for the current user to Automatic or Manual. Switching from Manual to Automatic mode may cause configuration changes made while in Manual mode to be lost. set mode [auto] | [manual] All users and modes [auto] | [manual] Specify auto or manual mode as required. This operand is required.

Syntax Availability Operands Examples

To set the mode to Automatic:

/>set mode auto Changing mode...done Now entering basic setup!

See also

show mode

set net v6 dhcpv6

NOTE: To use this command, first enable IPv6 using the set net v6 ipversion command. Configures the Interface Manager card to obtain IPv6 network addresses using the DHCPv6 protocol. CAUTION: Resetting your IP version may cause your Telnet/SSH session to end. You will have to log on again. Syntax Availability Operands Examples set net v6 dhcpv6 [[on] | [off] force] All users and modes [on] [off] To set the IP version using the DHCPv6 protocol:
/>set net v6 dhcpv6 on Caution: Resetting the IP version may cause your CLI session to terminate (for a telnet/ssh user), and you may have to log on again. Do you really want to change the IP version to DHCPv6? Enter 'y' to continue or 'n' to skip [default='n']: y Operation status: Starting to change network. Operation status: Finished Updating Network Settings

Description

See also

set net v6 ipaddress set net v6 ipversion set net v6 manual set net v6 stateless show net info

set net v6 ipaddress

NOTE: To use this command, first enable IPv6 using the set net v6 ipversion command. Configures the Interface Managers public network interface by adding or removing a network address. set net v6 ipaddress [[add] | [remove] ipaddress] All users and modes [[add] | [remove] ipaddress] If you use these arguments without specifying an IP address, the system Description Syntax Availability Operands

212

CLI Command Reference

will run a wizard prompting users for the prefix of the address to add or remove. Examples To configure the Interface Managers public network interface by adding or removing a network address:
/>set net v6 ipaddress remove Remove IPv6 Address: Select Address 1) 2620:0000:0a07:e00a:0001:0002:0003:0004/64 2) 2620:0000:0a07:e00a:000a:000b:000c:000d/64 Enter a selection or 'Q' to quit [default='Q']: 2 Are you sure you wish to complete this remove operation for 2620:0000:0a07:e00a000a:000b:000c:000d? Enter 'y' to continue or 'n' to skip [default='n']: y ipAddress =2620:0000:0a07:e00a:0001:0002:0003:0004/64 Operation status: Starting to change network. Operation status: Finished Updating Network Settings

See also

set net v6 dhcpv6 set net v6 ipversion set net v6 manual set net v6 stateless show net info

set net v6 ipversion

NOTE: To use this command, first enable IPv6 using the set net v6 ipversion command. Configures the Interface Manager card to use the specified IP protocol. CAUTION: Resetting your IP version may cause your Telnet/SSH session to end. You will have to log on again. NOTE: The Interface Manager will obtain IPv6 addresses using stateless address auto-configuration when IPv6 or dual stack is selected for the IP protocol. Syntax Availability Operands set network v6 ipversion [[ip4] | [ip6] | [ dualstack] force] All users and modes [[ip4] | [ip6] | [ dualstack] force] NOTE: Examples Dualstack enables both IPv4 and IPv6 protocols. Description

To set the IP version:

/>set net v6 ipversion ipv6 Caution: Resetting the IP version may cause your CLI session to terminate (for a telnet/ssh user), and you may have to log on again. Do you really want to change the IP version to IPv6? Enter 'y' to continue or 'n' to skip [default='n']: y Operation status: Starting to change network. Operation status: Finished Updating Network Settings

See also

set net v6 dhcpv6 set net v6 ipaddress set net v6 manual set net v6 stateless
set net v6 ipversion 213

show net info

set net v6 manual

NOTE: To use this command, first enable IPv6 using the set net v6 ipversion command. Configures the Interface Manager to accept a user-provided network address for the public network interface. set net v6 manual [[on] | [off] force] NOTE: Availability Operands Examples The off argument removes all manually configured network addresses Description Syntax

All users and modes [[on] | [off] force] To configure the Interface Manager to accept a user-provided network address for the public network interface.:
/>set net v6 manual on Add IPv6 address. Select Prefix 1) 2620:0:a07:e00a:: 2) fe80:: Enter a selection or 'Q' to quit [default='Q']: 1 Enter interface identifier. xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:xxxx, a single '::' is allowed. Enter a selection or 'Q' to quit [default='Q']: a:b:c:d Caution: Changing Manual addressing may cause your CLI session to terminate(for a telnet/ssh user), and you may have to log on again. Do you really want to enable Manual addressing? Enter 'y' to continue or 'n' to skip [default='n']: y ipAddress = 2620:0000:0a07:e00a:000a:000b:000c:000d/64 Operation status: Starting to change network. Operation status: Finished Updating Network Settings

See also

set net v6 dhcpv6 set net v6 ipaddress set net v6 ipversion set net v6 stateless show net info

set net v6 stateless

NOTE: To use this command, first enable IPv6 using the set net v6 ipversion command. Configures the Interface Manager card to obtain IPv6 network addresses using stateless address auto-configuration. CAUTION: Changing stateless address auto-configuration may cause your Telnet/SSH session to end. You will have to log on again. Syntax Availability Operands Examples set net v6 stateless [[on] | [off] force] All users and modes [[on] | [off] force] Force is optional and overrides any validation processes. Description

To configure the Interface Manager to obtain IPv6 network addresses using stateless address auto-configuration:
/>set net v6 stateless on Caution: Changing Stateless address auto-configuration may cause

214

CLI Command Reference

your CLI session to terminate (for a telnet/ssh user), and you may have to log on again. Do you really want to enable Stateless address autoconfiguration? Enter 'y' to continue or 'n' to skip [default='n']: y Operation status: Starting to change network. Operation status: Finished Updating Network Settings

See also

set net v6 dhcpv6 set net v6 ipaddress set net v6 ipversion set net v6 manual show net info

set network config

Description Permanently sets the IM network configuration to that of an EML or ESL. This command is necessary when a new IM is embedded in an EML library, when default configs were just set on the IM, or an IM compact Flash FRU was just installed in the IM board and the IM cant be given a dhcp address over the public LAN. It can also be seen in an ESL E-Series library if the IM board was never connected to the back plane which supplies the DHCP address. set network config [[eml] | [esl]] Service-level user in firmware version i232 and under, and users and modes in firmware version i240 or over [eml] [esl] These specify the library type in which the card is being incorporated. Examples
set network config eml

Syntax Availability Operands

NOTE: Some new HP StorageWorks Interface Manager flashes are set to January 1, 1980, which will prevent the six-month service password from working. If this is the case, set the date in the HP StorageWorks Interface Manager in the board bios menu. After the date is set, the six-month service password will work. See Support Communication Engineering Advisory ID c01587907 for more information. To set the date from the bios menu: 1. 2. 3. 4. Use a serial cable to connect to the console. Log in as admin using the password admin or cliadmin using the password clipwd. Press the reset button on the HP StorageWorks Interface Manager. As soon as any characters appear on the console, press Ctrl+C multiple times to access the board bios menu. NOTE: If the Linux version appears, the Ctrl+C command was entered too late and the bios menu was not accessed. Reset the board and try again. 5. From the bios menu, use the arrow keys and the Tab key to select Basic CMOS Configuration. The selection character on the bios screen is >. A menu appears with the present date. The date refreshes as the seconds are counted. 6. 7. 8. Use the Tab and arrow keys to position the selection character in the Date row (middle column of the screen) in front of the month, day, and year. Use the + and keys to change the month, day, and year to the correct values. These values are set but not saved. Use the Tab and arrow keys to position the selection character in the Time row, in front of the hours, minutes, and seconds.
set network config 215

9.

Use the + and keys to change the hours, minutes, and seconds to the correct values. These values are set but not saved.

10. Press Esc to return to the main menu. 1 1. At the Save Changes and Exit? prompt, enter Y. The date and time is now saved. The HP StorageWorks Interface Manager reboots. The six-month HP service password works.

set network dhcp

Description Enables or disables DHCP mode to set the Interface Manager card IP address. If DHCP is disabled, the Interface Manager card IP address, gateway address, and subnet mask must be set using set network ipaddress before the Interface Manager card CLI can be accessed via Telnet/SSH. set network dhcp All users and modes None To enable using DHCP to set the IP address of the Interface Manager card:
/>set network dhcp Committing configuration...done

Syntax Availability Operands Examples

See also

show network dhcp set network ipaddress show network ipaddress

set network ipaddress

Description Syntax Availability Operands Sets the IP address, subnet mask, and gateway address for the Interface Manager card. This command automatically disables DHCP mode. set network ipaddress ip subnet gateway All users and modes ip subnet gateway Examples Specify the IP address that the Interface Manager card should use. This operand is required. Specify the subnet mask that the Interface Manager card should use. This operand is required. Specify the gateway address that the Interface Manager card should use. This operand is required.

To immediately change the IP address to 207.46.249.190, change the subnet mask to 255.255.248.0, and change the current gateway address to 207.46.249.0:
/>set network ipaddress 207.46.249.190 255.255.248.0 207.46.249.0 Committing configuration...done Closing telnet/ssh session.

See also

show network dhcp set network dhcp show network ipaddress

set network snmpcommunity

Description Sets the appropriate Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP) community string. SNMP is a well-defined standard of reporting device information through

216

CLI Command Reference

a network. The Interface Manager card has a built-in SNMP agent that supports queries to MIB-II in addition to SNMP traps/alerts. Syntax Availability Operands set network snmpcommunity [read] | [write] | [read6] | [write6] string All users and modes [read] | [write] | [read6] Specify whether this command will define the read or write community | [write6] string. Read and Write will set the strings for IPV4. Read6 and Write6 will set the strings for IPV6. string Specify the plain-text community string or password required by SNMP clients to read or write SNMP MIB values. This operand is required.

Examples

To set the SNMP write community string to mycommunity:

/>set network snmpcommunity write mycommunity

To set the SNMP read community string to public:

/>set network snmpcommunity read public

See also

show network snmpcommunity

set network snmptrap

Description Syntax Availability Operands Creates a SNMP trap. SNMP traps allow the Interface Manager to send asynchronous notifications of internal events. set network snmptrap [[add]] | [[remove]]ip_add trap_string severity snmp_ver mib_type All users and modes [add] | [remove] Specifies whether this operation will add a new trap destination or remove an existing one. ip_addr specifies the IP address of the trap receiver.

ip_addr

Specifies the IP address of the trap receiver. Specifies the string that will be sent by the Interface Module. Check the application that will be receiving the traps to determine what this string should be. severity specifies the level of event that will generate the trap. It is a combination of one or more of the letters 'c', 'w', and 'i'; the letters correspond to severity levels of Critical, Warning, and Informational.

trap_string

snmp_ver

Specifies the version of SNMP being used. It can be 1 or 2. Set this to 1 unless the network environment requires 2. mib_type Specifies the type of SNMP MIB. It can be semi or isee. Set this to semi unless the network environment requires isee. Specifies the type of SNMP MIB. It can be semi or isee. Set this to semi unless the network environment requires isee.

mib_type

NOTE: When removing a trap destination, only the IP address needs to be specified. Examples set network snmptrap add 10.0.0.10 public cwi 1 semi set network snmptrap remove 10.0.0.50

set network snmptrap

217

See also

show network snmpcommunity

set ssh hostkeys

Description Syntax Availability Operands Examples Creates the SSH hostkeys for the Interface Manager. This command also makes a copy of the public host keys available in the ftp public directory. set ssh hostkeys All users and modes None /set/ssh>help hostkeys

set supportticket disable

Description Syntax Availability Turns off proactive generation of the support tickets for the tape drives. Support ticket generation will take longer. See Generating a support ticket (page 172). set supportticket disable All users and modes NOTE: In version i273 and lower you must reboot the Interface Manager card for this configuration to take affect. Operands Examples None To disable proactive drive support ticket generation:
/>set supportticket disable done.

See also

set supportticket enable show supportticket cache show supportticket policy show supportticket statistics

set supportticket enable

Description Syntax Availability Turns on proactive generation of the support tickets and proactive log retrieval for LTO tape drives on some ETLAs. set supportticket enable All users and modes NOTE: This feature can be enabled only on ETLAs that have an HP StorageWorks Interface Manager card with 256 Mb of DDR RAM (309522-001) or a card with 1 GB of DDR RAM. In version i273 and lower you must reboot the Interface Manager card for this configuration to take affect. Operands Examples None To enable proactive drive support ticket generation:
/>set supportticket enable done.

See also

set supportticket disable show supportticket cache show supportticket policy

218

CLI Command Reference

show supportticket statistics

set system contact assetnumber

Description Syntax Availability Operands Sets the system asset number. set system contact assetnumber ID All users and modes ID Specify the system asset number. The system asset number must only be composed of letters and numbers. Its maximum length is 63 characters. This operand is required.

Examples

To set the system asset number to 123456ABCD:

/>set system contact assetnumber 123456ABCD Committing configuration...done

See also

show system contact assetnumber

set system contact email

Description Syntax Availability Operands Sets the system contact e-mail address. set system contact email address All users and modes address Specify the system contact e-mail address. The e-mail address must conform to the e-mail address format specified in RFC 821. This operand is required.

Examples

To set the system contact e-mail address to myname@myorg.com:

/>set system contact email myname@myorg.com Committing configuration...done

See also

show system contact email show system contact name

set system contact location

Description Syntax Availability Operands Sets the system location. set system contact location location All users and modes location Specify the system location. The system location must only be composed of letters, and numbers. Its maximum length is 63 characters. This operand is required.

Examples

To set the system location to my_system_location:

/>set system contact location my_system_location Committing configuration...done

See also

show system contact location

set system contact name

Description Syntax Availability Operands Sets the system contact name. set system contact name new_name All users and modes new_name Specify the system contact name. The system contact name must only be composed of letters, numbers, and the '_' character. Its maximum length is 19 characters. This operand is required.
set system contact assetnumber 219

Examples

To set the system contact name to myfirstname_mylastname:

/>set system contact name myfirstname_mylastname Committing configuration...done

See also

show system contact name show system contact email

set system contact pager

Description Syntax Availability Operands Sets the system contact pager number. set system contact pager number All users and modes number Specify the system contact pager number. The system contact pager number can include alphanumeric characters, dashes, periods, or the _ character. This operand is required.

Examples

To set the system contact pager number to 444-444-4444:

/>set system contact pager 444-444-4444 Committing configuration...done

See also

show system contact phone show system contact email

set system contact phone

Description Syntax Availability Operands Sets the system contact phone number. set system contact phone number All users and modes number Specify the system contact phone number. The system contact phone number can include alphanumeric characters, dashes, periods, or the _ character. This operand is required.

Examples

To set the system contact phone number to 444-444-4444:

/>set system contact phone 444-444-4444 Committing configuration...done

See also

show system contact phone show system contact pager

set system name

Description Syntax Availability Operands Sets the system name. set system name system_name All users and modes system_name Specify the name of the tape library. The tape library name can contain letters, numbers, and '_' characters. The maximum length for a tape library name is 19 characters This operand is required.

Examples

To set the system name to my_system:

/>set system name my_system Committing configuration...done

See also

show system name

220 CLI Command Reference

show drive access

Description Shows which hosts have access to one or more tape drives. For each tape drive, a list of hosts appears. For each host, the target LUN that gives the host access to the drive is shown. show drive access [drive_num] | [all] All users and modes drive_num Specify the tape drive for which to display access information. The access information may be displayed for all tape drives by specifying all for this operand. This operand is required.

Syntax Availability Operands

Examples

To show tape drive access information for drive 1:

/>show drive access 1 Access information for drive 1: Host Host Name WW Node Name 1 myhost1 FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF LUN 1 Port 1

See also

show drive info show drive interface show drive productid show drive revision show drive serialnumber show drive status show drive type map host unmap host

show drive hostport

Description Syntax Availability Operands Shows hostport settings for one or more tape drives. show drive hostport [drive_num] | [all] [port_num] | [all] All users and modes drive_num Specify the tape drive for which to display the hostport settings. The interface information may be displayed for all tape drives by specifying all for this operand. This operand is required. Specify the port on the specified tape drive for which to display the hostport settings. The interface information may be displayed for all ports on the tape drive by specifying all for this operand. This operand is required.

port_num

Examples

To show interface information for port 2 on drive 1:

/>show drive hostport 1 2 1 Drive port settings: Drive # WW Port Name ------- ----------------------2 50.01.04.F0.00.79.F5.B4 Config Mode -------N-Port Actual Mode -------Fabric Config Speed -----4 Bps Actual Speed -----0 Bps Config ALPA -----EF Actual ALPA -----EF

See also

show drive access show drive info show drive interface show drive productid show drive revision show drive serialnumber show drive status
show drive access 221

show drive type show interface info

show drive info

Description Syntax Availability Operands Shows all information pertaining to one or more tape drives. This information includes the tape drive status. show drive info [drive_num] | [all] All users and modes drive_num Specify a tape drive that will have its information appear. The information may be displayed for all tape drives by specifying all for this operand. This operand is required.

Examples

To show all information for all tape drives:

/>show drive info all Tape Drive status: Drive Number Name ------------ -------------------Drive 1 drive 1 Drive 2 drive 2 Status -------Green Green

******************************************************** Access information for drive 1: Host Host Name WW Node Name LUN Port -------- ---------------------- -------------------- --- --none none none N/A N/A Access information for drive 2: Host Host Name -------- ---------------------none none

WW Node Name -------------------none

LUN Port --- --N/A N/A

******************************************************** Tape drive interface information: Drive Number Interface Card Name Interface WW Node Name ------------- -------------------- -------------------Drive 1 100000e00202733b 100000e00202733b Drive 2 100000e00202733b 100000e00202733b ******************************************************** Tape drive product ID: Drive Number Serial Number Name Product ID ------------ -------------------- --------------- ---------------Drive 1 HU72M09609 drive 1 Ultrium 1-SCSI Drive 2 HU72M09608 drive 2 Ultrium 1-SCSI ******************************************************** Tape Drive firmware revision: Drive Number Name Revision ------------ -------------------- -------Drive 1 drive 1 E33W Drive 2 drive 2 E33W

See also

show drive access show drive interface show drive productid show drive revision show drive serialnumber show drive status show drive type

show drive interface

Description Syntax Availability Shows interface information pertaining to one or more tape drives. show drive interface [drive_num] | [all] All users and modes

222 CLI Command Reference

Operands

drive_num

Specify the tape drive for which to display interface information. The interface information may be displayed for all tape drives by specifying all for this operand. This operand is required.

Examples

To show interface information for drive 1:

/>show drive interface 1 Tape drive interface information: Drive Number Interface Name FC LUN Bus ---------------- ---------------- ------ --Drive 1 myintfc1 1 0

See also

show drive access show drive info show drive productid show drive revision show drive serialnumber show drive status show drive type show interface info

show drive productid

Description Syntax Availability Operands Shows the product ID of one or more tape drives. show drive productid [drive_num] | [all] All users and modes drive_num Specify a tape drive for which to display the product ID. The tape drive product ID may be displayed for all tape drives by specifying all for this operand. This operand is required.

Examples

To show the product ID for all tape drives:

/>show drive productid all Tape drive product ID: Drive Number Product ID ---------------- ---------------Drive 1 Ultrium 1-SCSI

See also

show drive access show drive info show drive interface show drive revision show drive serialnumber show drive status show drive type show interface info

show drive revision

Description Syntax Availability Operands Shows the firmware revision of one or more tape drives. show drive revision [drive_num] | [all] All users and modes drive_num Specify a tape drive for which to display the firmware revision. The tape drive firmware revision may be displayed for all tape

show drive productid 223

drives by specifying all for this operand. This operand is required. Examples To show the firmware revision for all tape drives:
/>show drive revision all Tape drive firmware revision: Drive Number Firmware Revision ---------------- ----------------Drive 1 AEFF Drive 2 AEFF

See also

show drive access show drive info show drive interface show drive productid show drive serialnumber show drive status show drive type show interface info

show drive serialnumber

Description Syntax Availability Operands Shows the serial number of one or more tape drives. show drive serialnumber [drive_num] | [all] All users and modes drive_num Specify a tape drive for which to display the serial number. The tape drive serial number may be displayed for all tape drives by specifying all for this operand. This operand is required.

Examples

To show the serial number for all tape drives:

/>show drive serialnumber all Tape drive serial number: Drive Number Serial Number ---------------- ---------------Drive 1 222222222222 Drive 2 333333333333

See also

show drive access show drive info show drive interface show drive productid show drive revision show drive status show drive type show interface info

show drive status

Description Syntax Availability Shows the status of one or more tape drives. show drive status [drive_num] | [all] All users and modes

224 CLI Command Reference

Operands

drive_num

Specify a tape drive for which to display the status. The tape drive status may be displayed for all tape drives by specifying all for this operand. This operand is required.

Examples

To show the status for all tape drives:

/>show drive status all Tape Drive status: Drive Number -----------Drive 1 Drive 2 serialNumber -------------HU72M09167 HU72M09172 Status -------Green Yellow Is Available --------No Yes Firmware Mismatch --------No Yes Has Errors -------No Yes*

*Use the command 'show drive status' with a specific drive number to see specific errors for this device.

See also

show drive access show drive info show drive interface show drive productid show drive revision show drive serialnumber show drive type show interface info

show drive type

Description Syntax Availability Operands Shows the tape drive type for one or more tape drives. show drive type [drive_num] | [all] All users and modes drive_num Specify a tape drive for which to display the type. The type may be displayed for all tape drives by specifying all for this operand. This operand is required.

Examples

To show the tape drive type for all tape drives:

/>show drive type all Tape drive type: Drive Number type ---------------- ---------------Drive 1 Ultrium 1-SCSI Drive 2 Ultrium 1-SCSI

See also

show drive access show drive info show drive interface show drive productid show drive revision show drive serialnumber show drive status show interface info

show firmware available

Description Syntax Availability Operands Shows the firmware files and revisions available to be downloaded to devices. show firmware available All users and modes None
show drive type 225

Examples

To show the available firmware files and revisions:

/>show firmware available Firmware Revision VendorId ----------------- ----------i100 HP 1.05 HP E36R HP ProductID ----------INTRFC-MGR01 NS E2400-160 Ultrium 1-SCSI

See also

show firmware revisions

show firmware revisions

Description Syntax Availability Operands Examples Shows the current firmware revisions installed in the Interface Manager card and FC interface controllers. show firmware revisions All users and modes None To show the current firmware revisions:
/>show firmware revisions Current Firmware Revisions Overall firmware revision: 2.00.0 Interface manager firmware revision: 1.01 Tape library firmware revision: 3.456 Tape drive firmware revision: Drive Number Firmware Revision ---------------- ----------------Drive 1 AEFF Drive 2 AEFF Drive 3 AEFF Drive 4 AEFF Drive 5 AEFF Drive 6 AEFF Drive 7 AEFF Drive 8 AEFF Interface firmware revision: Interface Number Firmware Revision ---------------- ----------------1 2.02 2 2.02 3 2.02 4 2.02

See also

show firmware available

show host access

Description Syntax Availability Operands Examples Shows which tape drives all hosts have access to. For each tape drive, the LUN to which the host or hosts have access is displayed. show host access All users and modes None To show host access information for the hosts:
/>show host access Access information Device Port --------- ---Library 0 Drive 1 0 Drive 2 0 Drive 3 1 Drive 4 1 for host 1 (WWNN: LUN Partition --- --------0 Partition 1 0 Partition 1, 1 Partition 1, 0 Partition 1, 1 Partition 1, 1111111111111111) :

Drive Drive Drive Drive

1 2 3 4

See also

show host info show interface access

226 CLI Command Reference

show host info

Description Syntax Availability Operands Examples Shows the name, node WWN, port WWN, and mapped status of all hosts. show host info All users and modes None To show information for all hosts:
/>show host info Host name information: Host # Node WWN Port WWN Current Name ------ ---------------- ---------------- ---------------1 11111111111111CC 11111111111111DD myhost1 2 22222222222222CC 22222222222222DD myhost2

Mapped -------yes no

See also

show host name show interface info

show host name

Description Syntax Availability Operands Examples Shows the name, node WWN, port WWN, and mapped status of all hosts. show host name All users and modes None To show host names, world wide names, and mapped statuses for all hosts:
/>show host name Host name information: Host # Node WWN Port WWN Current Name ------ ---------------- ---------------- ---------------1 11111111111111CC 11111111111111DD myhost1 2 22222222222222CC 22222222222222DD myhost2 Mapped -------yes no

See also

set host name

show host sparselunmap

Description Syntax Availability Operands Examples Shows hosts that might have sparse LUNs. show host sparselunmap All users and modes None The following example shows when one or more sparse LUN maps have been found:
/>show host sparselunmap Beginning to search. Searching for sparse LUN maps on: ifcmap-2569_1681692777 Detected 1 or more sparse LUN maps Finished searching for sparse LUN maps. The following host(s) are Host # WW Node Name ------ ---------------1 1234567890abcdef associated with device map(s) containing LUN holes. WW Port Name Current Name(Alias) SID ---------------- -------------------- ------1234567890abcdef test 0h

See also

None.

show inet
Description Syntax Availability Shows whether ftp, telnet, and rlogin services are enabled or disabled. show inet [ftp] | [telnet] | [rlogin] | [all] All users and modes for ftp and telnet. Only displays rlogin information for service-level user.
show host info 227

Operands

ftp telnet tlogin all

Displays whether the ftp service is enabled or disabled. Displays whether the telnet service is enabled or disabled. Displays whether the rlogin service is enabled or disabled. Displays whether the ftp, telnet, and rlogin services are enabled or disabled.

Examples

To show whether the rlogin service is enabled or disabled::

/>show inet rlogin rlogin is Disabled

To show whether ftp, telnet, and rlogin are enabled or disabled::

/>show ftp is telnet rlogin inet all Enabled is Enabled is Disabled

See also

set inet ftp set inet telnet

show interface access

Description Shows access information at the interface level. This command lists all tape drives connected to the specified interface. For each tape drive listed, the command shows which hosts have access to it, and the target LUN giving the host access to the drive. show interface access [interface_num] | [all] All users and modes interface_num Specify the interface for which to display access information. The access information may be displayed for all interfaces by specifying all for this operand. This operand is required.

Syntax Availability Operands

Examples

To show interface access information for interface 1:

/>show interface access 1 Interface access information: Interface 1 tape drives: Access information for drive 1: Host Host Name -------- ---------------------1 myhost1

WW Node Name -------------------FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF

LUN Port ---1 1

See also

show drive access

show interface beacon

Description Syntax Availability Operands For HP StorageWorks e2400-4Gb FC interface controllers, shows whether the beacon is currently on or off. show interface beacon [interface_num] | [all] All users and modes interface_num Specify the interface for which you want to show the beacon state. The beacon state may be displayed for all interfaces that have beacons by specifying all for this operand. This operand is required.

Examples

To show the state of the beacon on interface 3:

/>show interface beacon 3 Interface 3 beacon: Off

To show the state of the beacons on all interfaces:

/>show interface beacon all

228 CLI Command Reference

Beacon-supported Interfaces ---------------------------Interface 2 beacon: Off Interface 3 beacon: Off Interface 4 beacon: Off

See Also

set interface beacon

show interface hostport alpa

Description Shows the ALPA of one or more interfaces. This command also indicates whether the interfaces currently have their port mode set to hard addressing or are using the ALPAs. show interface hostport alpa [interface_num] | [all] [port_num] | [all] All users and modes interface_num Specify an interface number. The ALPA may be displayed for all interfaces by specifying all for this operand. This operand is required. Specify a port number. The ALPA may be displayed for all ports by specifying all for this operand. This operand is required.

Syntax Availability Operands

port_num

Examples

To show the ALPAs for all interfaces:

/>show interface hostport alpa all all Interface ALPAs (* indicates ALPA is not set): Interface Card WW Port Name ALPA Port Mode ---------------- ----------------- ---- --------1 hostport1 FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF 0x71 hard hostport2 AAAAAAAAAAAAAAAA 0x96 hard

See also

set interface hostport alpa ALPA matrix

show interface hostport connection

Description Syntax Availability Operands Shows the connection type for one or more interfaces. show interface hostport alpa [interface_num] | [all] [port_num] | [all] All users and modes interface_num Specify an interface number. The connection type may be displayed for all interfaces by specifying all for this operand. This operand is required. Specify a port number. The connection type may be displayed for all ports by specifying all for this operand. This operand is required.

port_num

Examples

To show the connection type for all interfaces:

/>show interface hostport connection all all Interface connection type: Interface Card WW Port Name Connection Type ---------------- ---------------- --------------1 hostport1 FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF fabric hostport2 AAAAAAAAAAAAAAAA fabric

See also

set interface hostport connection

show interface hostport mode

Description Shows the port modes of one or more interfaces.
show interface hostport alpa 229

Syntax Availability Operands

show interface hostport mode [interface_num] | [all] [port_num] | [all] All users and modes interface_num Specify an interface number. The mode may be displayed for all interfaces by specifying all for this operand. This operand is required. Specify a port number. The mode may be displayed for all ports by specifying all for this operand. This operand is required.
all Connection type -------------N-Port N-Port

port_num

Examples

To show the port modes for all interfaces:

/>show interface hostport mode all Interface port mode: Interface Card WW Port Num ---------------- ----------------1 hostport1 FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF hostport2 AAAAAAAAAAAAAAAA

See also

set interface hostport mode

show interface hostport sid

Description Syntax Availability Operands Shows the source identifier for the port entered or all ports. show interface hostport sid [ interface_num | [all]] [ port_number | [all]] All users and manual mode interface_num Specify the number of the interface. The value may be changed for all interfaces by specifying all for this operand. This operand is required. Specify the number of the port. The value may be changed for all ports by specifying all for this operand. This operand is required.

port_number

Examples

To show the port speeds for interface 1:

/>show interface hostport sid all all Interface fibre-Channel port settings: Interface Card WW Port Name ----------------- -------------------Interface Card 1 100000e00222a7a0 Interface Card 1 100000e00242a7a0 Port # -----0 1 SID ----------0x0 0x11b00

See also

show interface access show interface info show interface status

show interface hostport speed

Description Syntax Availability Operands Shows the port speeds of one or more interfaces. show interface hostport speed interface_num port_num All users and manual mode interface_num Specify the number of the interface. The value may be changed for all interfaces by specifying all for this operand. This operand is required. Specify the number of the port. The value may be changed for all ports by specifying all for this operand. This operand is required.

port_num

230 CLI Command Reference

Examples

To show the port speeds for interface 1:

/>show interface hostport speed 1 all Interface port speed: Interface Card WW Port Num Speed ---------------- ----------------- ----1 hostport1 FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF 2 Gbpsec hostport2 AAAAAAAAAAAAAAAA 2 Gbpsec

See also

set interface hostport speed

show interface info

Description Syntax Availability Operands Shows all information pertaining to one or more interfaces. show interface info [interface_num] | [all] All users and modes interface_num Specify an interface number. The information may be displayed for all interfaces by specifying all for this operand. This operand is required.

Examples

To show all information for all interfaces:

/>show interface info all Interface information: Interface status: Interface Name Status ---------------- ---------------myintfc1 Good myintfc2 Downloading *************************************************************** Interface access information: Interface myintfc1 tape drives: Tape Drive ---------------mydrive1 mydrive2 Tape drive access information: mydrive1 Host Name Drive LUN Pool ---------------- ---------- ---------------myhost1 1 mypool1 myhost2 1 mypool1 myhost3 2 mypool3 mydrive2 Host Name ---------------myhost1 myhost2 myhost3

Drive LUN ---------2 2 4

Pool ---------------mypool1 mypool1 mypool3

+++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ Interface myintfc2 tape drives: Tape Drive ---------------mydrive3 mydrive4 Tape drive access information: mydrive3 Host Name Drive LUN Pool ---------------- ---------- ---------------myhost1 3 mypool1 myhost2 3 mypool1 myhost3 1 mypool3 mydrive4 Host Name ---------------myhost1 myhost2 myhost3

Drive LUN ---------4 4 3

Pool ---------------mypool1 mypool1 mypool3

*************************************************************** Interface ALPAs (* indicates ALPA is not set): Interface Name ALPA Port Mode ---------------- ---- --------myintfc1 * nport myintfc2 0x23 hard *************************************************************** Interface time and date: (Only displayed for service user or manual mode)

show interface info

231

Interface Name ---------------myintfc1 myintfc2

Date ---------12/14/2002 12/14/2002

Time ----13:02 13:01

*************************************************************** Interface connection type: Interface Name Connection Type ---------------- --------------myintfc1 fabric myintfc2 fabric *************************************************************** Interface event mask: (Only displayed for service user) Interface Name Event Mask ---------------- --------------myintfc1 0xFF myintfc2 0x01 *************************************************************** Interface Fibre Channel discovery mode: (Only displayed for service user or manual mode) Interface Name Fibre Channel Discovery Mode ---------------- ---------------------------myintfc1 reboot myintfc2 reboot *************************************************************** Interface name information: Interface # Node WWN Port WWN Current Name ----------- ---------------- ---------------- ---------------1 11111111111111CC 11111111111111DD myhost1 2 22222222222222CC 22222222222222DD myhost2 *************************************************************** Interface initiator ID(s): Interface Name Initiator ID(s) ---------------- ---------------------------myintfc1 6, 7 myintfc2 7 *************************************************************** Interface port mode: Interface Name Port Mode ---------------- ---------------------------myintfc1 nport myintfc2 hard *************************************************************** Interface port speed: (Only displayed for service user or manual mode) Interface Name Port Speed ---------------- ---------------------------myintfc1 1 Gbpsec myintfc2 1 Gbpsec *************************************************************** Interface firmware revision: Interface Name Firmware revision ---------------- ----------------myintfc1 2.00 myintfc2 2.00 *************************************************************** Interface SCSI device discovery: (Only displayed for service user) Interface Name SCSI Device Discovery ---------------- --------------------myintfc1 enabled myintfc2 enabled *************************************************************** Interface SCSI device discovery delay: (Only displayed for service user) Interface Name SCSI Device Discovery Delay ---------------- --------------------------myintfc1 300 seconds myintfc2 300 seconds *************************************************************** Interface statistics gathering: (Only displayed for service user) Interface Name Statistics Gathering ---------------- --------------------myintfc1 enabled myintfc2 enabled *************************************************************** Interface target reset mode: (Only displayed for service user or manual mode) Interface Name Target Reset Mode ---------------- ----------------myintfc1 standard myintfc2 standard *************************************************************** Interface trace level: (Only displayed for service user) Interface Name Trace Levels

232 CLI Command Reference

---------------- -----------myintfc1 2, 4 myintfc2 2, 4 *************************************************************** Interface write buffering: (Only displayed for service user or manual mode) Interface Name Write Buffering ---------------- --------------------myintfc1 enabled myintfc2 enabled

See also

show drive info

show interface name

Description Syntax Availability Operands Shows the name and node WWN of one or more interfaces. show interface name interface_num All users and modes interface_num Specify the interface number for which to display interface names and world wide names. The information can be displayed for all interfaces by specifying all for this operand. This operand is required.

Examples

To show interface names and world wide names all interfaces:

/>show interface name all Interface name information: Interface Card Node WWN ----------------------------1 11111111111111CC 2 22222222222222CC Current Name -----------myhost1 myhost2

See also

None

show interface revision

Description Syntax Availability Operands Shows the firmware revision of one or more interfaces. show interface revision [interface_num] | [all] All users and modes interface_num Specify an interface whose firmware revisions will be displayed. The firmware revisions may be displayed for all interfaces by specifying all for this operand. This operand is required.

Examples

To show the firmware revisions for all interfaces:

/>show interface revision all Interface firmware revision: Interface Card WW Node Name ----------------- -------------------1 100000e0020286d1 2 100000e00202733b Firmware Revision ----------------5.01 5.01

See also

show firmware revisions

show interface status

Description Syntax Availability Operands Shows the status of one or more interfaces. show interface status [interface_num ] | [all] All users and modes interface_num Specify an interface for which to display the status. The interface status may be displayed for all interfaces by specifying all for this operand. This operand is required.

Examples

To show the status for all interfaces:

show interface name 233

/>show interface status all Interface status: Interface Card ----------------Interface Card 1 Interface Card 2 WW Node Name ---------------bb5ea468bb5ea354 bb4ff343236bc023 Status -----Green Yellow State ------Online Offline Firmware Mismatch -------No Yes Has Errors -------No Yes*

*Use the command 'show interface status' with a specific interface number to see specific errors for this device.

See also

show interface info

show interface wwninfo

Description Syntax Availability Operands Shows the World Wide Name (WWN) information for the requested interface controller or controllers. All WWN information shown is for the node name/ID. show interface wwninfo interface_num All users and modes interface_num Specify the number of the interface. The value may be changed for all interfaces by specifying all for this operand. This operand is required.

Examples

To show WWN info for all controllers:

/>show interface wwninfo all Interface Card ------------------Interface 1 Interface 2 Current WW Name ------------------100000e0f202ed73 100000e0720309e3 Factory WW Name ------------------100000e00202ed71 100000e0020309eb Mismatch -------no yes

See also

set interface clearwwnmismatch set mgmt wwnstate

show library access

Description Syntax Availability Operands Examples Shows which hosts have access to the tape library. For each host, the target LUN that gives the host access to the library is shown. show library access All users and modes None To show tape library access information:
/>show library access Access information for the tape Host Host Name -------- -------------------1 myhost1 library: WW Node Name -------------------FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF LUN Port --- --1 1

See also

map host unmap host

show library info

Description Syntax Availability Operands Examples Shows all information pertaining to the tape library. show library info All users and modes None To show all information for the tape library:
/>show library info All tape library information Tape library name: picker Tape library firmware status: Green Tape library product ID: ESL9322 Tape library serial number: 2G33KZ85H002

234 CLI Command Reference

Tape library firmware revision: 3.40 **************************************************************************** Tape library topology Tape library: Library Name Serial Number Interface Name -------------------- -------------------- -------------------picker 2G33KZ85H002 100000e0020286d1 Tape drives: Drive Num Serial Number -------------- ------------------Drive 1 HU72M09609 Drive 2 HU72M09608 Drive 3 HU73A01003 Drive 4 HU72L12069 Drive 5 HU72L12066 Drive 6 HU72L12103 Drive 7 HU73A05925 Drive 8 HU72M07819 Interfaces: Interface Card -------------------1 2

Type ------------Ultrium 1-SCSI Ultrium 1-SCSI Ultrium 1-SCSI Ultrium 1-SCSI Ultrium 1-SCSI Ultrium 1-SCSI Ultrium 1-SCSI Ultrium 1-SCSI

Online? Interface Name ------- --------------yes 100000e0020286d1 yes 100000e0020286d1 yes 100000e00202733b yes 100000e00202733b yes 100000e0020286d1 yes 100000e0020286d1 yes 100000e00202733b yes 100000e00202733b

Interface Name -------------------100000e0020286d1 100000e00202733b

WW Node Name ---------------100000e0020286d1 100000e00202733b

See also

show license show drive info show host info

show library interface

Description Syntax Availability Operands Examples Shows interface information pertaining to the library. show library interface All users and modes None To show interface information for the tape library:
/>show library interface Tape library interface information: Interface Card WW Port Name --------------------- -------------------1 100000e0020286d1

See also

show interface info show library info

show library name

Description Syntax Availability Operands Examples Shows the name of the tape library. show library name All users and modes None To show the name of the tape library:
/>show library name Tape library name: mylibrary

See also

show library info

show library productid

Description Syntax Availability Operands Shows the product ID of the tape library. show library productid All users and modes None

show library interface 235

Examples

To show the product ID of the tape library:

/>show library productid Tape library product ID: ESL 9326

See also

show library info

show library revision

Description Syntax Availability Operands Examples Shows the firmware revision of the tape library. show library revision All users and modes None To show the firmware revision of the tape library:
/>show library revision Tape library firmware revision: 3.456

See also

show library info show firmware revisions

show library sensors

Description Syntax Availability Operands Examples Displays the status of the sensors inside the library which includes temperature, voltage, and fan speed readings. show library sensors All users and modes None
/>show library sensors Unit 1 (Operative) Description: Sensors - Back Base drive CAP (Health: OK, Error: NA) Power Supply 0 Status: Inoperative Value: NA Warning Threshold: NA Normal Range: NA Power Supply 1 Status: Operative Value: NA Warning Threshold: NA Normal Range: NA Fan 0 Status: Operative Value: NA Warning Threshold: NA Normal Range: NA Fan 1 Status: Operative Value: NA Warning Threshold: NA Normal Range: NA Drive 1 Enclosure Fan/Temp Status: Operative Value: 24 deg Warning Threshold: NA Normal Range: NA Drive 2 Enclosure Fan/Temp Status: Operative Value: 24 deg Warning Threshold: NA Normal Range: NA Drive 0 Enclosure Fan/Temp Status: Not Installed Value: NA Warning Threshold: NA Normal Range: NA Drive 0 Enclosure Fan/Temp Status: Not Installed Value: NA Warning Threshold: NA Normal Range: NA Temperature Sensor 0 Status: Not Installed

236 CLI Command Reference

Value: NA Warning Threshold: NA Normal Range: NA ...

See also

None

show library serialnumber

Description Syntax Availability Operands Examples Shows the serial number of the tape library. show library serialnumber All users and modes None To show the serial number of the tape library:
/>show library serialnumber Tape library serial number: 123456ABCDEF

See also

show library info

show library status

Description Syntax Availability Operands Examples Shows the status of the tape library. show library status All users and modes None To show the status of the tape library:
/>show library status Component ------------------Tape library Robotics Drives: Drive1 Drive2 Drive3 Drive4 Drive5 Drive6 Interfaces: Interface1 Interface2 Interface Manager Status -----Red Green Description ---------------------No errors detected

Green Green Green Green Green Green

No No No No No No

errors errors errors errors errors errors

detected detected detected detected detected detected

Red Red Red

Firmware Mismatch Detected Firmware Mismatch Detected Firmware Mismatch Detected

See also

show library info

show library topology

Description Syntax Availability Operands Examples Shows the topology of the tape library. show library topology All users and modes None To show the topology of the tape library:
/>show library topology Tape library topology Tape library: Library Name Serial Number -------------------- -------------------picker 2G33KZ85H002 Tape drives: Drive Num -------------Drive 1 Drive 2 Drive 3

Interface Name -------------------100000e0020286d1

Serial Number -----------------HU72M09609 HU72M09608 HU73A01003

Type -------------Ultrium 1-SCSI Ultrium 1-SCSI Ultrium 1-SCSI

Online? Interface Name ------- ----------------yes 100000e0020286d1 yes 100000e0020286d1 yes 100000e00202733b

show library serialnumber 237

Drive Drive Drive Drive Drive

4 5 6 7 8

HU72L12069 HU72L12066 HU72L12103 HU73A05925 HU72M07819

Ultrium Ultrium Ultrium Ultrium Ultrium

1-SCSI 1-SCSI 1-SCSI 1-SCSI 1-SCSI

yes yes yes yes yes

100000e00202733b 100000e0020286d1 100000e0020286d1 100000e00202733b 100000e00202733b

Interfaces: Interface Card -------------------1 2

Interface Name -------------------100000e0020286d1 100000e00202733b

WW Node Name ---------------100000e0020286d1 100000e00202733b

See also

show library info

show license
Description Syntax Availability Operands Examples Shows the license key and quantity of currently licensed features. show license All users and modes None To show the licensed features supported and currently licensed and their license keys:
/>show license Supported Licensed Feature ------------------------------Direct Backup Advanced Access Controls Licensed? --------Yes No Qty --8

See also

show mgmt info

show media
Description Syntax Availability Operands Shows media information for storage slots, drives, mail slots, or all. show media [all] | [slots] | [mail] | [drive] | [noprompt] All users and modes One of these operands is required. all Shows media information for all storage slots, drives, and mail slots. slots [range] mail [range] drive [range] [noprompt] Shows media information for all storage slots or those within a range. Shows media information for all mail slots or those within a range. Shows media information for all drives or those within a range. An optional parameter; when noprompt is specified, the output will run continuously, rather than pausing after 20 items have been displayed.

Examples

To show media information for all storage slots:

/>show media slots

To show media information for slots 1 to 100:

/>show media slots 1 100

To show media information for all storage slots, drives, and mail slots:
/>show media all

To show media information for all drives:

/>show media drives Media List: Element -----------Drive: 1 Drive: 2

Partition Name --------------NA NA

Media Barcode ----------------102741L2 102452L2

Notes -------------------Source slot unknown From slot 1

238 CLI Command Reference

Drive: Drive: Drive: Drive: Drive: Drive: Drive: Drive: Drive: Drive:

3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12

NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA

Empty Empty Empty 102732L2 Empty Empty Empty Empty Empty Empty

Source slot unknown

See also

move media

show mgmt clock

Description Syntax Availability Operands Examples Shows the current date and time for the Interface Manager card, along with an indication of whether an NTP server is in use. show mgmt clock All users and modes None To show the current date and time for the Interface Manager card:
/>show mgmt clock Interface manager date and time: Tue Jul 14 14:43:02 2009 MDT (Using NTP: True)

See also

set mgmt clock set mgmt timezone

show mgmt info

Description Syntax Availability Operands Examples Shows Interface Manager card information. show mgmt info All users and modes None To show all Interface Manager card information:
/>show mgmt info Interface Manager Interface manager Interface manager Interface Manager IM RAM : 128 MB status: Green date and time: Wed Jul 15 11:21:25 2009 MDT (Using NTP: False) time zone: America/Denver board model: IMAX

See also

show drive info show host info show interface info show library info

show mgmt log detail

Description Syntax Availability Operands Examples Displays detailed information about a specific event. show mgmt log detail eventID All users and modes eventID The identification number of the event obtained from the show mgmt log event command.

To show more information about event 5 in the event log.

/>show mgmt log detail 5 Event # Timestamp Event Type Device 5 Mon Feb Warning Library

5 09:37:29 2007

show mgmt clock 239

Device State Description

Ready Operational

See also

show mgmt log event

show mgmt log event

Description Syntax Availability Operands Displays the event log. Information for each event is summarized. To see additional details about a specific event, see show mgmt log detail. show mgmt log event [noprompt] All users and modes [noprompt] An optional parameter; when noprompt is specified, the output will run continuously, rather than pausing after 20 items have been displayed.

Examples

To show the event log:

/>show mgmt log event Evt# ----10018 10017 -> Hit Timestamp (GMT) Severity Source -------------------- --------- ----------Jul 14 22:56:28 2009 Warning Library Jul 14 22:56:18 2009 Info Library <Enter> for Next Page, q to Quit: Description ------------------------Test unit ready status... Director - auditRespons...

See also

show mgmt log detail

show mgmt revision

Description Syntax Availability Operands Examples Shows the Interface Manager card firmware revision. show mgmt revision All users and modes None To show the current Interface Manager card firmware revision:
/>show mgmt revision Interface manager firmware revision: 1.01

See also

show mgmt info

show mgmt status

Description Syntax Availability Operands Examples Shows the Interface Manager card status. show mgmt status All users and modes None To show the current Interface Manager card status:
/>show mgmt status Interface manager status: Good

See also

show mgmt info

show mgmt timezone

Description Syntax Availability Operands Examples Shows the Interface Manager card time zone. show mgmt timezone All users and modes None To show the Interface Manager card time zone:
/>show mgmt timezone Interface manager time zone: America/Denver (MST)

240 CLI Command Reference

See also

set mgmt timezone set mgmt clock show mgmt clock

show mgmt wwnstate

Description Shows the current World Wide Name (WWN) retention state for the Interface Manager card. All WWN information shown is for the node name/ID. This command is deprecated. NOTE: In Command View TL versions 2.0 and later and Interface Manager versions I200 and later the WWN retention state feature is always enabled. The output of this command might not be shown correctly in the user interface. Syntax Availability Operands Examples show mgmt wwnstate All users and modes None To show the WWN retention state of the Interface Manager card:
/>show mgmt wwnstate enabled

See also

set mgmt wwnstate set interface clearwwnmismatch show interface wwninfo

show mode
Description Syntax Availability Operands Examples Shows the current command mode. show mode All users and modes None To show the current command mode:
/>show mode Current command mode: manual

See also

set mode

show network info

Description Syntax Availability Example Displays the IPv4 and IPv6 network configuration of the public network interface. show network info All users and modes To display the network configuration of the public network interface:
/>show net info - Hostname: abslib27 - IP version(s) enabled: dualstack (both IPv4 and IPv6 enabled) - IPv4 Domain Name: gr.hp.com - IPv6 Domain Name: gr.ipv6.hp.com - DHCPv4 enabled - IPv4 addr/mask/gtwy: 192.168.100.16 / 255.255.0.0 / - DHCPv6 enabled - IPv6 stateless address autoconfiguration: enabled - IPv6 manual addressing: enabled

show mgmt wwnstate

241

- IPv6 Addresses Type 2620:0000:0a07:e00a:0001:0002:0003:0004/manual 2620:0:a07:e00a:280:66ff:fe05:f956/64 stateless 2620:0:a07:e00a:485c:8517:cdb:6a83/64 dhcpv6 fe80::280:66ff:fe05:f956/64 link-lcl

See also

set net v6 dhcpv6 set net v6 ipaddress set net v6 ipversion set net v6 manual set net v6 stateless

show network dhcp

Description Syntax Availability Operands Examples Shows whether DHCP mode is enabled or disabled. When enabled, DHCP is used to set the Interface Manager card IP address. show network dhcp All users and modes None To show whether DHCP mode is enabled or disabled:
/>show network dhcp DHCP: disabled

See also

set network dhcp set network ipaddress show network ipaddress

show network ipaddress

Description Syntax Availability Operands Examples Displays the current IP address, subnet mask, and gateway address for the Interface Manager card. show network ipaddress All users and modes None To show the current IP address, subnet mask, and gateway address:
/>show network ipaddress DHCP: disabled IP address: 207.46.249.190 Subnet mask: 255.255.248.0 Gateway address: 207.46.72.1

See also

show network dhcp set network dhcp set network ipaddress

show network snmpcommunity

Description Shows the Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP) community strings. SNMP is a well-defined standard of reporting device information through a network. The Interface Manager card has a built-in SNMP agent that supports queries to MIB-II in addition to SNMP traps/alerts. This command also shows all defined SNMP traps. show network snmpcommunity All users and modes None

Syntax Availability Operands

242 CLI Command Reference

Examples

To show the SNMP community strings:

/>show network snmpcommunity Community Strings: Read Only IPV4 - public Read/Write IPV4 - private Read Only IPV6 - public Read/Write IPV6 - private Host IP -------------15.146.154.126 16.78.5.40 Trap Community String --------------------public public Filter ------cwi cwi Ver Type --- ---1 semi 1 semi

See also

set network snmpcommunity (page 216) set network snmptrap (page 217)

show partition
Description Syntax Availability Operands Examples Shows which devices are assigned to a partition. show partition [number] | [all] All users and modes number Specify the partition number. To show information for all partitions, use all for this operand.

To show information for partition 1 only:

/>show partition 1

To show information for all partitions:

/>show partition all

See also

show host access

show robotics status

Description Syntax Availability Operands Examples Shows the status of the library robotics. show robotics status All users and modes None To show the status of the library robotics:
/>show robotics status Tape Library robotics status : Red Tape Library robotics available : Yes Tape Library robotics Errors: Error #1 Firmware mismatch detected

See also

show library info

show ssh hostkeys

Description Shows the Interface Manager's SSH hostkey fingerprints and exports the public host keys. This command also makes a copy of the public host keys available in the ftp public directory. show ssh hostkeys All users and modes None /show/ssh>help hostkeys

Syntax Availability Operands Examples

show partition 243

show station
Description Syntax Availability Operands Examples Displays the Command View TL station's name and IP address that is receiving the Tape Assure data. show station All users and modes None />show station Current CVTL management station name: <CVTL station's network name> Current CVTL management station IP address: xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx clear station

See also

show supportticket cache

NOTE: Cached support tickets will no longer be available in Command View TL 2.6 and later. Shows detailed information on the support ticket cache for all devices (if available). show supportticket cache All users and modes None
/>show supportticket cache Device Id ---------------Drive 1 Drive 2 Drive 3 IM Cache State ----------Clean Clean Clean None Timestamp ---------------Wed Jan 31 18:46 Wed Jan 31 19:25 Wed Jan 31 18:46 Thu Feb 1 00:28 Proactive ---------No Yes No No

Description Syntax Availability Operands Examples

See also

set supportticket disable set supportticket enable show supportticket policy show supportticket statistics

show supportticket policy

Description Syntax Availability Operands Examples Displays whether proactive drive ticket retrieval is turned on or off. show supportticket policy All users and modes None To display whether proactive drive support tickets are currently enabled:
/>show supportticket policy Current proactive retrieval policy: Disabled

See also

set supportticket disable set supportticket enable show supportticket cache show supportticket statistics

244 CLI Command Reference

show supportticket statistics

Description Syntax Availability Operands Examples Shows detailed information on the proactive log tickets for all devices (if available). show supportticket statistics All users and modes None
/>show supportticket statistics Device Id ----------Drive 1 Drive 2 Drive 3 IM # of Proactive Requests ----------------------0 1 0 0 # of Dropped Requests --------------------0 0 0 0 Avg Gen Time -----------0 35 0 0

See also

set supportticket disable set supportticket enable show supportticket cache show supportticket policy

show system contact assetnumber

Description Syntax Availability Operands Examples Shows the system asset number. show system contact assetnumber All users and modes None To show the system asset number:
/>show system contact assetnumber System asset number: 123456ABCD

See also

set system contact assetnumber show system info

show system contact email

Description Syntax Availability Operands Examples Shows the system contact e-mail address. show system contact email All users and modes None To show the system contact e-mail address:
/>show system contact email System contact e-mail address: myname@myorg.com

See also

set system contact email show system info

show system contact location

Description Syntax Availability Operands Examples Shows the system location. show system contact location All users and modes None To show the system location:
/>show system contact location System location: mylocation

show supportticket statistics 245

See also

set system contact location show system info

show system contact name

Description Syntax Availability Operands Examples Shows the system contact name. show system contact name All users and modes None To show the system contact name:
/>show system contact name System contact name: myfirstname_mylastname

See also

set system contact name show system info

show system contact pager

Description Syntax Availability Operands Examples Shows the system contact page number. show system contact pager All users and modes None To show the system contact pager number:
/>show system contact pager System contact pager: 444-444-4444

See also

set system contact pager show system info

show system contact phone

Description Syntax Availability Operands Examples Shows the system contact phone number. show system contact phone All users and modes None To show the system contact phone number:
/>show system contact phone System contact phone number: 444-444-4444

See also

set system contact phone show system info

show system info

Description Syntax Availability Operands Examples Shows all system information. show system info All users and modes None To show all system information:
/>show System System System System System system info information status: Good contact name: myfirstname_mylastname contact phone number: 444-444-4444 contact pager number: 222-222-2222

246 CLI Command Reference

System System System System

contact e-mail address: myname@myorg.com location: mylocation asset number: 123456ABCD name: mysystemname

See also

show system status

show system name

Description Syntax Availability Operands Examples Shows the system name. show system name All users and modes None To show the system name:
/>show system name System name: mysystemname

See also

set system name show system info

show system status

Description Syntax Availability Operands Examples Shows the system status. show system status All users and modes None To show the system status:
/>show system status System status: Good

See also

show system info

synch secmgr
Description If you have made interface controller host access changes directly through the interface controller Telnet/SSH or serial interface instead of using the Interface Manager card or Command View TL, the interface controller will be out of sync with the Interface Manager card. You must then synchronize the settings which reapplies the Interface Manager card settings to the interface controllers. synch secmgr All users and modes None
/>synch secmgr Do you really want to Synchronize the Secure Manager? Enter 'y' to continue or 'n' to skip [default='n']: y Synchronizing the Operation status: Operation status: Operation status: Operation status: Secure Manager... Synchronizing ACGs. Synchronizing ACGs. Synchronizing ACGs. Finished Synchronizing ACGs

Syntax Availability Operands Examples

See also

None

unmap host
Description Blocks access to all of the current drives for the specified host. CAUTION: Using this command could force a reboot of some interfaces. Ensure that no backup jobs are in progress before running this command.
show system name 247

Syntax Availability Operands

unmap host host_num [force] All users and modes host_num [force] Specify the host number. This operand is required. An optional parameter; when force is specified, there will be no prompt asking if you really want to unmap the host.

Examples

To block host 1 access to all drives:

/>unmap host 1 Caution: Unmapping hosts could force a reboot of some interfaces and will terminate all backup operations involving the rebooting interfaces. Do you really want to unmap the host? y Committing configuration...done

See also

map host set host name show host name

248 CLI Command Reference

6 Troubleshooting
For common problems and how to resolve them, see the following sections: LED diagnostic codes Common issues (page 249)

For additional support, go to the following website: http://www.hp.com/support/cvtl.

LED diagnostic codes

Table 37 Status LED diagnostic codes
Red LED On Blinks 1x per 5 second interval Blinks 2x per 5 second interval Blinks 3x per 5 second interval Blinks 4x per 5 second interval Blinks 5x per 6 second interval Green LED Off Off Off Off Off Description BIOS code failed to run. Hardware POST failed. No firmware images are loaded. No CompactFlash disk or valid boot sector image found. Specified firmware image files were not found. Neither the current nor the previous image was found. Load or execute command failed (boot code remains at end of process). This indicates that load, decompress, or execution failed on both the current and previous image files. Flash is read-only. Replace with 488160-001 (256 MB for use on the 342213-001 or 393531-001 (AS#340252-001 or AS#340252-002) Interface Manager card) 439651-001 (1 GB for use on the 480240-001 (AS#340252-003) Interface Manager card). Load or execute command succeeded. Boot code successfully loaded, decompressed, and initiated execution of one of the image files. Application software is initializing. Application is identifying all library components. Normal state. Application has identified all library components.

Off

Off

Blinks 1x per 5 second interval Blinks 2x per 5 second interval Blinks 3x per 5 second interval On

Off Off Off

Table 38 Network link activity/speed LEDs

LED Status Description Port disconnected/no link Port connected to another Ethernet device Data is being transmitted/received Port is operating at 100 Mbps Port is operating at 10 Mbps, or port is not connected (see Link Activity LED)

Link Activity LED (left side of Off each Ethernet port) On Flashing Link Speed LED (right side of On each Ethernet port) Off

Common issues
Common issues are organized into the following categories:
LED diagnostic codes 249

ESL9000 Series issues (page 250) ESL E-Series issues (page 252) EML E-Series issues (page 254) MSL issues (page 256) ESKM enrollment issues (page 256)

ESL9000 Series issues

Symptom Command View TL server does not detect the Interface Manager card Possible cause Bad network connection Solution Verify that the Interface Manager card and the management station are correctly connected to the LAN.

Interface Manager card not powered Power up the library. Observe status up or in ready state and link LEDs. For a description of LED diagnostic codes, see LED diagnostic codes (page 249). Incorrect IP address Verify that the correct IP address of the Interface Manager card is entered in Command View TL. See Adding and removing libraries (page 27) to configure Command View TL with the correct IP address.

Interface Manager card has outdated Verify that the Interface Manager card firmware has I130 or later firmware. Interface Manager card does not detect one or more FC interface controllers Bad network connection Verify that the Interface Manager card is properly connected to the FC interface controllers and that the cables are good. Ensure that the FC interface controllers have the latest firmware revision. Check http://www.hp.com/support for the latest firmware for your devices. Observe status and link LEDs. Replace defective card or controller. DHCP must be enabled on the interface controller before the Interface Manager card can communicate with it. See the interface controller documentation for instructions on enabling DHCP mode. NOTE: HP recommends resetting all interface controllers to their default settings. Interface Manager card does not detect drives or library SCSI cables not connected properly Check SCSI cabling.

Incorrect firmware revision

Defective Interface Manager card or FC interface controller DHCP not enabled on the interface controller

FC cables (e2400-FC 2G or 4G only) Check FC cables and replace if not connected properly or damaged necessary. Use link LEDs to troubleshoot connections and cable integrity.

250 Troubleshooting

Symptom

Possible cause SCSI settings or termination not set properly

Solution Check the SCSI settings for the device. Check that the SCSI bus is properly terminated.

Timing issues

Reset the corresponding FC interface controller. If the reset works then increase the SCSI bus discovery delay and/or the host port delay should permanently fix the problem.

Drive not powered up or in ready state Troubleshoot drive. Command View TL does not run in the Incompatible browser version or browser Adobe Flash Ensure you are using a minimum of Microsoft Internet Explorer 7 or later, or Mozilla Firefox 3.0, 3.5 or later. Ensure that Adobe Flash is enabled in the browser. Bad network connection or network down Check all physical network connections. If the connections are good, contact your network administrator. Ping the management station. If pinging fails and the IP address is correct, contact your network administrator. Wrong IP address Check the IP address of the management station. On the management station, open a command shell and enter ipconfig. You must use this IP address (or the network name of the management station) in the URL to access Command View TL.

Management station not running, or Check to see if the management Command View TL service not running station is operational. on management station Use the Services applet to verify that the Command View TL service is running on the management station. Select Start Control PanelAdministrative ToolsServices. Interface Manager does not accept a The password contains the characters If the password contains a $ or \, try password $ or /. putting a \ before the $ or \. For example, if the password is abc$def, try abc\$def or if the password is abc\def, try abc\\def.

Common issues

251

ESL E-Series issues

Symptom Command View TL server does not detect the Interface Manager card Possible Cause After powering up the library, it can take up to ten minutes for Command View TL to detect the Interface Manager card Bad network connection Solution This is a normal delay. Wait for ten minutes and try again.

Verify that the library and the management station are correctly cabled.

Interface Manager card not powered Power up the library. Observe status on or in ready state and link LEDs. For a description of LED diagnostic codes, see LED diagnostic codes (page 249). If the Interface Manager card does not have access to the library DHCP server and the library firmware is at release 2.4 or greater, access the CLI from a serial connection and execute the command set network config ESL. If the Interface Manager card does not have access to the library DHCP server and the library firmware is at an earlier version than 2.4, call HP Support. Incorrect IP address Verify that the correct IP address of the library is entered in Command View TL. See the HP StorageWorks ESL E-Series Tape Library user guide for instructions on determining the library IP address. See Adding and removing libraries (page 27) to configure Command View TL with the correct IP address. Defective cabinet controller Call HP Service.

Interface Manager card has outdated Verify that the Interface Manager card firmware has I130 or later firmware. Interface Manager card does not detect one or more FC interface controllers Bad network connection Verify that the Interface Manager card is properly connected to the library's internal LAN and that the cables are good. See the HP StorageWorks ESL E-Series Tape Library User Guide for more information. Ensure that the FC interface controllers have the latest firmware revision. Check http://www.hp.com/support for the latest firmware for your devices. Observe status and link LEDs. Replace defective card or controller. DHCP must be enabled on the interface controller before the Interface Manager card can communicate with it. See the interface controller documentation for instructions on enabling DHCP mode.

Incorrect firmware revision

Defective Interface Manager card or FC interface controller DHCP not enabled on the interface controller

252 Troubleshooting

Symptom

Possible Cause

Solution NOTE: HP recommends resetting all interface controllers to their default settings.

E2400FC 4 Gb Interface controller is Make sure both fans are working in the overheating drive cluster. Order the baffle kit part number 457038-001 to implement into any additional drive clusters that is missing the baffle. This kit includes six baffles, which is enough to populate a fully loaded library ESL-E library. Follow the installation poster provided with the baffle kit. Interface Manager card does not detect drives or library SCSI cables not connected properly Check SCSI cabling.

FC cables (e2400-FC 2G or 4G only) Check FC cables and replace if not connected properly or damaged necessary. Use link LEDs to troubleshoot connections and cable integrity. SCSI settings or termination not set properly Check the SCSI settings for the device. Check that the SCSI bus is properly terminated. Timing issues Reset the corresponding FC interface controller. If the reset works then increase the SCSI bus discovery delay and/or the host port delay should permanently fix the problem.

Drive not powered on or in ready state Troubleshoot drive. Command View TL does not run in the Incompatible browser version or browser Adobe Flash not enabled Ensure that you are using a minimum of Microsoft Internet Explorer 7 or later, or Mozilla Firefox 3.0, 3.5 or later. Ensure that Adobe Flash is enabled in the browser. Bad network connection or network down Check all physical network connections. If the connections are good, contact your network administrator. Ping the management station. If pinging fails and the IP address is correct, contact your network administrator. Wrong IP address Check the IP address of the management station. On the management station, open a command shell and enter ipconfig. You must use this IP address (or the network name

Common issues 253

Symptom

Possible Cause

Solution of the management station) in the URL to access Command View TL.

Management station not running, or Check to see if the management Command View TL service not running station is operational. on management station Use the Services applet to verify that the Command View TL service is running on the management station. Select Start Control PanelAdministrative ToolsServices.

EML E-Series issues

Symptom Command View TL server does not detect the Interface Manager card Possible cause Bad network connection Solution Verify that the Interface Manager card and the management station are correctly connected to the LAN. Use LEDs to troubleshoot Ethernet cabling. Ping the Interface Manager card to verify network health. Interface Manager card not powered Power on the library. Observe status on or in ready state and link LEDs. Check for proper level of firmware. Incorrect IP address Verify that the correct IP address of the Interface Manager card is entered in Command View TL. To get or set the network IP address of the Interface Manager card, use the CLI commands show network ipaddress and set network ipaddress. See Accessing the CLI (page 180) for more information. To add the library to Command View TL, see Adding and removing libraries (page 27). If the Interface Manager card does not have access to the DHCP server and the library firmware is at release 2.4 or greater, access the CLI from a serial connection and execute the command set network config eml. Interface Manager card does not have access to the DHCP server and the library firmware is at an earlier version than 2.4, call HP Support. The eth0 setting for the broadcast might not be set to 0.0.0.0, call HP Support. Some applications in the network are using SNMP and setting the broadcast address. Modify the SNMP community write name. The command to modify the SNMP 254 Troubleshooting

Symptom

Possible cause

Solution community string in the IPV4 network is: set net snmp write < community name >. The command to modify the SNMP community string in the IPV6 network is: set net snmp write6 < community name >. The community name needs to be anything other than the word private. The DNS address is set to something weird. An incorrect DNS setting can make the Interface Manager slow and appear to be unresponsive or hang. The DNS address can be set to nothing or to a valid DNS server IP address by using the OCP on the library.

Interface Manager card does not detect one or more FC interface controllers

Bad network connection

Verify that the Interface Manager card is properly connected to the FC interface controllers and that the cables are good. Use LEDs to troubleshoot Ethernet cabling.

Defective Interface Manager card or FC interface controller

Observe status and link LEDs. Replace defective card or controller. For a description of LED diagnostic codes, see LED diagnostic codes (page 249). Reset the corresponding FC interface controller. If the reset works then increase the SCSI bus discovery delay and/or the host port delay should permanently fix the problem.

Interface Manager card does not detect drives or library

Timing issues

Drive not powered on or in ready state Make sure the drive is not set to off. Troubleshoot the drive. Command View TL does not run in the Incompatible browser version or browser Adobe Flash not enabled Make sure you are using a minimum of Microsoft Internet Explorer v6.0 SP1 or later, or Netscape Navigator v6.2 or later. Make sure that Adobe Flash is enabled in the browser. Bad network connection or network down Check all physical network connections. If the connections are good, contact your network administrator. Ping the management station. If pinging fails and the IP address is correct, contact your network administrator. Wrong IP address Check the IP address of the management station. On the management station, open a command shell and enter ipconfig. You must use this IP address (or the network name Common issues 255

Symptom

Possible cause

Solution of the management station) in the URL to access Command View TL.

Management station not running, or Check to see if the management Command View TL service not running station is operational. on management station Use the Services applet to verify that the Command View TL service is running on the management station. Click Start Control PanelAdministrative ToolsServices.

ESL G3 issues
Symptom Unable to launch ESL G3 Possible cause Incorrect IP address Solution Managing ESL G3 library on a 64bit MS Windows machine requires JRE 1.6.0 update 23 64 bit as a prerequisite. Continuing to launch or manage the ESL G3 library will open a dialog stating The page you are viewing uses Java. More information on Java support is available from the Microsoft website.

MSL issues
Symptom Possible cause Solution Verify that the MSL library and the Command View TL server are both connected to the same network. Power on the library and check the front panel for issues. Verify that the IP addresses are on the same network Verify that https is not enabled in the library network configuration

Command View TL does not add the Bad network connection MSL library to the Launcher window or the discovery wizard does not add the library to the Launcher window. MSL library is not powered on Incorrect IP address The library might be configured for https

ESKM enrollment issues

Issue/Symptom The clock on the tape library has the wrong date/time. This affects the dates on the SSL certificates and causes authentication failure. Solution Using Command View TL, set the library clock to match the date and time on the ESKMs. If the ESKM installation is new, also verify the clocks on the SKM nodes. Clocks

256 Troubleshooting

Issue/Symptom

Solution should be as close as possible, but variations of up to 5 minutes are acceptable.

The SKM or ESKM key generation policy, or policies, for this library have an error or are not complete.

Each library partition must have a separate policy, even if the policy is No Encryption. See Changing library partitions after initial SKM or ESKM setup (page 169). The policy contains the serial number of the library or partition. That serial number must match exactly. Review the section of the SKM or ESKM User Guide containing library steps for SKM or ESKM installation, in which key generation policies are entered.

A certificate issue exists.

The main rules for certificates are: There is 1 and only 1 Certificate Authority (CA) for the entire system. Ensure there is only 1 Local CA, and it is the same CA on each ESKM node. The CA must sign all client (library) certificates, and all server (ESKM) certificates. All server certificates must have the same name. Each ESKM node has a unique certificate, but they all must have the same name. The server certificate name must be selected in the KMS server for each ESKM. For detailed information, review the section of the ESKM User Guide that presents CA creation and server certificate creation and installation.

An ESKM configuration is wrong. This can occur if It is important to follow the installation processes un-intended changes were made to the ESKM configuration, step-by-step, exactly, and make only those changes that usually during initial installation. are specified. Most un-intended configurations prevent correct operation of the system. If re-tracing the installation steps does not identify the issue, restore default configurations on the ESKM and start again. Firewall issues exist. This can occur when libraries and/or ESKMs are distributed across multiple sites. The devices all communicate over a set of TCP ports, which must be opened between the sites for correct operation. A complete list of the ports that must be opened is provided at Installing Command View TL. All passwords must be 8 or more characters, and some mix of letters and numbers. If you have configured the SKM or ESKM for increased password security, then the rules are even stricter. Each tape library must have a unique username. Passwords may be unique, but that is not enforced. See the SKM or ESKM Installation and Configuration Guide for detailed information about creating usernames and passwords, and change the usernames and passwords to meet the SKM or ESKM requirements.

Password and username issues exists.

Common issues 257

NOTE: 1. An HP CVTL Database Service restart should always be followed by starting the Command View TL service. 2. Restart the LTT service in this order: a. HP Command View TL Data Verification service b. HP Command View TL Data Verification Web service c. HP Command View TL Data Verification Notification service Then restart the Command View TL service. 3. When a data verification test is running, you cannot stop HP Command View TL DV Service under Windows services.msc. If you try to stop this service, you may get a warning from Windows and the data verification interface appears to hang. If this happens, restart the Command View TL service, start the service from the data verification interface, and then run the data verification tests.

258 Troubleshooting

7 Support and other resources

Contacting HP (page 259) Related information (page 259) Document conventions and symbols

Contacting HP
Go to www.hp.com/support/cvtl for the latest troubleshooting information, firmware updates, software versions, and documentation. Before contacting HP, collect the following information: Product model names and numbers Technical support registration number (if applicable) Product serial numbers Error messages Operating system type and revision level Detailed questions

For worldwide technical support information, see the HP support website: http://www.hp.com/support

Related information
Related documentation
The following documents and websites provide related information: ESL E-Series Interface Manager poster ESL9000 Series Interface Manager Replacement Instructions poster EML E-Series Interface Manager replacement poster HP StoreEver Command View TL SMI-S Provider installation instructions HP Enterprise Systems Library (ESL) G3 Tape Library User Guide

You can find these documents from the Manuals page of the HP Business Support Center website: http://www.hp.com/support/manuals In the Storage section, click Storage Software or Tape Storage and Media and then select your product.

HP websites
For additional information, see the following HP websites: http://www.hp.com http://www.hp.com/go/storage http://www.hp.com/support/manuals http://www.hp.com/support/downloads http://www.hp.com/go/tapeassure

Contacting HP 259

HP tape cartridges
To make sure you get the best performance from your HP StoreEver tape library, always use HP branded tape cartridges. HP develops, tests, and qualifies their hardware and tape cartridges together to ensure compatibility, and enabling you to keep your data safe. To learn more about HP tape cartridges or to order online, go to the HP website: www.hp.com/go/storagemedia

Product warranties
For information about HP StoreEver product warranties, see the warranty information website: http://www.hp.com/go/storagewarranty

Subscription services
HP recommends that you register your product at the Subscriber's Choice for Business website: http://www.hp.com/go/e-updates After registering, you will receive e-mail notification of product enhancements, new driver versions, firmware updates, and other product resources.

Typographic conventions
Table 39 Document conventions
Convention Blue text: Table 39 (page 260) Blue, underlined text: http:// www.hp.com Bold text Element Cross-reference links and e-mail addresses

Website addresses

Keys that are pressed Text entered into a GUI element, such as a box GUI elements that are clicked or selected, such as menu and list items, buttons, tabs, and check boxes

Italic text

Text emphasis

Monospace text File and directory names System output Code Commands, their arguments, and argument values Monospace, italic text Monospace, bold text Code variables Command variables Emphasized monospace text

WARNING! CAUTION: IMPORTANT: NOTE:

Indicates that failure to follow directions could result in bodily harm or death. Indicates that failure to follow directions could result in damage to equipment or data. Provides clarifying information or specific instructions.

Provides additional information.

260 Support and other resources

TIP:

Provides helpful hints and shortcuts.

Updated regulatory compliance and recycling notices

For regulatory and recycling notices see HP StorageWorks ESL E-Series Tape Library users guide or HP StorageWorks Enterprise Modular Library E-Series user guide.

Updated regulatory compliance and recycling notices

261

A ALPA matrix
Table 40 ALPA matrix
0:0xEF 1:0xE8 2:0xE4 3:0xE2 4:0xE1 5:0xE0 6:0xDC 7:0xDA 8:0xD9 9:0xD6 10:0xD5 1 1:0xD4 12:0xD3 13:0xD2 14:0xD1 15:0xCE 16:0xCD 17:0xCC 18:0xCB 19:0xCA 20:0xC9 21:0xC7 22:0xC6 23:0xC5 24:0xC3 25:0xBC 26:0xBA 27:0xB9 28:0xB6 29:0xB5 30:0xB4 31:0xB3 32:0xB2 33:0xB1 34:0xAE 35:0xAD 36:0xAC 37:0xAB 38:0xAA 39:0xA9 40:0xA7 41:0xA6 42:0xA5 43:0xA3 44:0x9F 45:0x9E 46:0x9D 47:0x9B 48:0x98 49:0x97 50:0x90 51:0x8F 52:0x88 53:0x84 54:0x82 55:0x81 56:0x80 57:0x7C 58:0x7A 59:0x79 60:0x76 61:0x75 62:0x74 63:0x73 64:0x72 65:0x71 66:0x6E 67:0x6D 68:0x6C 69:0x6B 70:0x6A 71:0x69 72:0x67 73:0x66 74:0x65 75:0x63 76:0x5C 77:0x5A 78:0x59 79:0x56 80:0x55 81:0x54 82:0x53 83:0x52 84:0x51 85:0x4E 86:0x4D 87:0x4C 88:0x4B 89:0x4A 90:0x49 91:0x47 92:0x46 93:0x45 94:0x43 95:0x3C 96:0x3A 97:0x39 98:0x36 99:0x35 100:0x34 101:0x33 102:0x32 103:0x31 104:0x2E 105:0x2D 106:0x2C 107:0x2B 108:0x2A 109:0x29 1 10:0x27 1 1 1:0x26 1 12:0x25 1 13:0x23 1 14:0x1F 1 15:0x1E 1 16:0x1D 1 17:0x1B 1 18:0x18 1 19:0x17 120:0x10 121:0x0F 122:0x08 123:0x04 124:0x02 125:0x01

262 ALPA matrix

B New features in previous versions of Command View TL

Following are the new features that were added in earlier versions of Command View TL. New features in Command View TL 3.6.00 (page 263) New features in Command View TL 3.5.00 (page 263) New features in Command View TL 3.1.00 and Interface Manager firmware version I274 (page 264) New features in Command View TL 3.0.1 and Interface Manager firmware version I273 (page 264) New features in Command View TL 3.0 and Interface Manager firmware version I272 (page 264) New features in Command View TL 2.8 (page 265) New features in Command View TL 2.7 (page 265) New features in Command View TL 2.6 New features in Command View TL 2.5 (page 265) New features in Command View TL 2.4 (page 266) New features in Command View TL 2.3.0.1 and 2.3.02 (page 266) New features in Command View TL 2.3 (page 266) New features in Command View TL 2.2 New features in Command View TL 2.0 (page 267)

New features in Command View TL 3.6.00

Command View TL Support for MSL6480 Library Support for unfiltered ESL G3 Health Events sent to Command View TL through SNMP Command View TL support for MSL G3 licenses TAA license support for MSL6480 Command View TL support on Windows Server 2012 Command View TL Support for Library TapeAssure:(Supported libraries: MSL G3/ ESL G3 / MSL 6480)

Library TapeAssure overview Library usage Moves per library Empty slots per library

New features in Command View TL 3.5.00

Advanced TapeAssure Dashboard Predictive analytics for tape drives and cartridges Alerts reporting Performance Advisor Drive utilization analysis Predictive analytics for tape drive health

New features in Command View TL 3.6.00 263

Predictive analytics for tape drive life Predictive analytics for tape cartridge health Predictive analytics for tape cartridge life Tape cartridge utilization and performance analysis Ability to save the TapeAssure graphs and tabular data in PDF format Ability to email the TapeAssure graphs and tabular data in PDF format as an attachment License enforcement with Instant On capability for ESL G3, MSL, and AutoLoaders NOTE: The features above are not visible or supported on EML and ESL E libraries. They must have an Advance Tape Assure Licence on each library to function.

Ability to add and remove multiple libraries

New features in Command View TL 3.1.00 and Interface Manager firmware version I274
New features in Command View TL 3.1

Support for LTO-6 tape drives in EML E-Series and ESL G3 tape libraries.

New features in Interface Manager firmware version I274 Support for LTO-6 tape drives in EML E-Series libraries.

New features in Command View TL 3.0.1 and Interface Manager firmware version I273
New features in Command View TL 3.0.1

Support for HP ESL G3 KMIP Key Manager Client license.

New features in Interface Manager firmware version I273: New CLI command show station. The command will show which command view TL server the Tape Assure data is being sent.

New features in Command View TL 3.0 and Interface Manager firmware version I272
IMPORTANT: For ESL G3 tape libraries, Command View TL supports Launching, Licensing, and TapeAssure. All other ESL G3 features are managed directly through the library GUI. For more information on ESL G3 tape libraries, see HP Enterprise Systems Library (ESL) G3 Tape Library User Guide available from http://www.hp.com/support/eslg3. New features in Command View TL 3.0

GUI interface redesigned to enhance usability and scalability. Adobe Flash is now used instead of Java. Support for Insight Remote Support version 5.7, also known as WBES 6.3.

264 New features in previous versions of Command View TL

Secure Manager host access is now configured using Access Control Groups for increased flexibility. Users now log in once to the management station, instead of repeatedly logging in each time a new library is managed.

New features in Interface Manager firmware version I272:

New command to set SNMP traps from the CLI. The CLI confirmation prompt can be skipped when mapping or unmapping hosts. When using the CLI's show media or show mgmt log commands, the pause after every 20 items listed in now optional.

New features in Command View TL 2.8

Added support for ESL G3 Tape Libraries. Launching, Licensing and TapeAssure is fully supported through Command View TL. Other ESL G3 configuration is managed through the library's own GUI.

New features in Command View TL 2.7

Command View TL 2.7 adds the following capabilities: Key management security and reliability improvements. Support for LTO5 firmware versions I3AS (EML) and I3BW (ESL). Command View TL and TapeAssure reports the status of any LTO5 media partitions (LTFS). The TapeAssure database can now be backed up and restored. TapeAssure data exported from Command View TL can be analyzed and graphed in the new TapeAssure Analysis Template (requires Microsoft Excel). Reporting of cleaning cartridge use in TapeAssure. Support for SMI-S CXWS CIMOM version 2.3, providing co-existence with CV-EVA management stations. Support for zero-drive frames for ESL E-Series Tape Libraries with a cross-link mechanism (CLM) In CLM configurations, secondary cabinets (cabinets 25) can contain zero drives. Support for OCP password access to open load ports on the EML E-Series Tape Library. Support for Microsoft Internet Explorer v8 and Firefox v3.0 or v3.5.00.

New features in Command View TL 2.6

TapeAssure support for MSL G3 and 1/8 G2 LTO drives and standalone LTO drives. (Minimum hardware and firmware requirements apply.) Support for Ultrium 3280 tape drives in EML and ESL E-Series tape libraries. 8Gb Fibre Channel speed also supported. Detailed media health and usage information is now included in Command View TL's TapeAssure tab. Added Windows 2008 and VMWare support for Command View TL (Windows 2000 is no longer supported with this release). Email alerts can be sent when a major component's health changes.

New features in Command View TL 2.5

TapeAssure Provides comprehensive summaries and detailed information about the properties, status, performance, utilization, and health of all tape drives and media for every
New features in Command View TL 2.8 265

HP library in the SAN. This data can be exported on demand or at scheduled times to a comma-separated values (.csv) file for analysis with spreadsheet programs or custom scripts. The Interface Manager can synchronize its time with Network Time Protocol (NTP) servers. Tape drives can be rebooted through the GUI and CLI. Only one drive can be rebooted at a time. The drive description in the Health summary indicates when the drive needs cleaning. The inventory page displays media properties, including vendor, format, capacity, write protected, WORM, and encryption. Identifies hosts that are mapped to devices that have non-contiguous LUNs for drives behind interface controllers. Allows removal of hosts from Secure Manager through the CLI. The GUI launcher panel indicates the number of browser sessions logged into Command View TL. The GUI support tab includes a link to the online Guided Troubleshooting tool. Includes a wizard to assist in replacing one or many LTO2 or LTO3 tape drives with corresponding LTO4 tape drives.

New features in Command View TL 2.4

Supports IPv6 or a dual-stack (IPv4 and IPv6) combination. EML has received IPv6 Ready Logo Phase-1 certification and ESL has received IPv6 Ready Logo Phase-2 certification. See http:// www.ipv6ready.org for more information. Supports SSH/SFTP clients Status icons are included for each library on the launcher panel. Host/HBA filtering can be done from Secure Manager dialogs. Drive health alerts are enhanced. Secure Manager operations process faster. Configuration files from up to two previous versions can be restored.

New features in Command View TL 2.3.0.1 and 2.3.02

Support a new Interface Manager card (part number 340252-003). For more information about the Interface Manager cards, see External features overview (page 14). Interface Controller reboots are now reported as Informational alerts in the alert log.

New features in Command View TL 2.3

Command View TL 2.3 adds support for the encryption of data on LTO4 tape drives. Specifically, Command View 2.3 does the following: Supports the HP StorageWorks Secure Key Manager (SKM) key management appliance which provides centralized encryption key management for HP LTO4 enterprise tape libraries. SKM enables you to encrypt the data on LTO4. Includes a new user name/role for the Security Officer: security. Adds a logout command so you can log out without closing the Command View TL browser window.

New features in Command View TL 2.2

Command View TL 2.2 adds support for the LTO4 Ultrium 1840 tape drives to the many new features added in Command View TL 2.0. The LTO4 and/or LTO5 tape drive offers direct fibre

266 New features in previous versions of Command View TL

connection to the storage area network (SAN). Command View TL 2.2 includes the following new features for working with LTO4 and later tape drives: Monitoring and configuring LTO4 tape drivesYou can configure and monitor the FC connections between the tape drive and the SAN. See (page 130). World wide name (WWN) retentionThe WWN is retained when you replace an LTO4 tape drive with another LTO4 tape drive. See Changing the connection properties of advanced LTO4 tape drives (page 131). Installing, upgrading, and replacing LTO4 tape drivesWith LTO4 tape drives, the library architecture includes an internal network switch. When you install the first LTO4 tape drive in a library that only contains LTO2 or LTO3 tape drives, you need to add and configure the internal network switch. When replacing an LTO2 or LTO3 tape drive with an LTO4 tape drive, you must also reconfigure some library settings to enable to the new tape drive. See (page 130). The ability to turn off Telnet (and SSH) and FTP (and SFTP).

New features in Command View TL 2.0

SecurityESL E-Series and EML libraries have different security levels for different users. The users that are defined are administrator, operator, and guest. You are prompted for the user and password when you select a library to manage. The user name appears in the center of the bottom of the screen. See Managing libraries (page 24) and Changing library passwords (page 34). Host mappingYou can dynamically configure additional servers to access your tape library without rebooting the interface controllers. See Configuring host HBA access (page 144). You can create a custom device map even if the Interface Manager Mode is set to automatic. PartitionsYou can add slots or tape drives to an existing partition without first deleting and recreating it. You can allocate partitioned (virtual) robots to both FC ports instead of being grouped on port 0. See Extending a partition (page 155). Firmware updatesA firmware update wizard walks you step-by-step through the process and checks that your library meets the minimum requirements. Firmware updates for multiple components happen simultaneously. See Updating the firmware with the Firmware Update wizard (page 137). Support ticketsSome support tickets are non-disruptive to backups and contain more information than before. You can generate support tickets even if the library is not completely healthy. Support tickets for multiple components happen simultaneously. Support tickets for tape drives are generated and cached whenever a tape cartridge is ejected. Large support tickets are in one file and are therefore easier to e-mail. See Using support tickets (page 172). World Wide Name (WWN) retention is automatically and always enabled in Command View TL 2.0. MonitoringA summary of the component status and recent alerts appears in the upper-right corner of every Library screen. The Health Summary screen contains a Recent Alerts column. On the Health Summary screen, you can right-click a component, and then select Alerts. Readings from temperature, voltage, and fan speed sensors inside the library cabinet appear in the GUI. See Viewing the status of components (page 39). Simultaneous logins from multiple GUIs and CLIsMultiple users can manage a library at the same time without interrupting critical or long-running operations. The Close button in upper-right corner returns you to the Launcher window from which you select libraries to manage. See Navigating Command View TL (page 25). The Help link in the upper-right corner now opens the online help in a new browser window.

New features in Command View TL 2.0 267

NOTE: If you have a popup blocker, it will prevent the online help browser window from appearing. You can either set your popup blocker to enable pop-ups on this site or hold the Ctrl key while selecting the Help link. Hardware replacement wizardStep-by-step wizard that guides you through the replacement of one or more interface controllers. Retains all settings including Secure Manager settings, partitions, and WWNs and updates firmware revisions. Necessary component reboots happen simultaneously, instead of serially. Manual synchronization of Secure Manager settingsSave Secure Manager settings to the interface controllers when it is convenient for you.

268 New features in previous versions of Command View TL

Index
A
Access Control Group, 145 adding, 145 editing, 149 removing, 152 Action menu, 59 Actions menu, 25 button, 26 default command, 25 in a 2-panel window, 25 Add License Key dialog box, 32 Add Trap Entry command, 133 adding Access Control Group, 145 capacity, 156 library, 27 manually, 27 license key, 32 partitions, 153 slots, 156 SNMP trap, 132 admin user, 22, 34 advanced features, 144 alert log displaying in popup box, 40 icons, 40 sorting, 40 viewing, 39 Alert Log command, 39 alerts SNMP, 132 ALPA matrix, 262 Application bar, 59 automatic Interface Manager mode, 41, 184 Autosense radio button, 132 cascade port, 181 cautions browser navigation buttons, 25 cabling interface controllers, 43 hot-pluggable interface controllers, 43 moving media, 136 rebooting components, 136 rebooting interface controllers, 193, 195, 196, 199, 200, 201, 208, 209, 247 rebooting Interface Manager card, 195, 197, 201 rebooting library, 194, 197 removing partitions, 154, 155 updating firmware, 137 using manual mode, 41, 185 certificate authority (CA) change, 168 key manager, 168 update, 168 certificates change, 168 key manager, 168 update, 168 Change password command, 34 changing contact information, 35 data time frame in TapeAssure, 66 date and time, 35 e-mail settings, 28 library partitions and key manager, 169 managed library, 25 management station password, 34 network settings for Interface Manager card, 36 port mode, 41 port speed, 41, 131 SNMP trap, 133 checking connectivity, 37 cleaning tapes view status in TapeAssure, 107 Clear WWN Mismatches command, 43 Clear WWN Mismatches dialog box, 44 clearing WWN mismatch, 43 Command Line Interface (CLI) abbreviating commands, 183 accessing, 180 command reference, 190 command sequences, 182 command syntax structure, 182 common functions, 185 described, 180 device status, monitoring, 186 FC interface controllers, configuring, 185 firmware commands, 187 login information, 181 navigating, 184 operational commands, 184 serial interface
269

B
backup application key manager, 162 browser navigation buttons, 25 pop-ups, 175, 268 requirements, 16 buttons see icons

C
cabling, 38 Cabling View command, 38 caching, 244 support ticket, 173 capacity enabling upgrade, 157 upgrading, 156 EML 71e, 157 ESL E-series, 156

described, 180 starting, 180 Telnet interface starting, 181 via the cascade port, 181 via the LAN, 181 Command View ESL, 15, 18 Command View MSL, 24 Command View TL accessing, 15 described, 21 device numbering conventions, 183 displaying details, 25 GUI, 1 1, 15 installing, 18 multiple GUI clients, 15 multiple sessions, 1 1 navigating, 25 new features, 264, 265 prerequisites, 15 service, 21 starting, 21 toolbar buttons, 25 version 1.5, 15, 18 Command View TL command, 21 commands abbreviating, 183 basic navigation, 184 command level, 182 command sequences, using, 182 firmware, 187 operational, 184 syntax structure, 182 communications settings, 180 community string, 132 adding, 133 component rebooting, 136 status, 39 configuration described, 134 restoring, 134 saving, 134 viewing saved, 135 Configuration tab, 24 configuring, 41, 131 see also changing host HBA access, 144 interface controllers, 185 library CLI, 185 GUI, 26 Connection Properties command, 41, 44 connections interface controller, 41 tape drive, 131 within library, 38 connectivity verifying, 37
270 Index

verifying on key manager, 169 Connectivity Check dialog box, 37 contact information, changing, 35 conventions document, 260 text symbols, 260 creating data verification partition, 1 16 Critical icon, 24, 40 current library, 25 custom device map viewing, 152

D
data encryption see key manager data verification, 1 15 adding tapes to queue, 125 changing verification type, 125 configuring data verification policy, 125 configuring library, 1 16 creating data verification partition, 1 16 deleting data verification partition, 1 18 deleting test logs, 1 19 disabling email notification, 127 known good tapes, 121 removing tapes from queue, 125 selecting tapes, 125 setting policy, 125 setting the default type, 1 19 tapes in partition window, 121 tapes queued for verification window, 122 tapes under verification window, 122 Test Setup Details screen, 1 19 using email notification, 126 viewing detailed information, 1 19 viewing drives in partition, 123 viewing results, 127 data verification partition creating, 1 16 deleting, 1 18 viewing drives in, 123 date, changing, 35 default CLI username and password, 181 management station passwords, 22 menu item, 25 restoring, 141 deleting a partition, 154 all partitions, 155 data verification partition, 1 18 library, 27 SNMP trap, 133 support ticket, 179 details, 25 device see component device numbering CLI, 183

GUI, 26 Device Selection tab, 22 device status monitoring CLI, 186 GUI, 38 Direct Attach radio button, 42, 132 Disable Factory Overrides dialog box, 143 discovering library manually, 27 displaying see viewing documentation conventions, 260 HP website, 259 related, 259 downgrading firmware, 139, 142 drive drive properties environment tab in TapeAssure, 81 drive properties health tab in TapeAssure, 79 drive properties last loaded tape tab in TapeAssure, 84 drive properties performance tab in TapeAssure, 82 drive properties usage tab in TapeAssure, 83 drive assessment viewing results, 129 Drive Connection Properties command, 131 drive margin report, 172 Drives command, 39

SAN relationship, 1 1 SAN relationship illustrated, 12 separate licenses, 31 troubleshooting, 252 ESL G3 change library name, 27 ESL G3 library, 24 Connectivity Check, 37 separate licenses, 31 troubleshooting, 256 ESL286e, 156 ESL322e, 156 ESL9000 Series library, 140 Connectivity Check, 37 separate licenses, 31 troubleshooting, 250 exclamation point icon, 24, 40 extending a partition, 155

F
Fabric (SAN) Attach radio button, 42, 132 factory defaults, restoring, 141 overrides, 142 password, 139, 142 Factory Overrides dialog box, 143 factory password, 176 factory settings see default FC host ports numbering, 26 Fibre Channel (FC) interface controllers see interface controllers filtering, 59 firewall, 19 firmware downgrading, 142 enabling downgrades, 139 keeping up-to-date, 139 updating from the Web, 139 updating I1xx to I2xx, 140 updating with CLI, 186 updating with the Firmware Update wizard, 137 using locally stored files, 139 versions that can save and restore, 134 versions that can upgrade, 140 Firmware Update command, 138 front panel, 26, 183 FTP, 186, 187

E
e-mail settings, 28 e-mailing support ticket, 177 Edit Contact Information command, 36 Edit Drive Connection Settings command, 131 Edit E-mail Settings command, 28 Edit Interface Manager Mode command, 41 Edit Library Name command, 36 Edit Network Settings command, 33, 36 Edit Port Connection Settings command, 41 Edit System Date/Time command, 36 editing see changing Access Control Group, 149 EML 71e capacity upgrade, 157 EML E-Series library, 24 Connectivity Check, 37 front panel device numbering, 26, 183 SAN relationship, 1 1 SAN relationship illustrated, 13 separate licenses, 31 troubleshooting, 254 Enable Factory Overrides command, 143 encrypting data, 158 see also key manager Enterprise Secure Key Manager ports, 20 Enterprise Secure Key Manager (ESKM), 158 see also key manager ESKM enrollment troubleshooting, 256 ESL E-Series library, 24 Connectivity Check, 37 front panel device numbering, 26, 183

G
generating support ticket CLI, 187 GUI, 172 green checkmark icon, 24, 40 guest user, 22, 34

H
hard ALPA, changing, 41, 131 Hardware Replacement command, 43 Health Summary command, 38
271

help obtaining, 259 Help button, 26 Help command, 268 Home command, 25 Host Access command, 153 host HBA configuring access, 144 synchronizing, 152 viewing device map, 152 viewing properties, 152 HP technical support, 259 HyperTerminal, 180

ESKM enrollment, 256 ESL E-Series, 252 ESL G3, 256 ESL9000 Series, 250 MSL, 256

K
Key Management command, 160, 163, 164, 166, 168, 169, 171 key manager add address, 166 add hostname, 166 certificate authority (CA), 168 certificates, 168 change library partitions, 169 change tier information, 166 configuration, add a tier, 168 configuration, delete a tier, 168 delete address, 166 delete hostname, 166 enroll library, 160 login, 164 select backup application, 162 select ESKM, 160 select SKM, 160 upgrade from SKM to ESKM, 170 verify library connectivity, 169

I
icons, 40 green checkmark, 24, 40 Help, 26 Print, 26 red X, 24, 40 Refresh, 26 status, 24 yellow exclamation point, 24, 40 increasing see upgrading Information icon, 24, 40 initial configuration steps, 26 Insight Remote Support, testing, 23 installing Command View TL, 18 instant-on license, 32 interface controller configuring with CLI, 185 connection properties, 41 device numbering conventions, 183 numbering, 26 port mode, 41 port speed, 41 replacing, 42 WWN, 42 Interface Controllers command, 39 Interface Manager card advanced features, 144 automatic mode, 41, 184 cascade port, 181 changing network settings, 36 illustrated, 14 manual mode, 41, 185 user interfaces, illustrated, 1 1 verifying network settings, 37 Interface Manager command, 39 Interface Manager mode, 41 changing, 185 described, 184 Interface Manager Mode command, 41 Internet connection, 17 IP address cascade port, 182 issues EML E-Series, 254
272 Index

L
L&TT downloading firmware files, 192, 193, 194, 195 support ticket viewing, 172, 177 support tickets CLI, 202, 203 GUI, 172 viewing, 188 Launch Firmware Update Wizard command, 138 Launch Interface Controller Replacement Wizard command, 43 Launch Key Management Setup Wizard command, 160, 163, 164, 166, 168, 169, 171 Launch Support Ticket Wizard command, 172 Launcher window, 22 returning to, 25 tabs, 22 LEDs, 14 diagnostic codes network link activity/speed LEDs, 249 status LEDs, 249 Library data moves, 56 empty slots, 53 overview, 51 partition, 51, 52 usage, 51, 53 library adding, 27 adding LTO4 and later tape drives, 130

adding manually, 27 changing, 25 configuration described, 134 restoring, 134 saving, 134 viewing saved, 135 configuring, 26 current, 25 device numbering conventions, 26 enroll in backup application, 162 enroll with a key manager, 160 front panel, 26 information, 38 managing, 24 partitioning, 153 password changing, 34 removing, 27 Library command, 39 library name ESL G3, 27 MSL6480, 27 Library Name dialog box, 36 library partitions change, 169 Library Properties dialog box, 39 Library Sensors command, 39 Library Settings command, 35 License Key Summary tab, 22, 31 license keys adding, 32 described, 144 instant-on, 32 managing, 31 permanent, 32 purchasing, 144 Licensed Capacity command, 158 Licensed Capacity Panel Upgrade, 157 localhost, 21 Log Entry Properties dialog box, 40 login default CLI, 181, 182 ESKM, 20 key manager, 164 library, 22 SKM, 20 SMTP, 20 LTO drive view detailed drive information in TapeAssure, 77 LTO tape properties in TapeAssure, 89 LTO4 and later tape drive, 130 see also tape drive adding, 130 connection properties, 131 LTO4 tape drive, 1 1, 158 new in version 2.2, 266 LTO5 tape drive, 1 1, 158

LTO6 tape drive, 1 1, 158

M
MAC address, 36, 43 management station change libraries using TapeAssure, 44 described, 15 firewall, 19 installing Command View TL, 21 network settings, 33 primary, 15 proxy settings, 33 view libraries using TapeAssure, 44 web server port, 34 Management Station tab, 22 managing library, 24 license keys, 31 manual mode, 41, 185 marking tapes for drive assessment, 121 Media Management command, 137 mode, 41 mouse double-click, 25 Move Media dialog box, 137 moving tape cartridges, 136 MSL G3 library, 24 MSL library Command View MSL, 24 configure for TapeAssure, 45 troubleshooting, 256 MSL6480 change library name, 27 MSL6480 library, 24 Connectivity Check, 37 separate licenses, 31 multiple sessions, 1 1 users, 22

N
navigating Command View TL, 25 network settings changing, 36 verifying, 37 Network Settings dialog box, 33 new features, 264, 265 numbering, 26

O
one-based vs. zero-based numbering, 26, 183 Open dialog box, 135 Operations tab, 24 operator user, 22, 34 optional features, 144 overrides, factory, 142

P
partition see data verification partition
273

adding, 153 deleting, 154 deleting all, 155 extending, 155 Partitioning command, 153, 154, 155 password default CLI, 181 factory, 139, 142, 176 library, 34 changing, 34 default, 22 permanent license, 32 physical connections, 38 popup blocker, 175, 268 Port Connection Settings dialog box, 42, 132 port mode, 41 port speed, 41, 131 ports, 19, 20, 34 ESKM, 20 Interface Manager card, 14 SKM, 20 SMTP, 20 prerequisites, 15 primary management station, 15 Print button, 26 proxy settings, 33

Q
Question Mark button, 26

R
Reboot command, 136 rebooting all controllers, 136 components, 136 components that require a reboot, 136 Interface Manager, 136 single component, 136 red X icon, 24, 40 Refresh button, 26 related documentation, 259 removing see deleting Access Control Group, 152 library, 27 replacing an interface controller, 42 Restore Configuration command, 135 Restore Configuration dialog box, 135 Restore Defaults on All Components command, 141 Restore Factory Defaults command, 141 restoring factory defaults, 141 library configuration, 134 Robotics command, 39 roles see users

S
sample time, choosing, 66 Save Current Configuration command, 134 Save Current Configuration dialog box, 134
274 Index

Save/Restore command, 134, 135 saving library configuration, 134 support ticket, 177 screens see windows SCSI bus numbering, 26 Secure Key Manager new in version 2.3, 266 ports, 20 Secure Key Manager (SKM), 158 see also key manager Secure Manager, 144 see also host HBA accessing through the CLI, 188 adding a host, 189 advanced, 145, 188 basic, 145, 188 described, 144, 188 mapping a host, 188 Send to support provider in reference to an open case radio button, 178 Send to support provider to request support by e-mail radio button, 178 serial interface, 1 1, 152 described, 180 starting, 180 Services applet, 21, 251, 254 showing see viewing slot numbering, 26 slots see capacity SMTP, 28 SNIA, 10 SNMP adding trap, 132 alerts, 132 editing trap, 133 removing trap, 133 SNMP Alerts command, 133 sorting, 59 sorting alert log, 40 starting Command View TL, 21 Status tab, 24 Subscriber's Choice, HP, 260 Support tab, 24 support ticket, 173 compatibility between I1xx and I200, 140 deleting, 179 described, 172, 187 e-mail setup, 177 e-mailing, 177 file format, 172 generating CLI, 187 GUI, 172 saving, 177 viewing, 175 viewing with Library and Tape Tools (L&TT), 188 Support Ticket command, 172, 175, 177, 179 symbols in text, 260

synchronizing host access, 152

T
tape cartridges content panel in TapeAssure, 87 encrypting, 158 moving, 136 overview in TapeAssure, 89 properties in TapeAssure, 89 view health in TapeAssure, 90 view last used drive in TapeAssure, 94 view performance in TapeAssure, 92 view usage in TapeAssure, 93 view utilization in TapeAssure, 100 tape drive configure for TapeAssure, 45 drive properties overview tab in TapeAssure, 78 encryption, 158, 266 numbering, 26 port speed, 131 view drive health in TapeAssure, 59 view drive performance in TapeAssure, 63 view drive utilization in TapeAssure, 65 TapeAssure, 44 access, 46 analyze data from CSV files, 1 12 change data time frame, 66 change management station, 44 choose a sample time, 66 cleaning tapes, 107 configure drives, 45 configure MSL libraries, 45 drive properties environment tab, 81 drive properties health tab, 79 drive properties last loaded tape tab, 84 drive properties overview tab, 78 drive properties performance tab, 82 drive properties usage tab, 83 export library data to CSV, 108 export panels as PDF files, 109 licensing notes, 22 LTO tape properties, 89 LTO tape properties health tab, 90 LTO tape properties last used drive tab, 94 LTO tape properties overview tab, 89 LTO tape properties performance tab, 92 LTO tape properties usage tab, 93 restore database, 1 14 save database file as, 1 15 schedule library data export, 1 12 scheduled backup of database, 1 14 status of cleaning tapes, 108 tape utilization, 100 tapes content panel, 87 test Insight Remote Support, 23 view dashboard, 46 view detailed drive information, 77 view drive health, 59 view drive health and life, 61

view drive performance, 63 view drive performance and utilization graph, 76 view drive performance and utilization history, 67 view drive utilization, 65 view drives needing attention, 48 view information, 46 view libraries needing attention, 48 view newly added tapes graph, 105 view Performance Advisor graph, 74 view tape health and life, 98 view tape utilization and performance history, 101 view tapes needing attention, 48 tapes in partition, 121 tasks users can perform, 34 TCP/IP, 36 technical support HP, 259 Telnet interface, 1 1, 152, 180 starting, 181 via the cascade port, 181 via the LAN, 181 test logs, deleting, 1 19 Test Setup Details screen, 1 19 text symbols, 260 tiers add to key manager configuration, 168 change information, 166 delete from key manager configuration, 168 time, 35 tool tip, 25 toolbar buttons, 25 trap destinations, 132 adding, 133 troubleshooting, 249 EML E-Series library, 254 ESKM enrollment, 256 ESL E-Series, 252 ESL G3 library, 256 ESL9000 Series, 250 MSL, 256 truncated text, 25, 40

U
Ultrium 1840 see LTO4 tape drive updating firmware CLI, 186 GUI, 137 I1xx to I2xx, 140 upgrading capacity, 156 key manager, 170 Use cached support ticket whenever possible check box, 244 user interfaces described, 1 1 GUI, 1 1 illustrated, 1 1 preferred, 15 serial, 1 1
275

Telnet, 1 1, 180 users, 22, 34 default CLI, 181

V
verifying see checking View Saved Configuration command, 135 viewing alert log, 39 component status, 39 details, 25 device map, 152 health summary, 38 host HBA properties, 152 physical connections, 38 saved library configuration, 135 support ticket, 175 truncated text, 40

W
Warning icon, 24, 40 web server port, 34 websites HP, 259 HP Subscriber's Choice for Business, 260 license keys, 144 product manuals, 259 purchasing license keys, 144 windows Launcher, 22 WWN, 41, 131 interface controller, 42 mismatch, 43

Y
yellow exclamation point icon, 24, 40

Z
zero-based vs. one-based numbering, 26, 183

276 Index